The scene of the πρόλογος, ll. 1-116, is probably on the north side of Colonus, with Athens in the distance. See Introduction, p. 282. The spot so familiar to the audience (οὐ λόγοις τιμώμεν' ἀλλὰ τῇ συνουσίᾳ, infr. 63-64) would probably be recalled by the representation on the stage of some striking objects, especially those which marked the religio loci. Oedipus enters (right?), led by Antigone, and sits down in the middle of the proscenium, where he remains until Antigone descries the approach of the chorus.

Ἀντιγόνη ... Οἰδίπουν A word or two in the dialogue serves to introduce the persons, as in O. T. 8, ὁ πᾶσι κλεινὸς Οἰδίπους, with which τὸν πλανήτην Οἰδίπουν is intentionally contrasted.

τίνας .. πόλιν Cp. Hom. Od. 6. 119, alib., τεῶν αὖτε βροτῶν εἰς γαῖαν ἱκάνω;

τὸν πλανήτην Oedipus, like Orestes, before coming to Athens, has wandered far since the pollution was first found upon him. Cp. Aesch. Eum. 337.8, οὐ προστρόπαιον οὐδ᾽ ἀφοίβαντον χέρα, | ἀλλ᾿ ἀμβλὺν ἤδη προστετριμμένον τε πρὸς | ἄλλοισιν οἶκοις καὶ πορεύμασιν βροτῶν.

καθ᾿ ἡμέραν τὴν νῦν His place of sojourn changed from day to day.

σπανιστοῖς . . δωρήμασιν With scanted alms. Cp. Shak. Lear, 3. 2, 67, their scanted courtesy. The verbal σπανιστός, made small, is explained by the words which follow, σμικρὸν .. φέροντα. For the situation, cp. Od. 15. 312, πλάγξομαι, αἴ κέν τις κοτύλην καὶ πύρνον ὀρέξῃ.

σμικρὸν.. σμικροῦ It is difficult to suppose that two forms of the same word can have occurred in the same line, although μικροῦ, the reading of L, is supported by the alliteration of μεῖον, which is opposed to it.

φέροντα Cp. Ο. Τ. 590, ἐκ σοῦ πάντ᾽ ἄνευ φόβου φέρω. For καὶ = καίτοι, see Essay on Language § 25. p. 42.

. For my sufferings, and the long time which I have lived, and also a noble nature, teach me resignation.

χὠ χρόνος ξυνὼν μακρός. And the length of the time that is with me. Time is partly personified; Essay on Language p. 19. Cp. οἱ συγγενεῖς μῆνες, Ο. Τ. 1082, Shak. Tro. and Cress. 4, 5, That hast so long walked hand in hand with time. The position of μακρός is emphatic. Essay on Language § 41. p. 76. τρίτον is added by a familiar pleonasm. Ib. pp. 69, 75.

θάκησιν Ricc. 34 has θάκοισιν, anticipating Seidler's conjecture. The reading θάκοισιν admits of a possible explanation. At some sitting place, if you see any seat-either by a place where all may sit, or by a sacred grove, let me stop and sit down. θάκοισιν, dat. of place, supplemented by πρὸς βεβήλοις (θάκοισιν), and in construction with στῆσον. But the reading in the text is simpler and smoother, and the corruption may have arisen from a very simple itacism. Cp. Phil. 17, 18, ἡλίου διπλῆ | πάρεστιν ἐνθάκησις, where, as here, θάκησις is opportunity of sitting. And this is exactly the meaning which the context requires. Essay on Language p. 94, δ.

πρὸς βεβήλοις For the neut. adj., cp. 167, ἀβάτων ἀποβάς. The line prepares the way for what is to follow. Oedipus is led by a divine presentiment towards the sacred grove of the Eumenides; cp. infr. 97, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ ὅπως οὐ πιστὸν ἐξ ὑμῶν πτερὸν | ἐξήγαγ᾽ ἐς τόδ' ἄλσος. See also the second ὑπόθεσις to this play, οὗ μὴ ἐστιν ἑτέρῳ βεβήλῳ τόπος, αὐτόθι κάθηται. The suppliant in clinging to the altar, etc., inevitably trespassed on things sacred. Cp. Eur. Suppl. 63, ὁσίως οὐχ, ὑπ' ἀνάγκας δὲ προσπίπτουσα . . θεῶν θυμέλας.

ὡς πυθοίμεθα And then, haply, we may learn. Cp. Aesch. Suppl. 675, καὶ γεραροῖσι πρεσβυτοδόκοι | γεμόντων θυμέλαι φλεγόντων θ', | ὡς πόλις εὖ νέμοιτο. Where the optative expresses a remote intention. Here the uncertainty of the mood accords with the feeling of the blind and weary Oedipus.

μανθάνειν γὰρ ἥκομεν ἥκειν, like other verbs of motion, is used with a mixed literal and figurative meaning: We are come where we must learn, i. e. partly we are here to learn, partly we are reduced to the point of learning. Cp. O. Τ. 1433, ἄριστος ἐλθών: El. 1201, μόνος γὰρ ἥκω τοῖς ἴσοις ἀλγῶν κακοῖς. Ε. on. L. § 52. p. 97.

The omission of δé in L is indefensible. χἂν has some MS. authority, and may be right, notwithstanding the objection which is made to the double crasis (for καὶ ἃ ἄν). But Elmsley's correction is more probable.

This answers τίνων ἀνδρῶν πόλιν; i. e. We are not yet come to the city, whose towers are seen from far.

στέγουσιν Protect. Cp. Aesch. Sept. 216, 797, where, however, the word is used without the acc. of that which is protected. This is a simpler and more natural expression than στέφουσιν, which is therefore an unnecessary conjecture.

ὡς ἀπ᾿ ὀμμάτων (1) Το judge of them by the eye, sc. εἰκάζειν or κρίνειν, or more simply without supplying an infinitive, (2) to the eye. Are far away for the eye to reach, i. e. We have but a distant view of them,

χῶρος δ᾽ ὅδ' ἱρός Answering to τίνας χώρους ἀφίγμεθα; in l. 2, and to ἢ πρὸς ἄλσεσιν θεῶν in l. 10.

ὡς ἀπεικάσαι The reading ὡς σάφ' εἰκάσαι, As one may guess with certainty, though it has some MS. authority, is less in keeping with the moderation of the style. Cp. Tr. 141, πεπυσμένη μέν, ὡς ἀπεικάσαι, πάρει | πάθημα τοὐμόν. ἀπο as in ἀπομαντεύεσθαι, ἀποπειρᾶσθαι : i. e. ἀπεικάσαι is to hazard a conjecture.

βρύων governs the genitive with the general notion of fulness. Ср. О. Т. 83, πολυστεφὴς . . δάφνης.

πυκνόπτεροι The compound adds picturesqueness to the expression. Many-winged nightingales, i. e. Many fluttering nightingales. See Essay on Language p. 101. For the synaphea, cp. O. T. 29, Ar. Av. 1716.

Since the way you have travelled is long for an aged man.

τὸν τυφλόν For the article, cp. Ο. Τ. 1323, τὸν τυφλὸν κηδείων.

I have had time enough to learn that well.

When Oedipus is seated, he repeats his inquiry. The repetition is marked by δή. Now, can you tell me-?

τοῦτό *γ᾽ is obviously right, though only found in one MS, Par. F. τοῦτον has arisen from χῶρον in the preceding line. The verse is given to Antig. by L, but the 2nd hand has put a line against this and the following verse, and a cross in the margin. The initials of the persons after 21 are by a recent hand.

ἐξοικήσιμος.. οἰκητός If it is habitable. It is indeed inhabited. The latter word is more definite. Antigone sees clear signs of habitation. The compound with ἐξ gives emphasis and completeness to the idea: cp. Thuc. 2. 17, ὑπὸ τῆς παραχρῆμα ἀνάγκης ἐξῳκήθη: also words like ἐξεστεμμένος, ἐκκοσμεῖν, ἐξανδρόομαι. Ε. on L. p. 101. The reason of the condition, εἴπερ κ.τ.λ., is simply that in an uninhabited place there would be no one to ask. Sch. καλῶς δὲ τὰ τῆς οἰκονομίας, ἵνα μὴ μόνος ὁ Οἰδίπους ἀπολειφθῇ.

Do you mean coming forth from the town and advancing hitherwards? On the inverted order, see Essay on Language § 41, b, p. 78.

Nay: he is actually in our presence: and whatever you think good to say at this moment, say on, for the man is here.

ἀκούων The reply in l. 36 suits with the aposiopesis, and the change to ἀκούω is not a happy one.

οὔνεχ᾽.. ἀδηλοῦμεν Since so fortunately we have met with you, who come to inform our ignorance. The genitive follows σκοπός, and φράσαι is epexegetic, αἴσος happy, fortunate, as a good omen is called αἴσιος ὄρνις. σκοπός, properly one sent to look, hence one who brings intelligence. Cp. the figurative use of σκοπός in infr. 1096, τῷ σκοπῷ μὲν οὐκ ἐρεῖς | ὡς ψευδόμαντις.

The MS. reading τῶν is very possibly erroneous, as in El. 422, βλαστεῖν βρύοντα θαλλόν, τῷ κατάσκιον (L), where the metre decides for ᾧ. The early corruption τῶν ἃ δηλοῦμεν, however, is a proof of the antiquity of the reading τῶν, for had the words been ὧν ἀδηλοῦμεν, nobody would have thought of altering them to ὧν ἃ δηλοῦμεν. ἀδηλέω is not found elsewhere; but cp. Hesych. ἀδηλίαν, ἄγνοιαν, and the analogy of ἀλαστεῖν, etc. Essay on Language p. 102.

ΞΕΝΟΣ The Stranger, so called in relation to Oedipus, is an Athenian, but from the neighbourhood of Colonus, as appears from l. 70, ἆρ᾽ ἄν τις αὐτῷ πομπὺς ἐξ ὑμῶν μόλοι.

οὐχ ἁγνὸν πατεῖν i. e. ὃν πατεῖν οὐχ ὅσιόν ἐστιν. Cp. Eur. Heracl. 1011, οὐχ ἁγνός εἰμι τῷ κτανόντι κατθανεῖν.

τοῦ θεῶν νομίζεται Το which of the Gods is it assigned by custom?

What is their dread name, that I may address my prayers to them? i. e. τίσιν ἂν εὐξαίμην, κλύων αὐτῶν τὸ σεμνὸν ὄνομα ;

ὁ γ᾽ ἐνθάδ' * ἄν The MSS, Suidas, and Eustathius agree in reading ὤν, which has been altered to avoid the omission of ἄν. For this see Essay on Language § 27. p. 45, and cp. Ar. Av. 180, πόλος; τίνα τρόπον; ΠΕ. ὥσπερ εἴποι τὶς τόπος, as well as Aesch. Ag. 339, τοιαῦτά τοι γυναικὸς ἐξ ἐμοῦ κλύοις: Ibid. 1163: Supp. 727. But ὤν has no meaning here and ἄν is better.

ἄλλα δ᾽ ἀλλαχοῦ καλά These words are best taken generally. The different names of the Furies illustrate the truth that Different customs are honoured in different places. Cp. Pind. Fr. 200, Ἄλλο δ᾽ ἄλλοισιν νόμισμα. The Stranger, while insisting on the sanctity of the spot, is aware that customs vary. His gentleness and moderation contrast with the fanaticism of the chorus. The name Ἐρινύες is avoided.

The MS. reading τόνδ' is shown by the metre to be wrong. Cp. infr. 52 and note. *τὸν ἱκέτην = their suppliant.

*ὡς The meaning is much the same whether we read ὥστε, with the MSS, or ὡς, which is favoured by the interpretation of the Scholiast, and is on the whole more probable. For I will not depart; cp. infr. 1528,9. The reading of the MSS, ὥστε, is only explainable, if at all, as a confused or mixed thought; Oedipus expressing in a single clause his prayer that he may not be driven away, and his determination to remain, That I may remain in this land which I will not leave. Cp. Thuc. 3. 34, ὥστε ἢν μηδὲν ἀρεστὸν λέγῃ, πάλιν αὐτὸν καταστήσειν, where the fut. inf. arises from a slight confusion of a similar kind. ὡs is simpler and better: i e. May they be kind to me, for I mean to stay.

The vagueness of γῆς τῆσδε has been objected to. But the meaning of Oedipus is that he is to rest in the soil of Attica. Cp. 84, 5, ἕδρας.. τῆσδε γῆς.

τί δ᾽ ἔστι τοῦτο What does this mean? The Stranger is awestruck by the unexpected firmness of Oedipus.

ξυμφορᾶς ξύνθημ᾿ ἐμῆς The word that sums my destiny. For ξυμφορά, of the position in which one is placed by destiny, cp. Τr. 1145, φρονῶ δὴ ξυμφορᾶς ἵν᾽ ἔσταμεν. ξύνθημα (from συντιθέσθαι) is an appointed sign, generally in speech or writing, and especially one giving direction at a critical moment. Oedipus is thinking of the language of the oracles which he remembers. Cp. Trach. 157, δέλτον ἐγγεγραμμένην | ξυνθήματ'. Whether the notion of comprising much in little belongs to the word accidentally, or is assisted by some association from συντιθέναι (Εl. 673, ἐν βραχεῖ συνθεὶς λέγω), is not easy to determine. Cp. inf. 586, ἀλλ' ἐν βραχεῖ δὴ τήνδε μ' ἐξαιτεῖ χάριν. Oedipus means that in praying the dread goddesses to receive him to rest finally in Attica, he is uttering the word which expresses his condition and destiny. The broken line has here the effect, not of hurried excitement, but of intense solemnity.

Indeed I am no less afraid to raise you up, without the city knowing of it.' By raising him from sanctuary, the Stranger would become responsible for his protection. The conjecture οὐδ᾽ ἐμοί τοι, suggested by the errors of the MSS, introduces a false emphasis, οὐδέ refers to a suppressed clause. The Stranger has told him to depart, and he has expressed his determination to remain. After his last words the Stranger is unwilling to incur the responsibility of removing him. But without the authority of the state,' he says, I can no more remove you than I can let you remain. μέντοι is therefore preferable.

πρίν γ᾽ ἂν .. δρῶ (1) ‘Until I have first shown the matter, (so as to be advised) what I must do: (the indirect question depends on the notion of consulting implied in ἐνδείξω): or (2), if δρῶ is taken as indicative, what I am doing. This (2) is simpler and more natural. Cp. τί δρᾷς ; infr. 829, Phil. 974.

ὧν σε προστρέπω φράσαι In respect of the things which I entreat you to tell.

τίς ἔσθ The omission of δέ, though supported only by Vat., and Par. B., is favoured by the context, since there is no opposition between this and the previous line. If δέ is genuine, the words must be regarded as a repetition verbatim of the question in 38.

You shall know all that I myself know.' For καί, see Essay on Language § 25. a. 1, p. 42, O. T. 1239 and note. Poseidon is the guardian deity of the whole region: particular spots are sacred to several deities, such as the fire-bringer, the Titan Prometheus. 55, ff. Apollodorus, quoted by the Scholiast, mentions an altar of Prometheus in the temple of Athena in the Academy, and at the entrance of the same temple a pedestal on which was represented in relief an altar of Hephaestus and Prometheus in common, together with the figures of both deities.

ὃν δ᾽ ἐπιστείβεις τόπον .. Ἀθηνῶν But the place where you rest, or the place where you have set your foot, is called the brazen-floored threshold of this land, the stay of Athens. Cp. Od. 17. 196, where οὐδόν is the ground.

χαλκόπους Lit. Having a foundation of brass. A compound adjective, in which, as in πυκνόπτεροι supr. 17, ὑψίποδες, Ο. Τ. 866, the force of the termination is partially lost. The meaning is nearly the same as in 1591, χαλκοῖς βάθροισι γῆθεν ἐρριζωμένον. χάλκεος = indissoluble, as in Pind. Pyth. 10. 27, ὁ χάλκεος οὐρανός. On the question of reconciling this passage with 1590, where Oedipus is described as halting when he reached the καταρράκτης ὀδός, out of sight of the spectators, see the Introduction to this play, p. 282.

ἔρεισμ᾽ Ἀθηνῶν Sophocles supposes the tradition which associated the tomb of Oedipus with the glory of Athens to have been foreshadowed in the local belief: an anticipation similar to that by which the Athenians are called Theseidae in Theseus' time, 1. 1066. Schndw. supposes ἔρεισμα to mean that this threshold of the land' was part of the rock on which the city was built. But though this fancy may have been included in the early belief, it does not agree with the word τόπον in l. 56. Cp. Pind. Fr. 46, Ἑλλάδος ἔρεισμα, κλειναὶ Ἀθῆναι.

Colonus, god of horsemen, who is present with them here.' Cp. 65, τοῦδε τοῦ θεοῦ. There is no need of altering τόνδε into τόν: the presence of the guardian deity, who may or may not have been represented by a statue on the stage, is assumed.

οὐ λόγοις τιμώμεν, ἀλλὰ τῇ ξυνουσίᾳ πλέον Honoured, not in story, but more highly, by loving resort. Thus the poet honours scenes which were familiar to his audience, and probably his own home. They were as yet uncelebrated in poetry, and he was going to make them famous. If recent scholars are right in assigning the Phoenissae to the spring of 410 B.C., the allusion in Phoen. 1707 would be subsequent to O. C., according to the reasoning on p. 278, supra.

Have they a ruler, or, are the people allowed to have a voice?' The reading ἄρχει τίς..; cannot be defended. The inversion, although of course allowable, gives a false emphasis.

This place depends for its government upon the king in the city.' On the use of ἐκ, see Essay on Language § 19. p. 27. There are many indications of the poet's wish to carry the spectators into the past. Cp. infr. 303, μακρὰ κέλευθος, not applicable to a time when Colonus was a suburb of Athens.

And who is thus supreme in word and power?' The emphatic use of τίς, as the real predicate, = τίς ὤν, accounts for the inversion. Essay on Language § 41. p. 78. See Introd. p. 277.

Could any one from you (i. e. from near Colonus) go to fetch him?' πομπός, = στελῶν in infr. 298.

That Theseus might come for what purpose of speech or decision?' Cp. 1. 68, λόγῳ τε καὶ σθένει. The reading μολεῖν avoids the awkwardness of repeating μόλοι with a different subject, but whether the line is then taken to mean, (1) To what purpose is he to speak to him? Or is he to arrange for him to come?' or (2) To speak to him, or arrange for him to come, for what purpose?' the Stranger is thus made to ignore the obvious meaning of πομπός in the question of Oedipus. The optative (ὡς μόλοι for ὡς ἂν μόλῃ) is occasioned by the optative preceding.

ὡς ἂν.. κερδάνῃ Oedipus, in expressing his own purpose, returns to the more direct form of expression.

μή Essay on Language p. 48. 2, b.

All that I utter shall be full of light. Cp. Aesch. Choeph. 844, πῶς ταῦτ᾽ ἀληθῆ καὶ βλέποντα δοξάσω; and the passive uses of caecus in Latin. The inversion of active and passive expressions is especially frequent in connection with perception by sight. See Essay on Language pp. 98, 99. The Stranger, on seeing the noble bearing of Oedipus, thinks it will be enough if he reports the matter not to the city, cp. 1. 47, but to the elders of the deme.

Do you know how you must avoid disaster? Cp. the common idiom οἶσθ᾽ ὁ δρᾶσον (Ar. Av. 54, etc.), and see O. T. 543 and note.

ἐπείπερ εἰ I tell you this because I see you noble. Sc. ταῦτά σοι λέγω.

ὡς ἰδόντι ὡς emphasises the dative as in supr. 20, ὡς γέροντι.

πλὴν τοῦ δαίμονος But for your fortune. The nobility of Oedipus appears through his rags and blindness. Cp. Shak. Cor. 4. 5. Though thy tackle's torn | Thou show'st a noble vessel. Od. 14. 214, ἀλλ᾽ ἔμπης καλάμην γέ σ᾽ ὀΐομαι εἰσορόωντα | γιγνώσκειν, ib. 20. 194, δύσμορος, ἢ τε ἔοικε δέμας βασιλῆῖ ἄνακτι.

τοῖσδ᾽ ἐνθάδ᾽ αὐτοῦ These here on the spot. For the pleonasm, in which the words ἐνθάδ αὐτοῦ are epexegetic of τοῖσδε, see Essay on Language p. 75. And, for the use of τοῖσδε which requires the epexegesis, ibid. § 22. p. 34. Ср. supra, l. 59, τόνδε.. Κολωνόν.

οἵδε γὰρ κρινοῦσί *τοι The variety of reading, in which both γε and σοι are somewhat harsh, many have σ arisen out of τοι.

ἢ..ἤ An Epic form, which ap. pears also in Aesch. Prom. 780, Choeph. 890, putting an alternative more pointedly than cἰ.. ἤ.

ἡμίν Is the Stranger gone, and are we alone? Dative of remote reference. Essay on Language § 13. p. 19.

O revered forms of dread.' Cp. Aesch. Cho. 1048 ff. For the reduplication of adjectives without a connecting particle, see Essay on Language § 23. P. 37.

5. εὔτε . . ἐγώ Since it is on a seat of yours that I have rested first in this land. ἐπί is probably to be joined with ἕδρας, (cp. supr. 19, κώλα κάμψον τοῦδ᾽ ἐπ᾿ ἀξέστου πέτρου), and ἔκαμψα is used absolutely for ἔκαμψα μέλη. Supr. 19. Essay on Language p. 98. Eur. Hec. 1079, πὰ βῶ; πᾶ στῶ; πᾶ κάμψω; For the position of ἐπί before the subordinate genitive, 127, ἄλσος ἐς τᾶνδε.. κορᾶν : Essay on Language § 41. p. 77. For the sense, cp. Od. 13. 228, ἐπεί σε πρῶτα κιχάνω.

γῆς Partitive genitive with πρώτων. Cp. supra, l. 45, ἔδρας γῆς τῆσδ'.

Φοίβῳ τε κάμοὶ.. ὅς The order of actual sequence is inverted, and the first of the two words, being the more emphatic, is the antecedent to ὅs. Essay on Language § 41. p. 78.

ἀγνώμονες Ungracious. Cp. Tr. 1266-1267, μεγάλην δὲ θεῶν ἀγνωμοσύνην εἰδότες.

τὰ πόλλ᾽ ἐκεῖν᾽ ὅτ᾽ ἐξέχρη κακά Referring to O. T. 789, foll. Cp. Eur. Phoen. 1703 ff.

ταύτην has the emphasis, and is the real predicate. Told me of a resting-place which could be no other than this.' 89. When I came to a land at the end of my wanderings, where I should find a seat belonging to the dread goddesses and auspicious shelter afforded by them, there I should end my ill fated life.' ἐλθόντι] In construction with μοι, as if the sentence were παῦλαν γίνεσθαί μοι.

τερμίαν is predicative, a land which should be the end of my wandering.

ὅπου .. λάβοιμι] Oratio obliqua from οὗ ἂν λάβῃς.

θεῶν with ἕδραν is possessive, with ξενόστασιν subjective, genitive. Essay on Language pp. 12, 62.

The metaphor in κάμψειν βίον is taken from a race. Cp. Eur. El. 755, πρὶν ἂν τέλος | γραμμῆς ἴκηται καὶ πέρας κάμψῃ βίου : Hipp. 87, τέλος δὲ κάμψαιμ᾽ ὥσπερ ἠρξάμην βίου: Hel. 1666, ὅταν δὲ κάμψῃς καὶ τελευτήσῃς βίον. The turning-point is regarded in the figure as the end of the race. The construction as in κάμπτειν δρόμον. The infinitive follows ἔλεξε, and is coordinate with παῦλαν.

κέρδη μὲν οἰκήσαντα Sc. ἐνταῦθα. Having fixed my habitation there,- a benefit to those who had received me, but a calamity to those who sent me forth, who banished me. κέρδη and ἄτην are accusatives in apposition to the action of the verb, expressing the result of the action. If it is objected that the tense is momentary, and the result is only to be realised afterwards, this applies equally to Eur. Οr. 1103, Ἑλένην κτάνωμεν, Μενελέω λύπην πικράν : although some such consideration has probably occasioned the v. r. οἰκήσοντα. Cp. 626, κοὔποτ' Οἱ- δίπουν ἐρεῖς | ἀχρεῖον οἰκητῆρα δέξασθαι τόπων | τῶν ἐνθάδ'. οἰκίσαντα has been conjectured, but οἰκίζω is not used in the sense required.

παρηγγύα (1) He promised withal. παρά = besides.' Or (2), like παρεγγυᾶν σύνθημα, He told me as a sign.' Cp. supr. 46.

ἔγνωκα.. άλσος And I am sure that some true intimation from you has led me to my destination in this grove. Cp. Pind. Ol. 6. 663, Il. 24. 53,4. an

πιστὸν.. πτερόν Some true intimation from you. The meaning of omen or sign is generalized so as to apply to a presentiment or inward intimation. Schol. πτερόν: οἰωνός. τὴν πτέρωσιν τῆς διανοίας. For a similar mental influence, cp. El. 459, οἶμαι μὲν οὖν, οἷμαί τι κἀκείνῳ μέλον | πέμψαι τάδ' αὐτῇ δυσπρόσοπτ᾽ ὀνείρατα: also Phil. 1039, εἰ μὴ τι κέντρον θεῖον ἦγ᾽ ὑμᾶς ἐμοῦ.

The correction ὑμῖν is taken from the note of the Scholiast.

σεμνὸν .. βάθρον Cp. 57, 8: Aesch. Eum. 107, χοάς τ' ἀοίνους, νηφάλια μειλίγματα. The Schol. on this line mentions, on the authority of Polemo and Philochorus, various other deities to whom libations of pure water were offered in Attica.

βίου.. πέρασιν Not a passing out of life, but a passing away of life. The person is not thought of distinct from the life. So the Schol. Cp. infr. 1551 and note, and see Essay on Language § 42 B, p. 80. The genitive βίου, however, is to be taken more closely with καταστροφήν than with πέρασιν.

βίου.. καταστροφήν Ending of life, a metaphor from turning down the end of a thread in weaving. Cp. Hdt. 4. 205, τὴν ζύην κατέπλεξε.

εἰ μή τι.. βροτῶν Unless haply (εἰ μή τι) my afflictions seem too light, who am always suffering the greatest calamities which can afflict mortals. Schol. εἰ μὴ δοκῶ ὑμῖν ἐλαττόνως ἔχειν τὰ κακὰ καὶ δεῖσθαι προσθήκης κακῶν. Cp. Morris' Story of Sigurd, p. 374, And if all be little enough and the Gods begrudge me rest. μειόνως ἔχειν is naturally opposed to ἀρκούντως ἔχειν, and is to be taken in close connection with what follows: i. e. μειόνως ἔχειν..

λατρεύων – μειόνως ἔχειν λατρευμάτων. Herm. takes μειόνως ἔχειν as equivalent το μείονος λόγου εἶναι. But this is hardly legitimate, and gives a poor meaning.

γλυκεῖαι Welcome daughters. This epithet is not here merely propitiatory (like Εὐμενίδες, etc.), but expresses the real feeling of Oedipus. He has no fear of the 'Ερινύες, who have done their worst,' and are now to give him the rest for which he longs; cp. Aj. 394, where, in a different mood, Ajax more passionately invokes Erebus as to him most bright.

μεγίστης Παλλάδος καλούμεναι Called the possession of mightiest Pallas.

ἀνδρὸς Οἰδίπου Pity this miserable shadow of the man that Oedipus once was. For this emphatic sense of ἀνήρ, cp. 393, τηνικαῦτ᾽ ἄρ᾽ εἰμ' ἀνήρ : Αj. 77, πρόσθεν οὐκ ἀνὴρ ὅδ᾽ ἦν. The degree of emphasis in these passages varies. It is less in Aj. 77, than in O. C. 393. And in the present passage it is still more slight, suggesting rather than expressing the contrast of conditions.

The reading of Aldus, which various editors have approved without adopting it, is found in Ven. 467, from which he no doubt derived it. See Introd. p. 284.

χρόνῳ παλαιοί Very old men. The pleonasm is intensive, as in γονῇ γενναῖε, Ο. Τ. 1469.

σῆς ἕδρας ἐπίσκοποι Το see why you are sitting here.' 113. σιγήσομαί τε καὶ σύ μ᾽ ἐξ ὁδοῦ πόδα κρύψον] I will say nothing. But take and hide me out of the way.' με is governed, πρὸς τὸ σημαινόμενον, by the phrase πόδα κρύψον, which is substituted for ὑπέξαγε or the like. Cp. Essay on Language § 16. p. 23.

τῶνδε.. ἐκμάθω Until I learn of these men.' Gen. of perception and also of respect.' Essay on Language pp. 16, 13. For ἐκμανθάνειν, to learn perfectly, cp. Ο. Τ. 575, ἐκμάνθαν᾽. 115-116. For in being fully informed lies the secret of cautious proceeding.' Oedipus has the timidity of age. For the spondee in ἐν γὰρ τῷ μαθεῖν, cp. Εl. 376, εἰ γὰρ τῶνδε μοι. The four words are very closely bound together. 117 ff. Exit Oedipus and Antigone leading him. The scene is changed (?) to the entrance of the sacred grove. The chorus enter from the spectators' right. See Introduction, p. 282.

It is doubtful whether ἦν here is literally past, or, as infra 150, 1696, equivalent to an emphatic ἔστι = ' Who can it be?' according to the use noticed in the Essay on Language § 32, 6. p. 55. Schol. ὁ χορὸς ἐκ τῶν ἐπιχωρίων ἀνδρῶν πεπυσμένος, ὅτι προσκαθέζεταί τις ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ τόπῳ τούτῳ, πρῶτα ὑποχαλεπαίνοντες φασί, τίς ἄρα ἐστὶν ἢ ποῦ διατρίβει;

ποῦ ναίει] The same idiom recurs in Τr. 99, πόθι.. ναίει, of a temporary abode. For 11. 117-254, cp. Phil. 135-219, Eur. Or. 140-207, Ion 184-236, Heracl. 73-83, where there is a similar interchange of lyrical measures between the chief actor on the stage and the chorus on their first entrance. The commatic parodos' of the Electra, 11. 121-250, is more regular in structure, and is rather to be compared with Aj. 201-262, Aesch. Prom. 114-192, Eur. Med. 131-212, etc. As in other places where the part assigned to the chorus is much broken, it has been attempted to distribute it amongst the fifteen choreutae, who are supposed to speak one at a time. But although some such arrangement is probable in itself and confirmed by the comparison of other passages, such as Aj. 866-960. El. 823-870, Trach. 871-895, it is impossible to determine the details of it with any approach to certainty. For instance whether ll. 117-137, 149-169, were chanted by ἡμιχόρια, (the asyndeta giving the effect of doubt amidst eager search), or divided amongst several persons, or in what order the individual members of the chorus took part, are questions which may be asked but not answered. Ll. 176-177, 203-206, 229-236, may be assigned with some probability to the Coryphaeus. See Hermann's notes. It is also uncertain how far an antistrophic arrangement of the metres is to be maintained. Thus 11. 117-137 clearly correspond to 11. 149-169. But the anapaestic movement, 11. 138-148, is not exactly answered by 11. 170-177: cp. Eur. Ion 227-229: and, while 11. 178-181, 184-187, severally correspond (though in the MSS. not perfectly) to 194-198, 203-206, there is again a want of correspondence between ll. 182-183, and 199-202. Although these are not anapaestic measures, it may be observed that they accompany movements of Oedipus, which, if they were to be represented at all naturally, were necessarily interrupted and irregular, and while it is of course possible that some lines have been lost after 183, it is also conceivable that there may have been an interval of silence, or that a pause in the dialogue may have been filled up with instrumental music. Cp. infr. 1692 ff. and note, Phil. 1170 1217. However this may have been, the correction ἡσυχαίᾳ, which brings l. 197 into accordance with 182, is probably right. The long passage 207-254, which may be regarded as a double epode, is even less regular, the rhythm changing several times with the situation. But the similarity of 207 ff. to 237 ff., which led Hermann to arrange this passage also antistrophically, suggests the idea of a strain which after being interrupted is again renewed. And the dactylic measures of the chorus (229 ff.) are resumed, though with a difference, in the supplication of Antigone (241 ff.). The prevailing metre is logaoedic, with free anapaestic systems coming between. But ll. 212-215, where a fresh cause of agitation arises, are Ionic a minore; and the passage which follows presents a curious alternation of single paroemiacs with The concluding lines, 229 ff., contain a series of rapid dactylic measures modified with an occasional glyconic or iambic rhythm. The following lines have been objected to for metrical reasons as they are found in the MS. text, 117, 121, 2, 3, 134 or 166, 152, 156, 175, 178, 182, 3, (or 197-202), 205, 212, 220, 226, 247, 252. The difficulties will be dealt with as they occur. But it may be remarked at the outset that the divergences from an antistrophic structure which have been noticed above cannot justify what is in itself unmetrical. At the same time the variation between CIK and cc, c c − (134-166) or between Icchci and Aclcclc- (182-197), the shortening of the diphthong in ναίει (cp. γεραιός), or admission of an irrational thesis (117), and the resolution of the long syllable of an anapaest or dactyl as in 220, although they may be rejected on special grounds in particular places, are not to be absolutely condemned. Lastly, in dealing with metrical irregularities in the lyrical part of plays which like the O. C. and Phil. belong to the latest period of Greek tragedy, we are haunted by the doubt whether the changes in music which began about this time were not already accompanied with metrical innovations. In the presence of manifest corruptions, like that in l. 152, we cannot firmly maintain that it was so; yet the fact remains that the metrical anomalies in the text of these two plays greatly exceed the average of corruptions in Sophocles. The metrical scheme of 11. 117-254 is the following :- λεύσσετ' Β Vat. a'. 117-137 =149-169. 15 10 5 つ 1つ ートート​CI トートー உ ここ luctu ID D β'. Free anapaests. 178 ff.=194 ff. トト ἐπ. α'. 207-236. 5 5 トー ヒト​し​て​トー [トー IICCICIC [- L つ 3 T ID ト 10 T CCC かいし اد C ἐπ. β΄. 1 I 237-253. 101007- トリトー 15 10 5 1001100 10110) T つつ luc וכוכ しかし トレトー luc ト​し​て​レトー CCLLCI つつ つ כו CCCCCC いと じんく 20 CCC つつ CCC 00 } Look out! Who was it then? Where is he? Whither is he sped away, the most reckless of men? Inquire for him; keenly look; look for him in every direction. The old man is some wanderer, and a stranger to the place: else never had he gone within the pathless grove of these invincible maidens, whom we tremble to name, and pass with downcast eyes, with voices hushed, without words, breathing the language of pious thought. But now we hear that one is come, having no reverence, of whom I, looking over all the grove, cannot yet tell where he is to be found.

ἀκορέστατος i. e. not to be satisfied without invading our most sacred place.

Hermann's conjectures are adopted to secure the correspondence of these lines with infr. 153-155, 11. 4-6 of the antistrophe : ἀλλ᾽ οὐ μὰν ἕν γ᾽ ἐμοὶ | προσθήσεις τάσδ' ἀράς· | περᾷς γάρ.

προσέβα .. οὐκ Essay on Language § 41. p. 78.

The genitive with ἄλσος forms a single phrase; hence és is not misplaced. Cp. Εl. 14, τοσόνδ᾽ ἐς ἥβης : Il. 1.350, θῖν ἐφ᾽ ἁλὸς πολιῆς : supr. 85. The preposition marks that he not only approached but entered.

ἀμαιμακετᾶν Schol. ἀκαταμαχήτων ἢ ἀπροσπελάστων. The former seems to be the true Homeric meaning, which however is modified in the Sophoclean use by an association from μαίομαι. Cp. Pind. Pyth. 3. 33, κασιγνήταν μένει | θύοισαν ἀμαιμακέτῳ.

Cp. infr. 489; Eur. Or. 409-410, ὀνομάσαι δ᾽ οὐ βούλομαι. ΟΡ. σεμναὶ γάρ· εὐπαιδευτὰ δ᾽ ἀποτρέπει λέγειν.

οὐδὲν ἄζοντα The unusual active voice strengthens the expression. Cp. Essay on Language pp. 51, 98. Oedipus alone of mortals has no fear of the Erinyes. Blaydes conj. οὐκ ἀλέγονθ', retaining εἴ τιν' ἔχεις in l. 166. And the synaphea is certainly more regular if the anapaests have already begun.

Here am I, the man you seek, for I see by sound, as the saying goes;' i. e. I hear you, though I cannot see. Cp. Ant. 829, ὡς φάτις ἀνδρῶν. Oedipus and Antigone re-enter from behind, and after several movements, with irregular anapaestic accompaniment, he is again seated in the middle of the proscenium, on a raised platform. The absence of the conventional palace-front enables Oedipus to be seen when at the back of the stage.

The chorus are at first too horror-stricken at the very sight of the offender, either to discern his blindness, or to gather the meaning of his words. This appears from their language in 149-150, which is most naturally interpreted as an exclamation on first discovering that he is blind. The present words, as Oedipus perceives, simply express horror at seeing and hearing the impious one (ἄνομον). In l. 143 they pass from horror to curiosity. Only when he directly calls their attention to it, do they realize the fact that he is without sight. Schol. οὔπω ἀκριβῶς ἑωρακότες αὐτὸν τοῦτό φασιν.

Regard me not as lawless. See not a lawless man in me. For the apparent ellipse of ὡs, see Essay on Language §23. p. 38, and § 39. p. 73.

Not altogether one of highest fortune, that ye should congratulate him thereon. The genitive is in the first instance attributive, One of high fortune, but is to be resumed with εὐδαιμονίσαι, which governs the genitive, as in Plat. Crit. 43 Β, πολλάκις σε εὐδαιμόνισα τοῦ τρόπου. εὐδαιμονίσαι is 140 145 146. δηλῶ δ'] 148. ὥρμουν LA. ὥρμων C³ and epexegetic infinitive. See Essay on Language § 33. p. 57. Another interpretation deserves notice. Not one to congratulate ( = olov εὐδαιμονίσαι) on his first destiny;' i.e. The destiny which has been his from birth: ἣν οἱ ἐπεκλώσαντο θεοί, ὅτε μιν τέκε μητήρ. But to this may be objected, (1) that the infinitive can hardly stand except as epexegetic; (2) the emphatic position of πρώτης; (3) the gentle irony of the former meaning, which is better adapted to the situation. The same objections apply to the conjecture πρωτῆς, i. q. πεπρωμένης (Vauvillers, Schndw., Nauck.), which is a word only found in grammarians, and gives a poor sense.

ἔφοροι χώρας Guardians of this land. Oedipus infers their office from the words of the Ξένος, l. 78, and of his daughter, l. 112, σῆς ἕδρας ἐπίσκοποι. Cp. Aesch. Pers. 25, στρατιᾶς πολλῆς ἔφοροι.

δηλῶ δ' And the manner of my coming proves this. Cp. δείκνυμι δ', 1145: Ant. 471, δηλοῖ τὸ γέννημ᾽ ὠμὸν ἐξ ὠμοῦ πατρός: Αj. 355, δηλοῖ δὲ τοὔργον, ὡς ἀφροντίστως ἔχει.

ὧδε Thus. Ant. 990, αὕτη κέλευθος.

κἀπὶ σμικροῖς μέγας ὥρμουν Nor, being a prince, as I am, should I have taken up my rest here to crave a small boon. Schol. καὶ ἐπὶ εὐτελέσιν αἰτήμασιν οὐκ ἂν σφόδρα ἱκέτευον, εἰ μὴ ἤμην δυστυχής. Cp. supr. 5. It may be objected to this rendering that it is dramatically inappropriate to make Oedipus assume as manifest (δηλῶ δ', l. 146) what the chorus could not know. But it may be rejoined that he is meditating on his own condition and speaking oracularly, as in supr. 45. The other interpretation (also given in the Scholia), or being tall, have leaned on one so slight, is less natural, and (unless σμικpās is read) attributes a doubtful use both to the dative and to the plural.

And wast thou then blind? O wretched life, and protracted, too, if I am not mistaken. Howbeit, if I can prevent, thou shalt not bring this curse. For, I tell thee, thou art transgressing. But oh! lest you break the sacred peace of yonder grassy dell, where the watered hollow gathers softly-flowing streams, of this take heed, all hapless stranger; avoid, remove. The distance hinders. Dost hear, O weary wanderer? If you have any matter for conference with me, come off forbidden ground, and speak, where all may. But, till then, avaunt thee!'

ἀλαῶν ὀμμάτων ἆρα καὶ ἦσθα φυτάλμιος Alas, and art thou then blind! The interrogative has the force of an exclamation. For the emphatic order of the words, see Essay on Language § 31. p. 78, γ. ἀλαῶν ὀμμάτων φυτάλμιος is a poetical phrase (cp. τὸ φατιζόμενον, l. 139) for ἀλαὰ ὄμματα φύσας, i. e. ἔχων. Cp. Aj. 1077, κἂν σῶμα γεννήσῃ μέγα. The past tense has a pathetic or reflective force, Essay on Language § 32. p. 55. The chorus are not enquiring the cause of Oedipus' blindness, but are expressing their horror, slightly modified by pity, at the fact, which they have just discovered.

μακραίων *τις, ἐπεικάσαι For the asyndeton, cp. 161 foll. Others read μακραίων τ᾽ ἔτ᾽, ἐπεικάσαι, in which ἔτι is prosaic, or μακραίων θ᾽, ὅσ᾽ ἐπεικάσαι, for which Linw. cp. Ar. Pax 857, οι μακραίων γ᾽, ὅσ᾽ ἔπ᾽ εἰκάσαι (!).

ἔν γ᾿ ἐμοί As far as lies in me; i. e. If I can prevent.

οὐ .. ἀράς (1) Be thou blind or old, thou shalt not thus bring down the curse: viz. by violating the precinct.

προσθήσεις, Sc. τῷ ἡμετέρῳ δήμῳ. For this use of προστίθημι, cp. Ο. Τ. 820, ἢ ἐγὼ ἐπ᾿ ἐμαυτῷ τάσδ᾽ ἀρὰς ὁ προστιθείς. The chorus, after yielding for a moment to compassion, return to their main object, the vindication of the sacred ground. Otherwise, the mood of the chorus being supposed to change from horror to pity, (2) Thou shalt not thus bring a curse upon thyself; or (3) Thou shalt not add this curse to thy calamity.

περᾷς (I) You are transgressing. Not (2) 'You shall come forth: although such a use of the present for a certain future is permissible.

ἀλλά, while opposing the command to the offence, also contrasts the danger of still further trespass with the trespass already committed. The construction ἐν νάπει πίπτειν is Epic: cp. Αj. 633, ἐν στέρνοισι πεσοῦνται, κ.τ.λ., ib. 375. For τῷδε, used in pointing to an object not close at hand, cp. El. 4, 7, 10.

ἵνα, κ.τ.λ. depends (1) on the general precept of avoidance (sc. εὐλαβοῦ), which is more definitely expressed, as the sentence proceeds, in τῶν .. φύλαξαι, κ.τ.λ. Or (2) an ellipse of λέγω may be supposed.

ἀφθέγκτῳ Of unbroken silence,' supr. 131.

The reading προπέσῃς, although conjectural, seems to be required by the metre, and πρό and πρός are often confused. Either compound gives a good sense-προσπέσῃς implying violence, and προπέσῃς, heedlessness.

κάθυδρος οὗ κρατήρ μειλιχίων ποτῶν ῥεύματι συντρέχει] (1) Where the stream of sweet waters flows together in the pure basin : ῥεύματι, dat. of manner. The basin is said to run together in a stream by a metonymy or inversion. κάθυδρος implies that it received no wine. Supr. 100, ἀοίνοις. (2) The Scholiast understood μειλιχίων ποτῶν to refer to the honey that was mingled with the libation to the Eumenides (infr. 481); i.e. The libation of pure water mingles with the flowing hydromel. ῥεύματι dat. after συν in comp., and the bowl, as infr. 479, for the contents of the bowl. Meineke reads χεύματι. (3) Taking the words as in (1), the epithet μειλιχίων may, however, contain an allusion to this sweetening of the waters, and also an association from μειλίσσομαι, to propitiate. Schol. οἷς μειλίσσουσι τὰς θεάς. Ιn (1) the κρατήρ is the basin in which water was gathered for libations: in (2) it is the vessel from which the libations were poured.

τῶν Neuter, referring to the whole of the previous description. The genitive is governed by the notion of avoidance in φύλαξαι (= ὑπεκτρέπεσθαι), assisted by μετάσταθι, ἀπόβαθι. For πάμμορε, Schndw. suggested the Homeric κάμμορε.

λόγον εἴ τιν' οἴσεις This reading is adopted on the ground of metre, and as suiting well with the context. If you will bring any word to be considered by us assembled. For λέσχη, which in the mouth of the chorus here has an ancient and formal air, cp. Ant. 161, τήνδε γερόντων.. λέσχην. For ἔχεις in the MS. reading, cp. Pind. Ol. 8. 4.

ἵνα πᾶσι νόμος Sc. ἐστὶ φωνεῖν. Where custom permits all to speak. Cp. the common ellipse of the inf. after ἢ θέμις, εἰ θέμις.

'Daughter, what is one to think?' i. e. What counsel are we to take? The optative may be defended (Essay on Language §36. p. 62, cp. esp. Antipho, p. 112, πρὸς τίνας οὖν ἔλθοι τις βοηθούς;) but the subjunctive is better. For what follows, cp. Aesch. Suppl. sub init. μέμνησο δ' εἶκειν· χρεῖος εἶ ξένη φυγάς. Bias, fragm. viii. (in Bergk's Poetae Melici), Ἀστοῖσιν ἄρεσκε πᾶσιν, ἐν πόλει αἴ κε μένῃς.

κοὐκ ἄκοντας Yielding what is meet, and not waiting for compulsion. Par. B, etc. here preserve the better reading. Cp Lys. Epitaph. § 14, μηδὲν ποιεῖν ἄκοντας: Εl. 1463. μηδὲ πρὸς βίαν φύσῃ φρένας : Eur. Hec. 225, Pind. Pyth. 4. 288, καλὰ γινώσκοντ᾽ ἀνάγκῃ. The words of Oedipus in 174, μὴ δῆτ᾽ ἀδικηθῶ, Let me not be roughly used are prompted by the fear which Antigone here suggests, and the chorus, in re-assuring him, use the same expression, οὔ τοι .. ἄκοντά τις ἄξει. Cp. infr. 827. Others suggest various modifications of the Laurentian reading. But κἀκούοντας is a feeble repetition of εἴκοντας, and κού κατοκνοῦντας involves too great a change. ἀκούοντας comes of the dittographia AKOONTAC for AKONTAC.

σοὶ πιστεύσας καὶ μεταναστάς Herm. rejected καί, so as to obtain metrical correspondence with the paroemiac in 191. But this rests on the supposition that the anapaestic systems must exactly correspond, in which case four and a half lines are lost before 188. See note on p. 294. Ll. 176-177, 192-193, have been described by some edd. as choriambic. If so, they would be sung by the whole chorus: if anapaestic, they are recited by the coryphaeus.

ἔτ᾿ οὖν ; [ἔτι προβῶ] Persuaded at last to move, Oedipus takes his daughter's hand, but before advancing asks for more assurance. The chorus point to a spot where he may rest secure. He then moves forward a few steps, and asks, Is that enough, or must he go further? This line exceeds by four syllables the corresponding line, infr. 194. The words ἔτι προβῶ, which Elmsley rejected, have more the appearance of a gloss than ἔτ᾽ οὖν.

ἐπίβαινε *πόρσω] Come further on. ἐπιβαίνειν here is to move over a certain space.

προβίβαζε Conduct him onward, maiden, for you see and understand. Cp. Od. 18. 11, οὐκ ἀτεις ὅτι δή μοι ἐπιλλίζουσιν ἅπαντες, where ateiv is to perceive by sight. προσβίβαζε, besides the doubtful metre, conveys too much of the idea of force.

ἕπεο μάν .. ᾧ σ᾽ ἄγω Come follow, this way follow with thy darkened steps, father, the way I am leading thee.

τόλμα.. σέβεσθαι These lines are rightly given to the chorus. They correspond to 203-206, in which the expression ὦ τλάμων again occurs. not averse, unhappy one, when sojourning in a strange land, to cherish the same hatreds with the citizens and to respect their loves Cp. Eur. Bacch. 431-433, τὸ πλῆθος ὅτι τε φαυλότερον | ἐνόμισε, χρῆταί τε, | τόδε τοι λέγοιμ' ἄν: Aesch. Suppl. 202, μέμνησο δ' εἴκειν, χρεῖος εἶ ξένη φυγάς: Eum. 983, καὶ στυγεῖν μιᾷ φρενί.

τέτροφεν ἄφιλον Hath habitually chosen for dislike ; i. e. is wont to dislike. There is a slight oxymoron in the form of expression. τέτροφεν, ἔχει, Schol.

ἵν᾿ ἄν The use of the optative mood with ἄν after a relative, following an imperative, and conveying an implied purpose, is analogous to the Epic construction of such passages as Hom. Il. 8.289 foll., πρώτῳ τοι μετ' ἐμὲ πρεσβήϊον ἐν χερὶ θήσω, |... ἠὲ γυναῖχ᾽ ἣ κέν τοι ὑμὲν λέχος εἰσαναβαίνοι: Theocr. 25.61, ἐγὼ δὲ τοι ἡγεμονεύσω | αὖλιν ἐς ἡμετέρην ἵνα κεν τέτμοιμεν ἄνακτα. The use of ἄν in such places is equivalent to the use of ἄν with the optative in independent clauses. The usage, however, is rare, and has not been generally retained in later Greek.

In εὐσεβίας ἐπιβαίνοντες there is a confusion of the literal and metaphorical sense, like that noticed in ἥκομεν, l. 12. Partly coming where we may stand without impiety. like ἐπίβαινε in l. 178, and partly relying on pious action, as in Phil. 1463, δόξης οὔποτε τῆσδ᾽ ἐπιβάντες, where, as here, there is a reminiscence of Epic Greek. Od. 23.13, σαοφροσύνης ἐπέβησαν, etc.

And let us not fight with necessity.

αὐτοῦ There; i.e. That is where I bid you stay. The ellipse is probably a colloquial idiom. Cp. ἔτι; l. 180, supra.

μηκέτι .. κλίνῃς Stir not again from this rocky platform. For the periphrasis in πόδα κλίνῃς, cp. 113, καὶ σύ μ᾽ ἐξ ὁδοῦ πόδα κρύψον, Ο. Τ. 468, πόδα νωμᾷν. The expression ἀντίπετρον βῆμα, A rock-like platform. would suggest to those who had seen the sacred place at Colonus some peculiarity in the basement of the low seats at the entrance of the grove, or possibly means that while Oedipus remains on this narrow restingplace his foot is placed immovably on the rock. The conjecture αὐτοπέτρου is plausible but unnecessary. The Scholiast says, ἀντιπέτρου, ὅτι ἀντὶ πέτρας χαλκοῦν ἦν, referring to the χάλκους ὀδός. Cp. supr. l. 57, and note. ἀντίπετρος, like ἀντίθεος, ἀντίδουλος, ἀντήλιος, ἀντίπαις, ἀντίπυργος, ἀντίσποδος.

Ιη πόδα κλίνῃς there is a reminiscence of the Epic use of κλίνω. II. 10. 349, 50, ὡς ἄρα φωνήσαντε παρέξ ὁδοῦ ἐν νεκύεσσιν | κλινθήτην.

The form ἑσθῶ is questionable in Attic, according to Thom. Mag. p. 483, and Phryn. p. 269. But the word ἐκαθέσθην, which was afterwards in common use, may be supposed to have had a source in the earlier language. And the alternative reading στῶ is less in accordance with what precedes and follows. For this question, as implied in οὕτως; has been already answered, and the rejoinder, λέχριός γ'. ὀκλάσας. is more natural, when supposed to give assent to a request to be allowed to sit. Shall I be seated? Yes, bending low adown upon the surface of the stone. λέχριος, not 'sideways, but simply opposed to ὀρθός, and probably connected by Sophocles with λέχος, i. e. halfrecumbent, bending; cp. Eur. Med. 1168, where it is used of a person ready to fall backwards. λέχριος conveys the general notion of a position other than upright.

ὀκλάσας (der. from κλάω) gives the more particular notion of bending the limbs together, as one does who is on a low seat. Cp. Il. 13. 281, ἀλλὰ μετοκλάζει καὶ ἐπ᾿ ἀμφοτέρους πόδας ίζει :-of the coward in an ambush, who keeps shifting from one constrained position to another. The MSS. give 0 λάου, for which form, instead of dãos, the Schol. quotes the authority of Herodian.

ἐν *ἡσυχαίᾳ If the metre is to correspond to l. 182, we must read thus for ἐν ἡσυχίᾳ. The words are commonly taken to mean, (1) Adjust thy step to my quiet tread,-Leaning forward thine aged body on my loving hand. i. e. Antigone presses her foot against her father's to steady him while he sits down, and, lest he should fall forward, supports him with her hand. But βάσει (which the Schol. interprets τῇ καθέδρᾳ) may be understood to mean the stone support for the foot attached to the seat. (2) Fit thy foot into its quiet resting-place. Cp. βήματος in 193.

ἡσυχαίᾳ has then associations from 176-177, as well as from the general silence and peacefulness surrounding the grove. The repetition of the same word in a different sense would be less felt than if we said in English, Step on that step.' P

ἅρμοσαι The MS. reading ἁρμόσαι is inconsistent with the following clause. There is now a pause. The chorus are relieved from their horror, but only to be more horror-stricken.

στεί

δύσφρονος Cruel. ἄτη personified. Ant. 185, τὴν ἄτην χουσαν. ..

ὅτε νῦν χαλᾷς (1) ‘Now that X 2 there is an end of this trouble about you,' or (2) Now that there is an end of your troubles' For (1) cp. supr. 169. For the absolute use of xaλᾷs, see Essay on Language p. 88. Cp. Eur. Ion 637, εἴκειν ὁδοῦ χαλῶντα τοῖς κακίοσιν : Ar.

Αν. 383, οἵδε τῆς ὀργῆς χαλἂν εἴξασιν.

τίς ἔφυς βροτῶν τίς ἔφυς, like οἴσεις, supr. 166, is reading supplied by an early hand on the margin of L. For is sup supplementary predicate, cp. Ο. Τ. 151, τίς ἔẞas; And for ἔφus = εἶ φύσει, cp. Ο. Τ. 1015, παίς γ᾽ εἰ τῶνδε γεννητῶν ἔφυν. The reading of B, etc. is against metre. The same hand gives τίς ὁ πολύπονος ἄγει; which, (1) like τίς ἔφυς, is unlikely to have been invented, and is more forcible than τίς ὢν πολύπονος ἄγει; which is read in all MSS, and acknowledged by the Scholiast, but does not correspond to 186, τέτροφεν ἄφιλον ἀποστύγειν. (2) One interpretation of the Scholiast, τίς ὢν ἄγῃ ἀπὸ σῆς πόλεως; points to an ancient variation of reading, such as τίς ὢν ἄπολις ἄγει; which Blaydes suggests.

ἀπόπτολις may have crept in from below. For τίς ὤν, cp. Aesch. Prom. 611, τίς ὤν, τίς ἄρα μ᾽ ὧδ᾽ ἐτήτυμα προσθροεῖς;

Nor search me out, inquiring farther. Cp. Od. 19. 116, μηδ' ἐμὸν ἐξερέεινε γένος καὶ πατρίδα γαίαν, | μή μοι μᾶλλον θυμὸν ἐνιπλήσῃς ὀδυνάων.

τί τόδε; δεινὰ φύσις, αὔδα τί is extra metrum: cp. 1. 215. Elmsley conjectures τί δέ; κ.τ.λ.: cp. 1469. Herm. τί τοδ᾽; ΟΙ. αἰνά, κ.τ.λ. The former is the more probable of the two emendations. On φύσις in the sense of birth, see Essay on Language p. 91.

ὤμοι ἐγώ, τί πάθω Il. 11.404, Od. 5. 465. Essay on Language § 45. p. 85.

ἐπ᾿ ἔσχατα βαίνεις Your foot is on the verge, i. e. You are driven as it were to the edge of a precipice.

Hermann's correction of this line is adopted without denying that some other (e. g. μέλλεις, Blaydes) may possibly be right.

By simply rejecting lov from the Laurentian reading (i. e. λ. ἴ. τ. ἀ. -ὦ ὤ.), we might obtain a dactylic tetrameter, as in 224, 226, with a resolution of the 3rd arsis, for which, cp. Eur. Or. 1485, ἥσσονες ῾Ἑλλάδος ἐγενόμεθ᾽ αἰχμᾶς. But the regular alternation of the paroemiac with-0-0-0-gives a more probable rhythm. And ἀπόγονον may be a gloss on Λαΐου. If the several choreutae are supposed to speak in turn the line may have run: ΟΙ. Λαΐου ἴστε τιν'; ΧΟ. α΄. ὦ· ΧΟ. β'. ἰού, ἰού. And so Herm. read in 1839. For the sense, ср. О. Т. 1383, τὸν ἐκ θεῶν | φανέντ᾿ ἄναγνον καὶ γένους τοῦ Λαΐου : where the fatal birth from Laius makes the climax of horror.

δύσμορος Alas. Oedipus, having been assured of peace, once more finds himself an outcast.

ἃ δ᾽ ὑπέσχεο 176-177, But where will you make good your promise? i.e. But what becomes of your promise? Cp. Plat. Symp. 183 E.

To no man cometh punishment from the fates for a matter in which he has been the first to suffer, that he κ.τ.λ. should be punished for this:' 1. ε. τίσις (τούτων), ὧν (genitive of relation) προπάθῃ, τὸ τίνειν, sc. τούτων τίσιν. Cp. infr. 271, ὅστις παθὼν μὲν ἀντέδρων, For the construction of ὧν, cp. Ant. 1194-1195, τί γάρ σε μαλθάσσοιμ᾽ ἄν, ὧν ἐσύστερον ψεῦσται φανούμεθ᾽; “For why should I soothe thee with a tale, in regard to which we shall presently be found false speakers?' See Essay on Language § 9. p. 13 This is better than (2) to make τίνειν = τίνεσθαι, ('nemo punitur ob injuriam prius acceptam, si eam rependit,' Herm., διὰ τὸ τιμωρεῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν προπάθῃ. . λείπει ἡ διά, Schol.): or (3) to make τὸ τίνειν the object of προπάθῃ; retribution for an act, of which he has already suffered the retribution: or (4) taking the genitive as after προ in comp. to render, that he should suffer for an act previously to which he has been wronged.' The chorus feel the gravity of their position in breaking a promise made in presence of the Erinyes, but plead that it was made under a false impression. Cp. Aesch. Fr. 294, ἀπάτης δικαίας οὐκ ἀποστατεῖ θεός. The form μοιράδιος, see v. rr., is questionable.

For the collocation of words, cp. Phil. 138, τέχνα γὰρ τέχνας ἑτέρας προὔχει: Eur. Bacch. 905, ἕτερα δ᾽ ἔτερος ἕτερον ὄλβῳ καὶ δυνάμει παρῆλθεν. But deception, matching deception, makes return, not of good, but of evil.

τῶνδ᾽ ἑδράνων The exact words of the promise (supr. 176) are repeated in retracting the promise.

ἄφορμος ἐμᾶς χθονός The explanation of the Scholiast, ἄφορμος, ἀφορμηθείς, has been commonly accepted; but the derivation from ὅρμος gives more point, and is supported by the language of Oedipus, supr. 148. (1) Leaving my land;' (2) Driven from the harbour of my land. 235. Lest you bring some further burden on my state. χρέος, lit, debt. obligation, here, by a litotes, the obligation of removing pollution.

O religious-minded strangers, yet, seeing ye could not bear with this my aged sire. because the sound of deeds which he did unwittingly was in your ears, yet, sirs, have pity, we entreat you, on me, the hapless one, who pray you for my own father, pray, looking in thine eyes with no blank gaze (like a daughter who had sprung from your own blood), that the unfortunate may find mercy. We are in your hands, and you are in the place of God to us in our misery. Come then, vouchsafe the unhoped for boon. By what thou lovest, of thy very own, pray thee, child, help-mate, duty, sacred name. For look as closely as you will, you shall not find the mortal who can resist the leading of a God.

The pleading glyconic rhythms of l. 207 ff., which were broken off by the discovery of Oedipus, are here renewed, and as they proceed are mingled with a rapid dactylic strain, which meets the impetuosity of the chorus in l. 229 ff. with corresponding earnestness. This combined movement has given rise to some doubt, and, in order to keep the dactylic verse continuous, some would read in 247, ἐν ὑμῖν ὡς θεῷ, or ἐν ὕμμι γὰρ ὡς θεῷ, and in 252, with Triclinius, οὐ γὰρ ἴδοις ἂν ἀθρῶν βροτόν. But the syncopated thesis and change of rhythm in both places, as in ll. 7, 14, may give the effect of lingering earnestness (τὸ λιπαρές) combined with the eagerness of her supplication. On the other hand the slight alteration of the last two lines, approved by Hermann, appears probable on comparing ll. 235-236. The MS. reading of 253 may be scanned Cp. infr. 1676, 1703. In comparing this passage with El. 236-250 on the one hand, and on the other with Phil. 1170-1217, Eur. Or. 1452-1503, we seem to trace the increasing use of monostrophic μέλη ἀπὸ σκηνῆς. From the Aj., Ant., O. T., Trach. this phenomenon is absent, except in such short epodes as Ant. 876-881, ἄκλαυτος, ἄφιλος .. οὐδεὶς φίλων στενάζει. In the scheme of metres on pp. 301-302, it has been thought better not to divide the strophes into parts. Their structure will be sufficiently evident to the student, although a sharp division between the main portion of each, and the prelude or conclusion, can hardly be maintained.

αἰδόφρονες This is not merely a propitiatory epithet = as you are merciful, have mercy, but is addressed to the religious spirit which the chorus have shown. As you are full of reverence for the Gods, have respect to the suppliant.' Antigone appeals from the religion of custom to the religion of the heart, and the way is thus prepared for the rebuke of Oedipus in 277-278.

ἀλλά opposes this last prayer to the expressed determination of the chorus. The second ἀλλά resumes this with a slightly different force, contrasting her own supplication with that of her father, which they had rejected.

γεραιὸν [ἄλαον πατέρα τόνδ' ἐμόν] Supposing the second a of ἄλαον short, as in 149, 244, this line is an iambic pentapody.

ἀκόντων = ἀκουσίων, cp. 977, πῶς *δἂν τὸ γ' ἶκον πρᾶγμ᾽ ἂν εἰκότως ψέγοις. Essay on Language $ 50. 3. P. 94. For the metaphorical use of αὐδά, see Essay on Language p. 97.

The reading of B Vat. etc. gives a glyconic verse similar to 239, if the first ἄντομαι is transferred to the next line- πατρὸς ὑπὲρ τοὐμοῦ ἄντομαι ἄντομαι -. But this is hardly the most natural or rhythmical division. μόνου, if genuine, simply adds emphasis to τοὐμοῦ πατρός. For my own father. μόνοs is one of the favourite words of Sophocles. Essay on Language p. 96.

ὥς τις, κ.τ.λ. i. e. Looking up to you with the frank reliance of a daughter. ὡς ἂν τῆς κοινῆς ἀνθρωπότητος ἔχουσα τὸ συγγενές. Schol.

τὸν ἄθλιον αἰδοῦς κῦρσαι These words are joined as an epexegesis or resumption with πατρὸς ὑπὲρ τοὐμοῦ ἄντομαι.

Cp. Od. το. 69, ἀλλ᾽ ἀκέσασθε, φίλοι, δύναμις γὰρ ἐν ὑμῖν: 13. 230-231, σοὶ γὰρ ἔγωγε | εύχομαι ὥς τε θεῷ. For the metre, cp. II. 242, 249, 252.

νεύσατε is a poetical word, usually applied to the Gods.

τὰν ἀδόκητον χάριν Unlooked for and therefore more prized. Cp. infr. 1104-1105, τὸ μηδαμὰ | ἐλπισθὲν ἥξειν σῶμα βαστάσαι δότε. 57

πρός σ᾽ ὅ τι σοι φίλον Cp. Phil. 469, πρός τ' εἴ τι σοι κατ' οἶκόν ἐστι προσφιλές.

ἐκ σέθεν] Coming from thyself. These words apply properly only to τέκνον, but are to be connected by a sort of zeugma in a more general sense with *λέχος, χρέος, θεός, just as τὰ ἔκ Tivos may mean all that is closely connected with him. Elmsley's conjecture οἴκοθεν deserves notice.

ἢ τέκνον, ἢ *λέχος, ἢ χρέος It has been attempted to defend the MS. reading λόγος, by interpreting it suit, or petition. But λέχος, the conjecture of Reiske, accepted by Brunck and most editors, is probably right.

χρέος Object of care.Antigone knows that property is dear to old men.

βροτῶν was altered to βροτόν by Tricl. merely for the sake of the metre, and the comparison of ll. 242, 247 proves the change to have been unnecessary. See note on 237 ff. 254 ff These lines of the chorus, and the preceding speech of Antigone, were suspected by some ancient critics. But they are justly defended by the Scholiast, who observes that the passage was not obelized by Didymus. The lyrical interchange is followed as usual by a dialogue in senarii. Cp. esp. El. 251 ff. The chorus are ignorant of the divine purposes towards Oedipus, and are simply bent on defending the sacred precinct which is entrusted to their care. But they are not inhuman, and after the final appeal of Oedipus, who professes himself the saviour of Athens, they own that the matter is too hard for them, and are willing to refer it to Theseus as the supreme authority. 256, τὰ δ᾽ ἐκ θεῶν τρέμοντες] But fearing what the Gods may do. Cp. Hdt. 8. 15, τὸ ἀπὸ Ξέρξεω δειμαίνοντες. Y 261 ff. What value then has glory on the praise of men, that flows in unmeaning stream?' μάτην, i. e. without corresponding reality.

κάμοιγε.. ἐστίν ; Ay, and of all this what do I find? Hermann would continue the force of eἰ: 'since Athens has this reputation which in my case proves vain. But the sentence is too long to be so compact. For καί, cp. infr. 606, El. 883, καὶ τίνος, κ.τ.λ.; and for ποῦ, 8,9. Schol. καὶ ὁ Κυρηναῖος· οὕνεκεν οἰκτείρειν οἶδε μόνη πολέων· ἐν τῷ β΄ τῶν αἰτιῶν. See on O. T. 355: Essay on Language § 24. p. 41.

οἵτινες βάθρων (1) When ye, after lifting me up from this resting-place, then drive me away from it. For the want of antecedent in a passage expressing strong feeling (οἵτινες = εἰ ὑμεῖς), see Essay on Language p. 72. The sacredness of the ground was a reason for protecting the suppliant who was found there. L. 276 shows that ἐξάραντες refers not with ἐλαύνετε to 226, but to 149-196. Those who removed a suppliant from the hearth, altar, or other consecrated place, were bound to succour him. Cp. O. T. 142, where the king is acceding to the prayer of the petitioners, ὑμεῖς μὲν βάθρων | ἵστασθε, τούσδ᾽ ἄραντες ἱκτῆρας κλάδους. Otherwise (2), if βάθρων is taken strictly of the seat, called ἕδρανα, supr. 176, Who after removing me' (from the sacred ground) then drive me from this resting-place, or (3), Who remove and drive me from this resting-place. For the plural βάθρων in the more general sense, cp. Eur. Erechth. fr. 362, l. 47.

For my actions have indeed been sufferings and not actions.' See Essay on Language § 30. p. 51. The words of Lear (3. 2) have often been compared, I am a man | More sinned against than sinning. What

εἰ . . χρείη Were it fitting. Cp. Τr. 749, εἰ χρὴ μαθεῖν σε. Oedipus here shrinks from saying, he 265 270

χρείη χρεῖ' ἡι L. (ει from η). utters afterwards under pressure from the chorus (521 ff.), and under provocation from Creon (985 ff.).

τοῦτο Sc. ὅτι διὰ ταῦτα ἐκφοβεῖ με.

φύσιν has a strong emphasis. Whatever my actions may have been, my nature was surely not wicked; cp. Αj. 472, μή τοι φύσιν γ᾽ ἄσπλαγχνος ἐκ κείνου γεγώς, i. e. That I was not really a coward, though the award of the arms to Ulysses proclaimed me such.

φρονῶν i. e. With clear knowledge. See on O. T. 316. Seeing that first of all I was returning a wrong, so that even had I done it knowingly, I should not have been guilty. But as it was, I went all unwittingly on my path of woe, whereas those who planned my destruction knew well what they were doing. The imperfect tense in ἀπωλλύμην expresses an intention not carried into effect (as in διδόναι, κτείνειν, etc.). Cp. Thuc. 3. 57, οἵτινες Μήδων τε κρατησάντων ἀπωλλύμεθα. The words παθών .. ἀντέδρων refer to the parricide: but it is doubtful whether παθών means simply in self defence, or contains an allusion to his father's act in preparing the destruction of his infant. Similarly it is doubtful whether l. 274 applies to Creon and his sons, or again to his parents. There may seem to be a certain harshness in supposing Oedipus to speak thus of Laius, and the tone of 521 ff., 985 ff. is certainly different. Yet this is the most obvious interpretation of the present passage, and receives some confirmation from O. Τ. 718-719, 1454, ἵν' ἐξ ἐκείνων, οἵ μ᾿ ἀπωλλύτην, θάνω. The peace of Oedipus does not include forgiveness of those who have wronged him; nor is it imagined that the natural relations so broken can be restored. See Introduction, p. 279.

The raising of the suppliant implied a promise of protection. Cp 284.

Do not while you think to honour the Gods, in reality dishonour them,' i.e. by driving out the suppliant. Some editors have attempted, reading μοῖραν, as in the early recension, or μοίpas, which is found in two MSS, to render, Do not, while ye honour the Gods suppose them to be fates' (or 'a fate'). By no means,' etc. But this sharp distinction between God and Fate belongs to a much later age. Sophocles would no more have spoken irreverently of the μοίραι than of the other deities. And the interpretation has no meaning that is relevant to the context. For how would the rejection of Oedipus imply that the Gods were blind fates? Was it not rather based on a misinterpretation of their will? The conjectures μαυρούς (Nauck), μείους (Martin) are not more satisfactory. The best hitherto is Schndw.'s μοίρᾳ ἐμποιεῖσθε. With regard to the reading of the text, which has strong MS. authority, it may be noticed; (1) that there is no difference of meaning between μοίραις and μοίρᾳ, if this is supposed equivalent το ἐν μοίρᾳ. This poetical al dative plural occurs in Plat. Legg. 923 Β, τὸ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου κατατιθεὶς ἐν μοίραις ἐλάττοσι δικαίως. (2) Next, that the omission of ev, or the substitution of the instrumental dative (Essay on Language § 14 p. 20) is supported by the similar use of τιμαῖς (r mg. C²*. 275 280 278. μοί- = ἐν τιμῇ ἀγόμενος, in Ο. Τ. 909, κούδαμοῦ τιμαῖς Ἀπόλλων ἐμφανής. See note in loco. (3) This explanation of μοίραις requires μηδαμῶς to be taken separately from μή, and to have the force of an independent negative. This is very unusual, but may be defended, a. by the consideration that μή negatives the sentence as a whole, and a subordinate negative is therefore more easily admissible; b. that μηδαμῶς may be taken closely with μοίραις after ποιεῖσθε = ὥστε μηδαμῶς ἐν μοίραις εἶναι. c. In Plat. Legg. 11, 913 A, there is a parallel instance in a participial clause, μηδ' αὖ κινήσειε μηδὲ τὸ βραχύτατον ἐμὲ μηδαμῇ μηδαμῶς πείθων. Nor again let him move anything, however small, without any sort of consent from me. And in El. 336, καὶ μὴ δοκεῖν μὲν δρᾶν τι, πημαίνειν δὲ μή, although the force of μή is continued in the latter part of the line, the second μή has an independent force. Cp. also Eur Erechth. fr. 362. 1. 46, οὐδ᾽ ἀντ᾿ ἐλάας χρυσέας τε Γοργόνος | τρίαιναν ὀρθὴν στᾶσαν ἐν πόλεως βάθροις | Εύμολπος οὐδὲ Θρᾶξ ἀναστέψει λεὼς | στεφάνοισι, Παλλὰς δ᾽ οὐδαμοῦ τιμήσεται. The antithesis between the literal observance of the local sanctities and the higher obligations of justice and mercy is the point of this part of the play. Cp. Phil. 451. 2, ποῦ χρὴ τίθεσθαι ταῦτα, ποῦ δ᾽ αἰνεῖν, ὅταν | τὰ θεῖ᾽ ἐπαινῶν, τοὺς θεοὺς εὕρω κακούς; Ant. 924, τὴν δυσσέβειαν εὐσεβοῦσ᾽ ἐκτησάμην, for similar contrasts of expression. The use of μοῖρα for τιμή is in keeping with the language of the play. See Introduction, p. 270.

φωτὸς ἀνοσίου βροτῶν Cp. Aj. 1358, τοιοίδε μέντοι φῶτες ἔμπληκτοι βροτῶν : Οd. 17. 587, οὐ γάρ που τινες ὧδε καταθνητῶν ἀνθρώπων | ἀνέρες ὑβρίζοντες ἀτάσθαλα μηχανόωνται: 23. 187, ἀνδρῶν δ᾽ οὐ κέν τις ζωὸς βροτός. Essay on Language $ 40. p. 75-

ξὺν οἷς i. e. (1) ξὺν τοῖς θεοῖς. These words properly belong to ῥύου με κάκφύλασσε, but are also joined with the prohibitive sentence that is interposed. Cp. Od. 1. 74, 5, ἐκ τοῦ δὴ Ὀδυσῆα Ποσειδάων ἐνοσίχθων | οὔτι κατακτείνει, πλάζει δ᾽ ἀπὸ πατρίδος αἴης. ξὺν ols has also been taken (2) as referring to the nearest words, φωτὸς ἀνοσίου βροτῶν. But it is better to refer it to the principal word in the previous sentence. Both interpretations are acknowledged in the Scholia.

κάλυπτε Cloud with disgrace. Cp. Pind. Nem. 10. 40, Ἄργεϊ μὴ κρύπτειν φάος ὀμμάτων : Aesch. Pers. 536, ἄστυ τὸ Σούσων ἠδ' Ἀγβατάνων πένθει δνοφερῷ κατέκρυψας : also the metaphorical use οἱ ἀφανίζειν. The abruptness of the expression is softened by the explanatory clause, esp. the dative ἔργοις, i. e. Do not obscure the brightness of Athens by the impious deeds to which you minister.

But as you have received your suppliant under a pledge.' ἐχέγγυος generally means able to give a pledge, and so trustworthy. But for the passive use of a word generally active, see Essay on Language p. 99; and cp. σωτήριον, l. 487;

πιστωθείς, l. 1039.

ἐκφύλασσε Guard me to the end.

δυσπρόσοπτον Unsightly.

ὁ κύριος τις Your sovereign, whoever he is. For the combination of definite and indefinite, see Essay on Language § 22. p. 36; and cp. O. T. 107, τοὺς αὐτοέντας. τινάς. Oedipus has heard the name of Theseus, supr. 69, but he speaks cautiously, as if he depended on the chorus for information. For the courteous form of expression, cp. Pind. Pyth. 4. 230, βασιλεύς, | ὅστις ἄρχει ναός.

τὰ δὲ | μεταξύ τούτου 'In your actions between that moment and this; i e. Meanwhile.

λόγοισι γὰρ οὐκ ὠνόμασται βραχέσι] They are expressed in no light terms. The more literal meaning, in brief words, does not suit with ταρβεῖν. Why should a lengthy speech produce more awe than a shorter one? On the other hand, the meaning slight, insignificant, is supported by Plat. Legg. 692 C, ὡς ὄντων ἡμῶν βραχέος ἀξίων: Thuc. 1. 14, βραχέα ἐκέκτηντο: ib. 8. 76, βραχὺ . . καὶ ουδενὸς ἄξιον.

τοὺς δὲ τῆσδε γῆς ἄνακτας] Plural for singular. Essay on Language § 20. p. 30. δέ opposes the middle course of waiting for Theseus, to the immediate reception of Oedipus.

πατρῷον ἄστυ γῆς 'The citadel of the land, which was his father's.' The words designate the ancient πόλις, in the immediate neighbourhood of the Acropolis towards the south. Thuc. 2.15.

σκοπός .. ὃς κἀμὲ δεῦρ᾽ ἔπεμπεν] The informant, who brought me hither. The Eévos is thus described, because he has seen Oedipus and will give Theseus true information. Schol. εὖ τῇ οἰκονομίᾳ, ὥστε μὴ διατριβάς γενέσθαι, τίς ὁ καλέσων ἔσται;

*αὐτὸν ὥστ᾽ ἐλθεῖν αὐτόν, conjectured independently by Porson and Elmsley. It is doubted whether the pronoun is unemphatic and subject of έξειν, or emphatic (= 'in person') and subject of ἐλθεῖν. The latter suits better with the preceding speech, and with the feeling of Oedipus. As the Schol. observes, the Ξένος had not heard the name of Oedipus. But for dramatic purposes it is assumed that things told upon the stage become immediately more widely known. Cp. О. Т. 151, Aj. 148 ff. Triclinius read κἀπόνως, which is metrically unobjectionable, but it gives a poor meaning, and the aorist is harsh with έξειν preceding. Those who are not satisfied with Porson's emendations may prefer ὥστ᾽ ἀπόντ᾽ ἐλθεῖν πέλας; See Essay on Language § 32. p. 54, 2. 301 τοὔνομ᾽ αἴσθηται] αἴσθηται = ἀκούσῃ, hence the accus. The whole object is perceived, and not a part only.

μακρὰ κέλευθος Cp. 165, πολλὰ κέλευθος ἐρατύει. See Introd. p. 275, supr. 15.

πολλά Adverbial.

πολύ Supplementary predicate, with the meaning celeber, much spoken of. Cp. Aesch. S. c. Τ. 6, πολὺς κατὰ πτόλιν ὑμνοῖθ᾽ ὑπ᾿ ἀστῶν: Hdt. 1. 98, ὁ Δηϊόκης ἦν πολλὸς.. αἰνεόμενος. Thy name in frequent repetition hath reached all men.'

κεί βραδύς εὕδει Even though he be slow and slumbering. For the use of the adjective, see Essay on Language § 23. p. 38. 2; and cp. Aj. 47, δόλιος ὁρμᾶται. It is here slightly proleptic, i. e. εὕδει ὥστε βραδὺς εἶναι. The form of the expression is influenced by the antithesis of ταχύς. For the thought, cp. Ο. Τ. 65, ὥστ᾽ οὐχ ὕπνῳ γ' εὕδοντά μ' ἐξεγείρετε. εύδει, though added by an afterthought, has the chief emphasis. The conjectures ἕρπει, σπεύδει, are both in different ways injurious to the sense. The expression is hyperbolical, or figurative as in Eur. Suppl. 1147. For κλύων σοῦ, SC. ἀγγελίαν, cp. Ant. 1182, κλύουσα παιδός.

Well, may he come, and in his coming be blest unto his own city as well as to me; for what good man is not a friend unto himself?' i.e. Who does not befriend himself in doing good? For the active meaning of φίλος (Sch.

ἀντὶ τοῦ χρήσιμος), cp. Aj. 1359, Ant. 99, Phil. 1385, σοί που φίλος γ᾽ ὧν χώ λόγος τοιόσδε μου : Pind. Ol. 2. 103, φίλοις.. εὐεργέταν πραπίσιν : Aesch. Cho. 1051, φίλτατ᾿ ἀνθρώπων πατρί. For αὑτῷ, referring to αὑτοῦ, the more remote antecedent, and for the emphasis on αὑτοῦ, see Essay on Language § 41. p. 78. Cp. esp. Εl. 251, καὶ τὸ σὸν σπεύδουσ᾽ ἅμα καὶ τοὐμὸν αὐτῆς ἦλθον, and for the sense, infra 1505-1506, καί σοι θεῶν | τύχην τις ἐσθλὴν *ἧκε τῆσδε τῆς ὁδοῦ: 635, γῇ τῇδε κἀμοὶ δασμὸν οὐ σμικρὸν τίνει: 1124-1125, θεοὶ ποιοῖεν ὡς ἐγὼ θέλω | αὐτῷ τε καὶ γῇ τῇδ᾽: Hom. Il. 13.732-734, ἄλλῳ δ᾽ ἐν στήθεσσι τιθεῖ νόον εὐρύοπα Ζεὺς | ἐσθλόν, τοῦ δὲ τε πολλοὶ ἐπαυρίσκοντ᾽ ἄνθρωποι, | καί τε πολέας ἐσάωσε, μάλιστα δέ κ᾿ αὐτὸς ἀνέγνω : infra 1518-1519, ἐγὼ διδάξω, τέκνον Αἰγέως, ἅ σοι | γήρως ἄλυπα τῇδε κείσεται πόλει. According to another interpretation, the words are added in excuse for ἐμοί τε, = Who is not dear to himself? (Schndw.. Nauck.) But (1) this requires the conjectural correction ἔσθ' ὅς (for ἐσθλός is then too absurd); and (2) the reflection is unsuitable to the context and to the general feeling of the play. Where a similar proverb occurs elsewhere in Sophocles, it is either the maxim of a schemer like Ulysses, or implies blame (Aj. 1366, ἦ πάνθ' ὅμοια πᾶς ἀνὴρ αὑτῷ πονεῖ). 310 ff. The coming of Ismene prepares the way for what follows by giving a forecast of the attempt of Creon and of the fruitless visit of Polynices. It also diverts attention from Theseus, whose arrival at Colonus from the Acropolis (a distance familiar to the spectators) would be less probable and also less impressive if he came too suddenly.

ποῖ φρενῶν ἔλθω For the genitive, see Essay on Language § 10. p. 16. The broken lines mark (1) the disturbance of feeling caused by the surprise of Ismene's coming, and (2) the suspense of uncertainty. Cp. О. Т. 1468, 1471, 1475, and notes.

Αἰτναίας .. Θεσσαλίς The epithets (see Scholia) are picturesque, and also call attention to the condition of Ismene, who having still a home at Thebes is well clothed and mounted, whereas Antigone is barefoot and sunburnt, infr. 348-349. The particular meaning of Αίτναία πῶλος and Θεσσαλὶς κυνῆ is of course uncertain, except that the one implies a horse of a fine breed and the other denotes a comfortable and shady riding-hat.

βεβῶσαν Essay on Language p. 97.

κρατὶ δ᾽ ἡλιοστερής The implied use of στέρομαι = to avert, keep away, may be paralleled from Aesch. Supp. 1063, Ζεὺς ἄναξ ἀποστεροίη γάμον δυσάνορα δάϊον. Essay on Language p. 98. Hence the substitution of ἡλιοσκεπής, or ἡλιοστεγής, which, equally with this, would be ἅπαξ λεγόμενα, is unnecessary. The use of the word is more natural if κρατί is dative of reference, than when κρατί is taken separately as a locative dative, though both constructions may be thought of; i.e. And on her head to screen it from the sun. Cp. her sun-expelling mask. Shak. G. of V. 4, 2.

τί φῶ; The uncertainty of Antigone continues until Ismene is dismounted and advances towards them. The single iambus is very unusual.

ἢ γνώμη πλανᾷ Or does my judgment deceive me?

τάλαινα Unhappy that I am. Said in the distraction of her doubt.

φαιδρὰ ἀπ᾿ ὀμμάτων | σαίνει με She greets me with bright looks from her eyes. σαίνω is first to wag the tail (said of a dog or other quadruped). then to make signs of recognition or of pleased attention, and lastly is transferred to the impression produced on the person to whom this action is directed. Cp. Ant. 1214, παιδός με σαίνει φθόγγος: Aesch. Cho. 194, σαίνομαι δ' ὑπ᾿ ἐλπίδος.

σημαίνει κάρα And in doing so convinces me that this is certainly no other than Ismene's self.

δῆλον after σημαίνει has been thought pleonastic, but the pleonasm is expressive.

μαθεῖν To learn the fact, that this is Ismene.

O father and sister, names that I love to use. The name is often interchanged with the thing or person named. Cp. Phil. 234, Φ. ὦ φίλτατον φώνημα. Eur. Suppl. 801-802.

How hardly I have found you, and now again (δεύτερον) how hardly I can see you for sorrow; i. e. And now that I have found you, my sorrow almost prevents me from seeing you. For λύπη, which is dat. of cause, see Essay on Language § 14. p. 21.

ὁρᾶν Essay on Language § 33. P. 57.

Editors since Musgrave, who followed the Scholiast's hint, μὴ ἄρα πρὸς τὸ δυσαθλία; have transposed these lines, placing 328 between 330 and 331, on the ground that Ismene cannot be supposed to touch herself. Not much is gained by this: for Ismene is rather struck by the contrast of her father's and her sister's mode of life to her own at Thebes than by the misery she shares with them. And the construction of a reply, in this sort of dialogue, is not to be pressed too closely. Cp. amongst other passages, El. 1036, ἀλλ᾽ οὖν ἐπίστω γ' οἱ μ᾿ ἀτιμίας ἄγεις. | ΧΡ. ἀτιμίας μὲν οὔ.

προμηθίας δὲ σοῦ, where προμηθίας has really no construction. Perhaps all that is meant is, I too am linked in this unhappy circle. For δυσάθλιαι, which has been questioned, cp. δυστάλαινα, δυσπόνητος, δυσθρήνητος.

δυσμόρου δ' And you must include me, unhappy. Cp. Eur. Hipp. 341, τρίτη δ᾽ ἐγὼ δύστηνος ὡς ἀπόλλυμαι. There is no reason for changing δέ το τε.

λόγοις The meaning of the dative is varied from the cause to the concomitant. By reason of longings? Yes, and also with intelligence, which I myself would bring. The reading λόγων is probably an early conjecture. The repetition of the same construction in a slightly different sense is frequent in the language of this period.

ξύν, κ.τ.λ. is said by attraction for ξὺν τούτῳ, ὅνπερ εἶχον πιστὸν μόνον.

πονεῖν i. e. εἰς τὸ πονεῖν. And what is become of the young men your brothers in the matter of this service? Cp infr. 342, οὓς μὲν εἰκὸς ἦν πονεῖν τάδε. A similar construction occurs in Eur. Οr. 1473, ποῦ δῆτ᾽ ἀμύνειν οἱ κατὰ στέγας Φρύγες; cp. Il. 13.312, ἀμύνειν εἰσὶ καὶ ἄλλοι. ποῖ is more expressive than ποῦ (which there is no reason to suppose the Scholiast to have read in the text).

ποῖ, SC. οἶχονται. Cp. Aesch. Cho. 405, ποῖ ποὶ δὴ νερτέρων τυραννίδες; For the implied negative in epexegesis expressing defect, i. e. πονεῖν = τὸ μὴ πονεῖν, see Essay on Language § 36. p. 63. The other explanation of the Scholiast, ποῦ τοῦ πονεῖν εἰσι, is not so good.

They are, where they are. For similar expressions, implying something too bad to name, see О. Т. 1376, βλαστοῦσ᾽ ὅπως ἔβλαστε, and note.

δεινὰ δ᾽ ἐν κείνοις τὰ νῦν Things are terrible with them now.' The Scholiast in saying vῦν δὲ τὰ ἐν ἐκείνοις δεῖνά ἐστιν implies this reading. Others read δεινὰ τὰν κείνοις τανῦν.

φύσιν .. τροφάς In character and mode of life.

Hdt. 2. 35, Αἰγύπτιοι.. τὰ πολλὰ πάντα ἔμπαλιν τοῖσι ἀλλοῖσι ἀνθρώποισι ἐστήσαντο ἤθεα καὶ νόμους.

ἐν τοῖσι αἱ μὲν γυναῖκες ἀγοράζουσι καὶ καπηλεύουσι· οἱ δὴ ἄνδρες, κατ' οἴκους ἐόντες, ὑφαίνουσι.

τάξω βίου τροφεῖα The outdoor means of supporting life. Cp.

πυρεῖα, means of obtaining fire. There is a slight redundancy in βίου τροφεία. Cp. 343, κατ' οἶκον οἰκουροῦσιν, and see Essay on Language § 40. p. 75.

σφῶν δ᾽ And in your case. Dat. of relation: i. e. You find it so. Some editors, taking σφῷν as gen., suppose the dual to be used of the two pairs of children.

κακά For the accusative. see Essay on Language § 16. p. 23, and cp. O. T. 264, τάδ᾽ ὡσπερεὶ τοὐμοῦ πατρὸς | ὑπερμαχοῦμαι. δυστήνου (sc. ἐμοῦ) agrees κατὰ σύνεσιν with ἐμά, but is also resumed with ὑπερπονεῖτον.

Antigone had followed her father as soon as she had the strength.

ἡγεῖται The sentence returns to the indicative from the participial construction. Essay on Language p. 64. 1, b.

τὰ τῆς οἴκοι διαίτης (1) The comforts of the life at home, or (2) What subsistence she herself may find; cp. Τr. 730, ᾧ μηδέν ἐστ᾽ οἴκοι βαρύ.

ἃ τοῦδ᾽ ἐχρήσθη σώματος] 'Which were given respecting me. Essay on Language § 9. p. 13. The context shows that the oracle here referred to was one obtained by the Thebans respecting Oedipus after they had sent him forth. The plot of the O. C. does not permit us to suppose that Creon had waited for the response, according to O. T. 1438-1439, before hastening the king's exile. This oracle directed the course of Oedipus towards Athens.

γῆς ὅτ᾽ ἐξηλαυνόμην The order of events is inverted in the narration. Essay on Language p. 78.

τίς σ᾽ ἐξῆρεν οἴκοθεν στόλος A figurative inversion of the common expression, αἴρειν στόλον, What errand sped thee from home?

μὴ οὐχί, κ.τ.λ. Added in explanation of κενή. οὐχί is added because of the previous oὔ. Essay on Language p. 49.

Seeking how thou wast maintained or where.' ποῦ κατοικοίης defines the notion of τροφήν.

παρεῖσ᾽ ἐάσω Cp. Ο. Τ. 283, μὴ παρῇς τὸ μὴ οὐ φράσαι.

ἀμφὶ .. παίδοιν Dative. ‘Encompassing your wretched sons.'

This passage has been generally regarded as corrupt, and ἦν ἔρις has been changed to ἦν ἔρως, ἦν ὅρος, ἤρεσεν. Some edd., including Meineke, who reads κραίνεσθαι, explain, They contended with Creon, urging that the throne should be left vacant. And the authors of the punctuation in AV³ and of the gloss ὁ τε πλεονάζει, must have so taken the words. But, as this gloss indicates, the expression Κρέοντί τε for πρὸς Κρέοντα is not quite natural or harmonious here. And the antithesis of ἔρις κακή in what follows, assisted by the parallelism of construction, ἐᾶσθαι.. λαβέσθαι. isstrongly in favour of the MS. reading. ἔρις may be supported by supposing the brothers to have jointly resisted a party amongst the citizens who desired that one of them should take his father's throne. Cp. Thuc. 6. 35, τοῖς δέ (sc. ἔρις ἦν). Beforetime their contention was that they should relinquish -to Creon their rights in the throne, and that the city should not suffer pollution; professing in their argument to have regard to the ancient ruin of their race, etc. ἐᾶσθαι is middle voice. Cp. λαβέσθαι infr. For λόγῳ, cp. infr. 1296, οὔτε νικήσας λόγῳ. And for τε.. μηδὲ Eur. Iph. Τ. 697, ὄνομά τ᾽ ἐμοῦ γένοιτ' ἂν οὐδ᾽ ἄπαις δόμος | πατρῷος οὑμὸς ἐξαλειφθείη ποτ᾿ ἄv. Essay on Language p. 65.

*ἀλειτηροῦ Although ἀλιτήριος has the first short, ἀλειτηρός may be defended by comparing ἀλείτης, ἄλοιτος. Eustathius mentions ἀλιτηρός as a word used by Sophocles. If any change is needed, ἀλειτηροῦ, which is partly supported by the reading ἀλητηροῦ, is the most probable. The heaven-sent infatuation, which leads to their destruction, is assisted by their own evil mind.

χὼ μὲν νεάζων And the younger spirit.' The participle implies youthful qualities (impetuosity, ambition etc.), as well as the fact of being the younger. Cp. Eur. Phoen. 713, μῶν νεάζων οὐχ ὁρᾷς ἃ χρή σ᾽ ὁρᾶν, addressed to Eteocles.

Pherecydes and Hellanicus differed about this. See Schol. Eur. Phoen. 71.

ὁ πληθύων Lit. the more numerous, i. e. having the majority of voices. Cp. Aesch. Ag. 860.

τὸ κοῖλον Ἄργος The hollow vale of Argos. Cp. infr. 1301, Ἄργος ἐς τὸ Δωρικόν.

ὡς αὐτίκ᾿Ἄργος κ.τ.λ. For the construction, see Essay on Language § 21. p. 44, and cp. O. T. 101, ὡς τόδ' αἷμα χειμάζον πόλιν. It has been suggested to read αὐτός for Ἄργος, (with καθέξων in 381), but the words express the motive held out to the Argive followers of Polynices, to whom he would naturally represent the struggle as one between their city and Thebes. Cp. infr. 1325, ἄγω τὸν Ἄργους ἄφοβον εἰς Θήβας στρατόν.

τὸ Καδμεῖον πέδον Καδμεῖον here, as in Ο. Τ. 29, δῶμα Καδμεῖον, is the more poetical reading.

τιμῇ καθέξον Το obtain with honour.' For τιμῇ = ἐντίμως, see Essay on Language § 14. p. 20.

ἢ πρὸς οὐρανὸν βιβῶν Or to raise it to heaven. According to the frequent vaunt of the Homeric heroes, ἠε τῳ εὖχος ὀρέξομεν, ἠε τις ἡμῖν. ΙΙ. 12. 328, 13. 487. Cp. Aesch. S. c. T. 46. ἢ πόλει κατασκαφὰς θέντες λαπάξειν ἄστυ Καδμείων βίᾳ | ἢ γῆν θανόντες τήνδε φυράσειν φύνῳ. Should the expedition fail, the splendour of the Argive host would be the measure of the glory of the Cadmeans.

ἀριθμὸς.. λόγων A mere heaping together of words. Cp. Eur. Eu Tro. 476, οὐκ ἀριθμὸν ἄλλως, ἀλλ᾽ ὑπερτάτους Φρυγῶν.

ὅποι At what point? i.e. how long they must first continue. A pregnant expression, like ἡ μάχη ἐτελεύτα ἕως ὀψέ, Thuc. 3. 108. Cp. El. 958, ποῖ γὰρ μενεῖς ῥάθυμος;

ἤδη γὰρ ἔσχες ἐλπίδ' What? had you begun to entertain a hope?' ὡς ἐμοῦ θεοὺς | ὥραν τιν᾿ ἕξειν] A confusion of the two constructions, ὡς ἕξοιεν θεοί and ἕξειν θεούς. Cp. Aesch. Eum. 799, αὐτὸς ἦν ὁ μαρτυρῶν | ὡς ταῦτ᾽ Ὀρέστην δρῶντα μὴ βλαβὰς ἔχειν. See Essay on Language § 36. p. 67.

τοῖς νῦν.. μαντεύμασιν By reason of what is now feretold.

εὐσοίας χάριν For their own preservation. εὐσοίας is mentioned in the Scholia as the better reading.

τοιοῦδ᾽ ὑπ᾿ ἀνδρός Who can derive prosperity from such as I am? Herm. reads τίς ἄν *τι τοιοῦδ᾽ ἀνδρός..;

φασί They say. The subject is to be inferred from l. 413, viz. ἄνδρες θεωροὶ Δελφικῆς ἀφ᾽ ἑστίας. For similar vagueness of subject in reference to a reported prophecy, cp. О. Т. 110.

φλαύρον A poor business. There is not much good in raising up in age one who fell in youth. On the omission of ἄv, see Essay on Language § 27. P. 45.

θύραισι κειμένου Laid at their doors. The word κειμένου, though perhaps chosen with a view to what follows, as expressing Oedipus' presentiment of his end, has more immediate reference to the inactivity of age. A young warrior received within their gates might be of some avail, but what profit was there in an old man lying idle beyond their confines? Cp. the Homeric λυγρῷ ἐπὶ γήραος οὐδῷ, and Shakespeare's unregarded age in corners thrown. Y 2

The difficulty of interpreting this line has arisen from not observing that the dative is governed of δυστυχῶν (= δυστυχῶς γιγνόμενος) as well as of βαρύς. Cp. supr. 308. Your burial, happening in a way unfortunate for them, is a danger to them.' According to this rendering, the point of the reply is obvious enough. It needs no divine intimation to teach us this.'

μηδ᾽ ἵν᾽ ἂν σαυτοῦ κρατῆς But not in any place where you will be your own master. The subjunctive, as usual, after a relative adverb with av. Some editors have changed κρατῆς το κρατοῖς. But although this is favoured by the explanation of the Scholiast, ὅπου κρατοῖς ἂν σαυτοῦ, and by the comparison of l. 190, the change is unnecessary. For the adversative μηδέ, cp. El. 132, οὐδ᾽ ἐθέλω προλιπεῖν τύδε.

κατασκιῶσι Will they overshadow me? Cp. infra 1707 τύμβον.. εὐσκιαστον: The Two Noble Kinsmen, 1, 1, Human grace Affords them dust and shadow.

ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἐᾷ.. σ᾽ Sc κατασκιασθῆναι Θηβαίᾳ κύνει.

τοῦμφυλον αἷμα The guilt of parricide. Cp. Ant. 703, νεῖκος.. ξύναιμον : О. Т. 1406. Cp. Plat. Legg. 9. 871 D. (of the punishment of homicide), ὁ δὲ ὀφλὼν θανάτῳ ζημιούσθω καὶ μὴ ἐν τῇ τοῦ παθόντος χώρᾳ θαπτέσθω, where it is added that the intention to kill is to be punished in the same way, except in the matter of burial.

ποίας φανείσης συναλλαγῆς On what conjuncture having arisen?' 414. ἐφ᾽ ἡμῖν With regard to me.' Cp. Ο. Τ. 829, ἐπ᾿ ἀνδρὶ τῷδ᾽ ἂν ὀρθοίη λόγον.

οἱ μολόντες Those who returned, viz. the θεωροί.

For the indefinite Tus in a question, cp. supra 66, ἄρχει τις αὐτῶν; The use of τις = πότερος, where only two are spoken of, is remarkable.

It may seem unreasonable in Oedipus to expect his sons to disregard the interest and the law of Thebes. But he is absorbed in his own destiny, and is full of indignation at the thought of being taken to the borders of his country without being restored to it. This he thinks that his sons ought to have interfered to prevent. He regards the oracle as expressing the intention of Phoebus to glorify him at the expense of his countrymen if they persist in rejecting him. See Introduction, p. 281, note 2.

φέρω δ᾽ ὅμως But still, such are the news I bring. Cp. Aesch. Pers. 248, φέρει σαφές τι πρᾶγος κλύειν : Ag. 639, ὅταν . . πήματ᾿ ἄγγελος.. φέρῃ. 421 ff. The correspondence of clauses is not perfect, a new train of thought being introduced with δέ in 422. The broken thread is resumed in 425-426. Oedipus is saying, Let their quarrel go on to the end, and may the end be the worst for both. His passion interrupts him with the further thought, Let me only have the ending of it, and then-. For the expression, cp. Pind. Nem. 10. 29, 30, πᾶν δὲ τέλος ἐν τὶν ἔργων.

ἔχονται The present here rather marks the beginning than the continuance of the action. Take hold of,' i.e. obstinately engagein, rather than cling to, persevere in. Cp. ἔργου ἔχεσθαι.

κἀπαναιροῦνται δόρυ. And are taking up the spear for battle.' As ἐπαναιρεῖσθαι φιλίαν, πόλεμον, are quite good expressions, there seems no reason to suspect this more literal use. And δόρυ, as elsewhere, almost = πόλεμον. ἐπαναίρονται is less suitable, for the sons of Oedipus, though preparing for the contest, are not actually engaged.

ὡς οὔτ᾽ ἂν κ.τ.λ. This clause adds an explanation of ἐν ἐμοὶ τέλος γένοιτο, defining the manner of the end which Oedipus desired, and which he would bring about if the matter rested with him. May it be mine to determine the end-which I will determine in such a way that neither he who now holds the sceptre and the throne should remain,' etc ὡς (with the optative and av) is not here exactly equal to ἵνα with subjunctive or optative, which would mean ' (May it be mine to end it) that so neither he that holds the sceptre might remain,' etc. A slightly different way of taking the words is, May it be mine, etc:-so (since then) neither would he.etc.

πάλιν Nor should he that is gone forth ever come back again.' The reading of Par. A, though only slightly supported by MS. authority, is possible. Cp. infr. 1372, and note. 'Nor should he that is gone forth ever be restored to his own city. But that in the text is simpler and more natur l. Cp infr. 601, ἔστιν δέ μοι | πάλιν κατελθεῖν μήποθ᾽, ὡς πατροκτόνῳ.

So dishonoured by being thrust forth from my native land. For the expression of the predicate by an adverb, see Essay on Language § 24. p. 40; and cp. Plat. Rep 3.406 C, ὁ ἡμεῖς γελοίως οὐκ αἰσθανόμεθα.

οὐκ ἔσχον Stayed me not, nor shielded me, but suffered me to be made a homeless outcast and proclaimed a banished man. For the dative αὐτοῖν, see Essay on Language § 13. p. 19. f.

κατήνυσεν Fulfilled for me this boon, which I then desired. κατήνεσεν, assented to, accorded, the reading of B, is less forcible in the connection. The question is not one of promise but of performance. For the desire of Oedipus, see O. T. 1410 sqq., 1449 sqq.

ἔρωτος τοῦδε In respect of this desire I found no helper. For the genitive, see Essay on Language § 9. p. 13. The genitive after ὠφελεῖσθαι, e. g. τοῦδε τοῦ νόμου, Antiphon, 131. 27, which has been quoted as parallel is really different from this, being a genitive of participation.

When my grief was now all mellowed.' Cp. ὀργὴ πέπειρα, Τr. 728, and the metaphorical sense of ὠμός.

And I began to know that my rage had run to excess and been too severe in chastising my former errors.' It is more probable that τῶν.. ἡμαρτημένων is genitive in regimen with κολαστήν than genitive of comparison after μείζω, (Aesch. Cho. 519), because μείζω thus receives an exclusive emphasis. Forμείζων, used thus absolutely, cp. Plat. Soph. 231 Α, μὴ μεῖζον αὐτοῖς προσάπτωμεν γέρας, and Heindorf's note.

χρόνιον I say, after a time; resuming χρόνῳ (437), which contains the point of the sentence. The time is not imagined as being really long, though it seemed so to Oedipus. For a similar use of χρόνιος, cp Eur. Cycl. 249, χρόνιος δ᾽ εἴμ᾿ ἀπ᾿ ἀνθρώπων βορᾶς: Οr. 740.

ἔπους σμικροῦ χάριν For a little word; i, e. For want of a little word, which they might have spoken for Cp. Eur. Or. 84, νεκρὸς γὰρ οὗτος οὔνεκα σμικρᾶς πνοῆς. He is a corpse, were it not for a little breath. And for a similar thought, Thuc. 3. 53, ὁ μὴ ῥηθεὶς λόγος τοῖς ὧδ᾽ ἔχουσιν αἰτίαν ἂν παράσχοι ὡς εἰ ἐλέχθη σωτήριος ἂν ἦν.

σφιν Cp. αὐτοῖν, supra 430. 446-447. I have subsistence and a land where I can dwell safely.

εἰλέσθην . . χθονός (1) Chose the possession of a throne, and to sway the sceptre, and to be sovereign over the land. This arrangement of the words gives a better rhythm than if (2) θρόνους is made to depend, with σκήπτρα, or κραίνειν. (3) Another explanation makes θρόνους and σκῆπτρα to be taken with εἱλέσθην, and also, in a secondary construction, with κραίνειν as epexegetic infinitive. Cp. O. Τ. 237, κράτη τε καὶ θρόνους νέμω. For the accusative, cp. the use of the passive verb in Phil. 140, παρ' ὅτῳ Διός σκῆπτρον ἀνάσσεται.

τοῦδε Sc. ἐμοῦ.

οὔτε σφιν It has been thought that either οὗ τι in 450 must be changed to οὔτε, or οὔτε here to οὐδέ. If so, the latter is preferable, for οὔ τι is expressive.

συννοών *τε *τἀξ ἐμοῦ And comparing with them in thought those ancient oracles, which I bring from my own store, the same which Phoebus once accomplished upon me. Cp. supr. 93

τὰ ἐξ ἐμοῦ, Which come from my side; i. e. in making the comparison. Cp. Τr. 631, τὸν πόθον τὸν ἐξ ἐμοῦ. The correction, although questioned by Dindorf, who supposes some deeper corruption of the text, is probable enough.

ἐὰν γὰρ . . ἀρεῖσθε Cp. 72, ὡς ἄν, προσαρκῶν μικρά, κερδάνῃ μέγα: 647-648, ΘΗ. μέγ᾽ ἂν λέγοις δώρημα τῆς συνουσίας. ΟΙ. εἰ σοί γ᾽ ἅπερ φὴς ἐμμενεῖ τελοῦντί μοι: 815, τίς δ'᾽ ἄν με τῶνδε συμμάχων ἕλοι βίᾳ; 1206, ΟΙ. μόνον, ξέν', εἴπερ κεῖνος ὧδ᾽ ἐλεύσεται, μηδεὶς κρατείτω τῆς ἐμῆς ψυχῆς ποτέ: 1489, 90, ΟΙ. ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ἔπασχον εὖ, τελεσφόρον χάριν δοῦναί σφιν, ἥνπερ τυγχάνων ὑπεσχόμην. The extension of present aid is everywhere put forward as a condition of the permanent blessing. The task of defence which he here entreats them to undertake, is fulfilled by them in resisting Creon.

μου is genitive of the object, for which see Essay on Language § 9. p. 12.

πρὸς * ταῖσδε ταῖς σεμναῖσι δημούχοις θεαîs] In addition to these dread goddesses that protect your deme. This seems the most probable as it is the simplest emendation of this line. Others are πρὸς ταῖσι τρισσεμναῖσι, ὁμοῦ | προστάτισι ταῖς, ξὺν προστάταις. πρός harmonizes well with the emphatic ὑμεῖς. σύν has probably been inserted as a gloss L² has ταῖς σεπταῖσι.

ἀλκὴν ποιεῖσθαι 'Το undertake defence,' like τὰς μήχας ποιούμενος, Εl. 302: ἐποιοῦντο βουλήν, Hdt. 6. 101.

τῇδε μὲν πόλει This reading is preferred (1) for the antithesis; (2) because tῇ may be accounted for as a corruption of yῇ explaining πόλει.

τοῖς δ᾽ ἐμοῖς ἐχθροῖς Oedipus reverts to his own personal objects, as in 308-309 (εὐτυχὴς ἵκοιτο τῇ θ᾽ αὑτοῦ πόλει ἐμοί τε). although, as in that passage, the chief stress is laid on what is mentioned first. At the same time he leaves it to be implied that his enemies are the enemies of Athens. Cp. infra 646, ἐν ᾧ κρατήσω τῶν ἔμ᾽ ἐκβεβληκότων. The corruption in Lis due to itacism. 461 ff. The coming of Theseus is still delayed, and the scruples of the chorus cannot be set at rest without some formal expiation on the part of Oedipus. The presence of Ismene enables this to be made without Oedipus or Antigone leaving the stage. She goes to perform this service, and the chorus continue harping on the interminable theme (adding the confessional to the sacrifice), when Theseus at last enters bringing with him a very different spirit. His coming clears the air at once.

ἐπεμβάλλεις You add, to give further weight, as if throwing into the scale. Cp. supra 293, λόγοισι γὰρ οὐκ ὠνόμασται βραχέσι. And since you add in what you have now said that you are yourself the saviour of this land. λόγῳ is partly instrumental dative, partly governed by ev in ἐπεμβάλλεις.

παραινέσαι.. τὰ σύμφορα Το give you advice that will assist you.'

προξένει 'Give me friendly instructions. On the uses of this word, see Essay on Language p. 97. It is here specially applicable to the position of Oedipus as a stranger, and of the chorus who are advising him in a matter where they are most of all at home.

θοῦ νυν καθαρμὸν τῶνδε δαιμόνων) Institute a propitiation of these deities. Lit. A purification in relation to them. For the genitive, see Essay on Language $9. p. 12; and for θέσθαι in this sense, O. T. 134, τήνδ ἔθεσθ᾽ ἐπιστροφήν. vuv seems preferable to vûv after the imperative.

καὶ κατέστειψας πέδον ὧν (or αὐτῶν) may be supplied from ἐφ᾽ ἅs. The reading is doubtful. κατέστεψας is unmeaning; but κατάστεψον πέδον, Adorn the ground with garlands, receives some support from the description that follows. For κατέστειψας, which gives the most natural meaning and best rhythm, cp. supra 56, ὃν δ' ἐπιστείβεις τόπον. And for the thought, cp. supr. 84, 5 and note.

ἐνεγκοῦ Have brought. ferendam cura.

δι᾽ ὁσίων χειρῶν θιγών The minute directions belong to the ceremonial of the place possibly still in use in the time of Sophocles. ὁσίαι χεῖρες here as in Aesch. Cho. 378, are hands pure from guilt. So Horace, Od. 3. 23. 17, Immunis aram si tetigit manus, Non sumtuosa blandior hostia Mollivit aversos Penates Farre pio et saliente mica, in lines which also recall the spirit of infra 498-499, ἀρκεῖν γὰρ οἶμαι κἀντὶ μυρίων μίαν | ψυχὴν τάδ' ἐκτίνουσαν, ὴν εὔνους παρῇ. The precept to wash the hands (Schndw.) is probably included, but with a ceremonial significance. Cp. Αj. 655, λύμαθ᾽ ἁγνίσας ἐμά.

τέχνη Abstract for concrete. See Essay on Language p. 94; and cp. Phil. 35, 36, φλαυρουργοῦ τινὸς τεχνήματ᾿ ἀι δρός. For the (Epic) form of the sentence, cp. Τr. 752, ἀκτή τις ἐστιν. ἔιθα, κ.τ.λ.

κρᾶτα is probably plural here, as in Pind. Fr. 3 (Eustath. 1715. 63), τρία κρᾶτα. Cp. the Homeric κράατα.

ἀμφιστόμους Projecting on either side, rather than On either side the brim. See L. and S. s. ν. στόμα IΙI. The latter part of the compound is unemphatic.

οἰός * γε νεαρᾶς *εὐπόκῳ μαλλῷ λαβών] The insertion of γε (Heath) is the most probable of the various corrections (νεώρου, νεώρους, νεώρας, νεώρει, ν ογνῆς, νεαλοῦς, γε νεαρᾶς) of the first part of this line. γε refers to κρόκαισιν, which it confirms and amplifies. Yes, with a fillet of wool from a young ewelamb.' νεοτόκῳ, lately born, would express the feeling of ceremonial superstition with more exactness than veo- πόκῳ, which is made up by combining the MS. readings, and may mean either newly-clipped (an etymological use, for which cp. Essay on Language pp. 99, 100) or consisting of young wool.' But there is no motive for a twofold resolution (2) in this line, and εὐπόκῳ gives a simple and natural sense. Cp. Τr. 675, ἀργῆτ᾽ οἰὺς εὐείρῳ πύκῳ. Supposing ve to have crept in from the previous word, the variation of reading may be easily accounted for.

χοὰς χέασθαι.. Hom. Od. 10. 518, χοὴν χεῖσθαι. Cp. Crat. Com. 2. p. 151, ἄγε δὴ πρὸς ἕω πρῶτον ἁπάντων ἵστω καὶ λάμβανε χερσὶν | σχῖνον μεγάλην: Sen. Oed. 338, Altum taurus attollens caput primos ad ortus positus expavit diem. The place of offering was probably on the eastward side of the hill. See Introd. p. 273.

ἦ.. χέω Cp. supr. 195, ἢ ᾿σθῶ;

πηγάς El. 894-895, νεορρύτους | πηγὰς γάλακτος.

τὸν τελευταῖον δ' ὅλον i. e. τὸν τελευταῖον κρωσσὸν χέοις ἂν ὅλον.

With what am I to fill this that I may make the libation?" πλήσας is suggested by ὅλον. θῶ would properly govern χοήν (cp. 466), for which κρωσσών is substituted. Three vessels are to be used for the threefold libation (Ant. 431, χοαῖσι τρισπώνδοισι τὸν νέκυν στέφει); two partly filled with pure water, the third, filled to the brim with water and honey.

The asyndeton as elsewhere in enumeration. Cp. supr. 17. Instead of a third element, which the hearer might have expected, the prohibition of wine is interposed.

μελίσσης For the metonymy, see Essay on Language p. 81. Schol. ἀπὸ γὰρ τοῦ ποιοῦν.

τος τὸ ποιούμενον. καὶ ἐν Ἐρασταῖς: Γλώσσης μελίσσης τῷ κατερρυηκότι.

μηδέ But not. Cp. 405, note.

The earth covered with dark leaves;' whether referring to the dark greensward (a slight variation of γαῖα μέλαινα), or to the deep shades of Colonus. Cp. supr. 157 ff.

ἐξ ἀμφοῖν χεροῖν Οn both sides.' For αὐτῇ = εἰς αὐτήν, see Essay on Language § 11. p. 18. Philochorus quoted by Schol. on l. 100: οὐ μόνον θυσίας νηφαλίους, ἀλλὰ καὶ ξύλα τινά.

τάσδ᾽ ἐπεύχεσθαι λιτάς Το add this prayer.' Cp. O. T. 1275 and note.

μέγιστα γάρ The prayer appears to Oedipus more important than the external rites, which, however, he is ready to fulfil. τούτων is neuter.

σωτήριον The passive use of adjectives in -τήριος is rare, and it has been attempted to give σωτήριον here an active meaning, inasmuch as Oedipus proclaims himself the saviour of Athens. But the chorus have very imperfectly realised this conception, and the expression of it would have seemed to them little in accordance with the humility of a prayer. The terms of petition are general, like the description of the previous ceremony. That they would receive their suppliant and afford him safety. See Essay on Language p. 99.

αἰτοῦ σύ γ', αὐτός γε adds a slight emphasis to the reply.

μηκύνων βοήν Speaking aloud. Cp. the Homeric μακρὸν ἀϋτεῖν, and the like. According to Polemo, quoted by the Scholiast on this line, the sacred rites of the Eumenides were entrusted to the family of the Ἡσυχίδαι.

θαρσῶν ἂν παρασταίην I will defend you without fear. Said in reply to ll. 458-459. For the fears of the chorus, cp infr. 1483-1485.

χώ τι δεῖ πρόστασσε And appoint us what we must do. For the order of words, see Essay on Language $ 41. P. 77.

τῷ μὴ δύνασθαι μήθ᾽ ὁρᾶν 'The want of strength as well as sight. Two objections have been made to this reading-that μήτε requires a preceding μήτε, and that δύνασθαι cannot be equivalent to ἰσχύειν. But the former objection appears arbitrary (cp. supra 451): and with regard to the latter, for δύνασθαι applied to bodily strength, cp. II. 20. 360, ὅσσον δύναμαι χερσίν τε ποσίν τε: Lys. 168. 26, τῷ σώματι δύνασθαι : Plat. Phaedr. 269 D, and the Homeric use of δύναμις. See also Essay on Language pp. 95, 96. Compare Shakspeare, As You Like It, 2. 7, Oppressed with two weak evils, age and hunger.'

The value of a pure intention is similarly asserted in the two lines, preserved from the Aletes of Sophocles by Stobaeus, ψυχὴ γὰρ εὔνους καὶ φρονοῦσα τοῦνδικον | κρείσσων σοφιστοῦ παντός ἐστιν εὑρέτις. Fr. 98.

τάδ᾽ ἐκτίνουσαν Paying these dues. The change from the MS. reading is very slight, being a correction of the simplest itacism (cp. Ant. 856, where L gives ἐκτείνεις for ἐκτίνεις) and ἐκτείνουσαν has never been successfully defended.

τι is idiomatic. Cp. Tr. 305, εἴ τι δράσεις: Phil. 286, κἄδει τι . . διακονεῖσθαι.

μόνον δέ . . λείπετ' But leave me not alone. This gives the reason for 497, where only one of the two sisters is told to go.

ὑφηγητοῦ γ' άνευ Hermann preferred ὑφηγητῶν ἄνευ οἱ ὑφηγητοῦ δίχα.

χρῆ ᾿σται is equivalent to a future of χρή. Where I am to find. This form, which occurs also in a fragment of the Triptolemus quoted by the Scholiast on this passage, Fr. 539, is variously explained as a contraction for χρεία ἔσται or for χρὴ ἔσται or χρῆ ἔσται, the form χρή or χρῆ being differently regarded as a primitive indeclinable noun, whence also χρῆν and χρῆναι, or as a contraction of χρεία. Linwood conjectures ἵνα χρῆ ᾿σταί μ' ἐφευρεῖν ταῦτα. But Ismene's perplexity is more simply expressed in the text.

κείται.

τοὐκεῖθεν ἄλσους Sc. ὁ τόπος

ἔποικος A resident, who had charge of the sacred utensils, etc.

οὐδ᾽ εἰ πονῇ τις On the meaning of the subjunctive with εἰ, see Essay on Language § 27. p. 44. For the reading of Par. A, cp. O. T. 317, and v. rr. Ismene having gone to perform the sacred rites, there is a further pause before the arrival of Theseus. 510, foll. The pause is filled by a short lyrical interchange between the several members of the chorus and Oedipus, who is thus brought to make confession while Ismene performs her offering. But his confession is a defence. The chorus, although importunate, are gentler than in the former scene. The opening line is scanned as choriambic, although it may perhaps be questioned whether the Ionic metre, which occurs above in 11. 212 ff., is not more suitable here and in 517. The other metres in the Ist strophe and antistrophe are logaoedic, with one iambic colon (518 = 532); those of the 2nd strophe and antistrophe are mostly iambic. The scheme is the following :clcclcla=alalcc-a (?) 기기 9-

The distribution of the parts amongst the members of the chorus is very uncertain. Most probably the coryphaeus speaks throughout the Ist strophe, and then the others interpose in turn.

δεινὸν μὲν τὸ πάλαι κείμενον ἤδη κακόν, ὦ ξεῖν, ἐπεγείρειν Cp. the proverb, μὴ κινεῖν κακὸν εὐ κείμενον (Plat. Phil. p. 40), and Plat. Legg. 2. 657 E (of the poet's power of recalling the feelings of youth), τοῖς δυναμένοις ἡμᾶς εἰς τὴν νεύτητα μνήμῃ ἐπεγείρειν.

The hapless misery which you encountered. arising ing without remedy.' For the genitive (= περὶ τᾶς, κ.τ.λ.), see Essay on Language § 9. p. 13, and cp. El. 317, τοῦ κασιγνήτου τί φής;

ξυνέστας] Cp Hdt. 7. 170, λιμῷ συνεστεῶτας : 8.74, τοιούτῳ πόνῳ συνέστασαν.

πρὸς ξενίας An extension of the common idiom, πρὸς θεῶν, etc. Essay on Language § 19. p. 29, and cp. Aj. 492-493, πρός τ' ἐφεστίου Δίος | εὐνῆς τε τῆς σῆς, ἡ συνηλλάχθης ἐμοί.

τᾶς σᾶς *ἃ πέπονθ᾽ ἀναιδή This conjectural reading. as well as the other which has been proposed, τᾶς σᾶς, πέπον, ἔργ᾿ ἀναιδῆ, has been suggested partly by the metrical difficulty, and party by the fact that the Scholiast appears to have taken ἀναιδή (ἔργα) to be governed by ἀνοίξῃς. Schol. μὴ πρὸς τῆς σῆς ξενίας ἀναπτύξῃς μου τὰ ἀναιδῆ ἔργα. Against πέπον it may be argued (1) that the word occurs nowhere in tragedy, (2) that where it occurs in Homer it is accompanied either by a noun in the vocative, or by the interjection 4, (3) that it is improbable that the first person (represented in the Scholion by μου) should be omitted. The word πέπονθα is in accordance with the spirit of other passages of the play (268, 537), and should be retained. ἃ πέπονθα is substituted for ἔργα, to which ἀναιδῆ is added as an emphatic epithet, My unwitting deeds of shame. Hence ἔργα was naturally inserted as a gloss. Besides the metrical objection to the MS. reading. ἀνοίξῃς requires an object, and the asyndeton takes from the smoothness of the passage without increasing its force.

τό τοι πολὺ.. ἀκοῦσαι I would hear once for all aright what is matter of loud and still undying rumour.

πολύ, i. e. σφόδρα λεγόμενον: cp. 305.

πολὺ γάρ, ὦ γέρον, τὸ σὸν ὄνομα, κ.τ.λ.

μηδαμὰ λήγον Cp. the similar expression, of a report still rife, in O. T. 731, ηὐδᾶτο γὰρ ταῦτ᾽ οὐδέ πω λήξαντ᾿ ἔχει. On the double accusative arising from the cognate use, see Essay on Language p. 25. For ξέν᾽ perhaps ξεῖν᾽, cp. infr. 530.

στέρξον Be content, i. e. μὴ ἀγανακτοῦ ἐρόμενος ταῦτα. It is doubtful whether this line should be altered by adding δ' or γ', reading παῖδες with the MSS. in l. 532, or we should read as in the text. Cp. infr. 1692 and note. For _ _ u u _ _ in a similar passage, see El. 828, 830, 841, 843.

ἤνεγκον κακότατα I was the victim of wretchedness. For the use of φέρω, cp. Ο. Τ. 1320, διπλά σε πενθεῖν καὶ διπλᾶ φέρειν κακά.

ἤνεγκον *ἑκὼν μέν] If this reading is adopted, it must be acknowledged that we have here a trace of the philosophical ἀπορία (already suggested by the Epic oxymoron ἑκὼν ἀέκοντί γε θυμῷ) which is treated at length in Plato (Legg. 860, 867 A) and Aristotle (Eth. N. 3. 1), viz. whether a man acts voluntarily when he is ignorant of the circumstances. See Introd. p. 270. Oedipus must be supposed to mean that in killing Laius and in marrying Jocasta he had acted with a right good will (ср. О. Т. 422-423, τὸν ὑμέναιον ὃν δόμοις | ἄνορμον εἰσέπλευσας, εὐπλοίας τυχών), but that as he acted in ignorance, the actions were not his deliberate choice.

ἄκων is certainly wrong and is due to some reminiscence of l. 694. Cp. Eur. Ι. Τ. 512, τρόπον γε δή τινα οὐχ ἑκὼν ἑκών. The expression is more forcible if, by a slight change. for θεὸς ἴστω, θεὸς ἴστωρ is read, as in the text.

τούτων δ᾽ αὐθαίρετον οὐδέν For the transposition of the dactyl. in the glyconic line, see Christ's Metrik, § 119. P. 94. To avoid it here, ἐθελητόν, ἀκάθαρτον (G. Wolff), have been conjectured.

ἀλλ᾽ ἐς τί But with regard to what? Sc. ἤνεγκες κακότατα. The curiosity of the chorus becomes impatient and peremptory.

κακᾷ μ᾿ εὐνᾷ By an evil nuptial the city all unknowing bound me in a fatal wedlock. μέν has probably ἐν arisen from a gloss ἐν (κακᾷ μ' εὐνᾷ). Others read κακᾷ μ᾿ ἐν εὐνᾷ and alter l. 513. The correction ἴδριν is unnecessary. Oedipus has already proclaimed his own unconsciousness, and there is a certain point in adding that the citizens were equally unconscious of the nature of their gift. Cp. infr. 983, οὐκ εἰδότ᾽ οὐκ εἰδυῖα.

γάμων ἐνέδησεν ἄτᾳ is Homeric. Il.2. 111, Ζεύς με μέγα Κρονίδης ἄτῃ ἐνέδησε βαρείῃ.

Didst thou, as I hear it told. consummate a dishonoured nuptial with thine own mother?' ματρόθεν, i. e. πρὸς ματρός, in that relationship! !' The force of the middle voice in ἐπλήσω is ethical (Essay on Language § 31. p. 52): Didst thou to thy confusion, etc. For πίμπλημι here, cp. Aesch. Pers. 132, λέκτρα δ᾽ ἀνδρῶν πόθῳ πίμπλαται δακρύμασιν.

My children and my curses.' Because sprung from an incestuous marriage. There is no allusion to the sons.

ματρὸς κοινᾶς Of a mother who was also mine. It has been urged in defence of the MS. arrangement of the persons, that the responsive ἰὼ δῆτα is more suitable to the chorus. But in the present instance it belongs to the chorus to utter expressions of horror, and to Oedipus to confirm them. Cp. supr. 532, ὦ Ζεῦ.

This line has been variously altered, but even if the true reading is lost. the general meaning is probably retained. The mistake about the persons has very naturally arisen from the suddenness with which Oedipus takes up the word. This helps to indicate the excitement of the situation.

κοιναί γε γε assents to what the chorus were about to say, which Oedipus emphasises by the words κοιναί γε πατρός. On κοιναί, see Essay on Language p. 95. Own sisters of their own sire.

ἰὼ δῆτα Cp. Εl. 842, ΗΛ.

φεῦ. ΧΟ. φεῦ δῆτ᾽· ὀλοὰ γάρ: Eur. Troad. 1230, ΕΚ. οἴμοι. ΧΟ. οἴμοι δῆτα σῶν ἀλάστων κακῶν.

μυρίων γ᾽ ἐπιστροφαὶ κακῶν Everrenewed onset of unnumbered woes. The image is that of an enemy who harasses an army by returning repeatedly to the attack with fresh forces. Cp. infr. 1045, δαΐων ἀνδρῶν .. ἐπιστροφαί, Αr. Eq 244, ἐπαναστρέφου. For the nominative after the interjection, cp. Tr. 1046-1047, ὦ .. μοχθήσας ἐγώ.

I have suffered woes that will not be forgotten.' ἄλαστα is first governed by ἔπαθον, then ἔχειν is added pleonastically, and ἄλαστα is resumed. Sc. ἔπαθον ἄλαστα, ὥστε ἄλαστα ἔχειν τὰ παθήματα.

I received a gift, which would that I, the much-enduring one, had never so benefited the state as to receive from her the privilege of choosing.' i. e. Would that I had not benefited the state so as to be honoured with the choice gift of Jocasta. In this rendering. which takes the words in a natural order, it is assumed that μή, with the past tenses of the indicative in a relative clause, may express the wish to reverse a fact in past time. Cp. Aesch. Cho. 363-366, μηδ' ὑπὸ κ.τ.λ. .. τέθαψαι. The analogy of the uses of the historical tenses with εἰ, ἄν, ἵνα, ὡς, ὅπως, to express an impossible supposition, inference, motive, or result, is all that can be urged in favour of this, except the comparison of a passage which has generally been thought corrupt, infr. 1713, ἰώ, μὴ γᾶς ἐπὶ ξένας θανεῖν ἔχρηζες. It may be further suggested, that in both these instances the unusual construction is assisted by an echo (or harmonic) of ὤφελον in ἐπωφέλησα, and of ἐχρῆν in ἔχρηζες. If this hypothesis is rejected, we must fall back on Hermann's interpretation of the words: Accepi, inquit Oedipus, donum, uxorem dicens, quod ego ut nunquam a civitate debuerim accipere, ei profui, i. e. quod ut mihi non unquam daret civitas, merui. quum eam a Sphinge liberavi. ταλακάρδιος is a poetical expansion of τάλας: cp. πυκνόπτερος, μελάμφυλλος, etc.

παπαῖ Properly an exclamation of pain; here transferred to mental suffering, in accordance with the metaphor in έπαισας. The punctuation of the line is uncertain, i. e. it is uncertain whether δευτέραν is an epithet of νόσον, οι πληγήν is to be supplied with δεντέραν, and ἐπὶ νόσῳ νόσον is in apposition to the sentence. For ἐπὶ νόσῳ νόσον, cp. Hom. Il. 14.130, μή που τις ἐφ᾽ ἕλκεῖ ἕλκος ἄρηται.

ἔχει.. πρὸς δίκας τι i. e. τὸ ἐμὸν ἔχει τι πρὸς δίκας. My case has some defence, something to be urged on the ground of justice. Cp. Ant. 598, οὐδ᾽ ἔχει λύσιν. Eur. Suppl. 64, ἔχομεν δ᾽ ἔνδικα.

τί γάρ reiterates the expostulation of the chorus. τί γάρ has a different shade of meaning in each of the three lines, 538, 542.546: (1) Why, what then? (2) But what of this? γάρ implying that excuse will not stand. (3) Why, what is that?' 547. The MS. reading ἄλλους is condemned both by sense and metre, but the correction is uncertain. ἁλούς, adopted in the text. may be explained in two ways, (1) ἁλοὺς ἐφόνευσα = ἑάλων φονεύσας, manifesto occidi, I murdered, and was convicted of the murder:' ἁλούς proleptic. Essay on Language § 38. p. 70. Cp. Ο. Τ. 1213. ἐφεῦρέ σ᾽ ἄκονθ᾽ ὁ πάνθ᾽ ὁρῶν χρόνος. (2) Being overtaken (by destiny) I did commit the murder. The former meaning gives rather a better force to καί, and is on the whole preferable, although the construction of the participle is more natural in the latter interpretation. Porson conjectured ἄνους, (3) being infatuated. but this implies a degree of self-accusation, from which Oedipus in the Oed. Col. is wholly free.

καὶ ὤλεσα The pleonastic expression has the solemnity of a legal indictment. Oedipus, while pleading innocence of intention, will not soften the actual crime.

νόμῳ δὲ καθαρός The construction of these words is absorbed in the remaining clause. The word καθαρός was specially applicable to one who had been acquitted of the crime of homicide. Cp. Plato, Rep. 5. 451 Β, ἀλλὰ μέντοι, εἶπον, καθαρός γε καὶ ἐκεῖ ὁ ἀφεθείς, ὡς ὁ νόμος λέγει: Legg. 9. 865 Β, ἰατρῶν δὲ περὶ πάντων, ἂν ὁ θεραπευόμενος ὑπ᾿ αὐτῶν ἀκόντων τελευτᾷ, καθαρὸς ἔστω κατὰ νόμον. ὡς ὁ νόμος λέγει and κατὰ νόμον in these passages answer to νόμῳ here. Essay on Language § 14. p. 20.

κατ᾿ ὀμφὴν σὴν *ἀποσταλείς Brought by thy voice, i. e. by the message sent at the request of Oedipus (1.70). The word ὀμφή has sacred associations, and is used in this play, supr. 102, of Apollo; infr. 1351, of Oedipus again: not elsewhere by Sophocles.

ἀποσταλείς, the reading of Turnebus, is nearer to the indications of our present MSS. than any other correction, and gives a better sense than ὃς ἐστάλη οι ἐφ᾽ ἁστάλη. See where our lord Theseus, Aegeus son, hath set forth at thy word, and is now come.' 551. The words from ἔν τε to διαφθοράς are introduced by an afterthought, and modify the rest of the sentence. Cp. Phil. 1411, foll., αὐδὴν τὴν Ἡρακλέους ἀκοῇ τε κλύειν λεύσσειν τ᾽ ὄψιν. See Essay on Language p. 65 f. VOL. I. Z

ὁδοῖς ἐν ταῖσδε In thy present coming. Cp. Εl. 68, δέξασθέ μ᾽ εὐτυχοῦντα ταῖσδε ταῖς ὁδοῖς.

σκευή Thine apparel: which, though travel-stained, is that of a noble Theban.

ὃς εἰ A pronominal expression to avoid the repetition of the name. Ср. О. Т. 1036, ὥστ᾽ ὠνομάσθης ἐκ τύχης ταύτης ὃς εἶ.

καί σ᾽ οἰκτίσας, κ.τ.λ. With a native generosity which Oedipus fully acknowledges (infr. 570), Theseus is ready to protect Oedipus, although not ignorant of the nature of his misfortunes (supr. 305 ff., 551 ff.). But he imagines himself to be conferring a favour, and knows not that the blind wayfarer has more to give than to receive. Once more, therefore, we have a fine contrast between the real and the apparent situation.

θέλω *' περέσθαι This correction of the Laurentian reading (=τὶ) is more probable than the reading of B, in which o' is awkwardly repeated. For the aphaeresis, cp. Phil. 592, λέγω. 'πὶ τοῦτον, κ.τ.λ.

δεινήν, κ.τ.λ. Either (r1) 'For that were a hard task indeed from which, on your mentioning it, I should recoil.' Or (2) For that would be a terrible fortune, of which the mention would make me shrink from giving relief. The latter rendering gives a more natural meaning to πρᾶξις (cp. Hdt. 3. 65, ἀπέκλαιε πᾶσαν τὴν ἑωυτοῦ πρήξιν), and is more in accordance with what follows (ὑπεκτραποίμην, κ.τ.λ.). And the usual question addressed to suppliants is, What is your misfortune? rather than, What would you have us do?' For the sentiment, cp. Eur. Suppl. 339. 40, (Θησ.) ὡς τοῖς ἐμοῖσιν οὐχὶ πρόσφορον τρόποις | φεύγειν τὰ δεινά. For the emphatic use of the adj., see Essay on Language p. 80.

ὡς οἶδά γ᾽ αὐτός Yes, for I know, that I myself was brought up a stranger, as thou art now. Theseus was reared by his grandfather Pittheus at Troezen.

χώς τις πλεῖστ᾽ ἀνήρ i. e. καὶ ὥς τις ἀνὴρ πλεῖστα (sc. ἤθλησεν). Ι have laboured, as any one hath laboured most:' i. e. as much as any one (ut qui plurima). The more usual expression would be ὅσα τις πλεῖστα.

ἤθλησα κινδυνεύματα Cognate accusative.

ἐν τὠμῷ κάρᾳ In my own person : i. e. they were dangers to my own life which I met by my own exertions, referring to the adventure with Sciron, etc. For ev, cp. the expression, ἐν τῷ Καρὶ ὑμῖν ὁ κίνδυνοos, Plat. Lach. 187 B.

ὥσπερ σὺ νῦν For the nominative, cp. Aj. 525, ἔχειν σ᾽ ἂν οἶκτον ὡς κἀγώ: Il. 6.477, γενέσθαι | παῖδ᾽ ἐμόν, ὡς καὶ ἐγώ περ.

σοῦ Essay on Language p. 13, 4 a.

Theseus, your nobleness in brief speech hath spared me the necessity of saying much.' Either (1) βραχέα is the subject of δεῖσθαι, or (2) the object of φράσαι, the subject of δεῖσθαι being τὸ πρᾶγμα. The object of παρῆκεν is absorbed in the following clause. Cp. Eur. Fr. 310, πάρες .. ὑπερβῶαι . . νάπη. For δέομαι passive, cp. Hdt. 4. 11, ὡς ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι πρήγμα εἴη, μηδὲ πρὸς πολλοὺς δεόμενον κινδυνεύειν. Essay on Language § 31. p. 54. δεῖται in Plat. Meno, 79 C, although impersonal (sc. τὸ πρᾶγμα ἢ ὁ λόγος), is middle voice and not passive as here.

καὶ γῆς ὁποίας ἦλθον This was implied in σκευή, l. 555.

χώ λόγος διέρχεται ‘And our conference draws to an end." This is the reading of the best MSS. διοίχεται, which is much commoner in this sense (cp. e. g. Eur. Suppl. 530), is given as a various reading in Par. A, and appears in the text of two other MSS. διέρχε ται is best supported by comparing Dem. 541. 22, πάντα δ᾽ ἤδη διεξεληλύθει, and Plat. Rep. 6. 484 Α, διὰ μακροῦ τινος διεξελθόντος λόγου.

τὰ δὲ .. καλή But the gain to be obtained from it is better than beauty. Cp. Eur. Fr. 552, νοῦν χρὴ θεᾶσθαι, *νοῦν· τί τῆς εὐμορφίας | ὄφελος, ὅταν μὴ τὰς φρένας καλὰς ἔχῃ; 580-581. For the datives, see Essay on Language § 11. p. 18.

ἡ σὴ προσφορά 'The advantage which you bring.

τὰ δ᾽ ἐν μέσῳ, κ.τ.λ. The construction is defined (with ποιεῖ) as the sentence proceeds. For the irregular accusative, see Essay on Language § 15. p. 22.

ἐνταῦθα γάρ μοι κεῖνα συγκομίζεται For in this favour those other offices are comprised; i. e. To assure him burial by the hand of Theseus was to assure him protection from the attempt of Creon.

(1) You have indeed summed up your request in one short word. Or (2) This favour which you ask consists in a little thing:' in re levi positam gratiam. Ellendt. For (1) cp. Εl. 673, ἐν βραχεῖ ξυνθεὶς λέγω.

Yet be advised; this is no trifling matter.' ἁγὼν ὅδε, the struggle or endeavour or peril implied in granting the request.

πότερα τὰ τῶν σῶν ἐκγόνων, ἢ μοῦ λέγεις;] In saying this, are you speaking of what relates to your sons, or of something that relates to me?' Theseus is bewildered by the words of Oedipus. Hearing of a contest in connection with the death of Oedipus, he naturally thinks of the impending conflict at Thebes, of which he cannot but have heard something. But, as he afterwards says more explicitly, he does not Z2 see how he is to be involved in this. Cp. Phil. 1384, λέγεις δ' Ἀτρείδαις ὄφελος, ἢ ἐπ᾿ ἐμοὶ τόδε;

ἀναγκάζουσι If this is the right reading, which, from the frequent confusion of and o, is not quite certain (cp. 603), the present is used with future meaning, as in Aesch. Prom. 513, ὧδε δεσμὰ φυγγάνω: ib. 525, δεσμοὺς ἀεικεῖς καὶ δύας ἐκφυγγάνω. Cp. Phil. 1379, κἀποσώζοντας νόσου. The subject of κομίζειν (sc. τινά, cp. infr. 933) is to be gathered from the context. They will enforce my being taken thither;' i. e. They will force the consent of Theseus and the Athenians to this. Universe eos intelligit, qui tradendi Oedipi potestatem habeant. Herm. Another rendering has been proposed - They will use compulsion against me to carry me back thither.' But such a use of ἀναγκάζω with the infinitive is inadmissible.

εἰ θέλοντ᾿ ἄν γ᾽, οὐδὲ σοὶ φεύγειν καλόν] The reading of this line is very doubtful, but that of L is as probable as any other. There would seem to be an ellipse of some such words as βούλοιντο κομίζειν or the like. But if they chose to fetch you in case of your being willing to go, then on your part it would not be becoming to remain in banishment.' Cp. Od. 15. 280, οὐ μὲν δή σ' ἐθέλοντά γ᾽ ἀπώσω νηὸς έΐσης. Hes. Op. D. 355. For the ellipse with el, see Essay on Language § 28. p. 47; and cp. Αj. 886, εἴ ποθι πλαζόμενον λεύσσων: Pind. Ol. 2. 56, εἰ δέ νιν ἔχων τις ? And, for av with the present participle, infra 761, κἀπὸ παντὸς ἂν φέρων, κ.τ.λ. Reisig's emendation θέλοντάς γ', But (consider) whether it be not unbecoming in you to be exiled from them desiring to have you back again, although not convincing, deserves consideration.

ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽, ὅτ᾽ αὐτὸς ἤθελον, παρίεσαν This line, at first sight, rather favours the emendation θέλοντάς γ' in 590. But αὐτός = of my own accord, may distinguish between mere willingness and the spontaneous wish, and the same word has not necessarily the same reference even in two consecutive lines. Cp. supr. 71, μόλοι and note.

But then, foolish man, anger in calamity is hurtful.'

ὅταν μάθῃς μου • When you have learnt the nature of the case from me.'

ἄνευ γνώμης Without consideration.

γένους Of your birth, rather than Of your race.

τί.. νοσεῖς; What is this greater than human misery at which you hint?

μεῖζον ἢ κατ᾿ ἄνθρωπον, because greater than the extreme calamities which had previously befallen him.

Why then should they have you brought, if you are still to live apart from them? For the middle voice of πεμψαίατο, cp. Ο. Τ. 434, σχολῇ σ᾽ ἂν οἴκους τοὺς ἐμοὺς ἐστειλάμην.

There is the same variance here as in 589. The future is unobjectionable.

In that it is fated for them to be defeated,' either (1) ' in this land' or (2) by this land. For (1) cp. infr. 1546, μοῖρ᾽ ἀνδρὶ τῷδε τῇδε κρυφθῆναι χθονί, 621-622, ἵν᾽ οὗμος .. νέκυς .. αὐτῶν θερμὸν αἷμα πίεται, 644-646, ὁ χῶρός ἐσθ᾽ ὅδε.. ἐν ᾧ κρατήσω τῶν ἔμ᾽ ἐκβεβληκότων: 786, τῶνδ᾽ ἀπαλλαχθῇ χθονός. In favour of (2) (which the Schol. gives) it may be urged that it makes the rejoinder of Theseus appear more natural.

τἀμὰ κἀκείνων For the omission of the article with the second word, cp. Εl. 991, καὶ τῷ λέγοντι καὶ κλύοντι σύμμαχος. Essay on Language § 21, p. 33.

συγχεῖ Obliterates, and so destroys. Cp. Hdt. 4. 127, συγχέειν τοὺς πατρωΐους τάφους: 7. 115, τὴν ὁδὸν .. οὐ συγχέουσι : Eur. Ι. Α. 37, καὶ ταὐτὰ πάλιν γράμματα συγχεῖς: Plat. Theaet. 194 E, ἀσαφῆ δὲ (ἴσχουσι) καὶ οἱ τὰ ὑγρὰ (ἔχοντες μνημεῖα) ὑπὸ γὰρ τοῦ συγχεῖσθαι ταχὺ γίγνεται ἀμυδρά. Essay on Language p. 105.

παγκρατής i. e. πάντα κρατῶν. Allmastering. Cp. ὁ παγκρατὴς ὕπνος, Αj. 675.

φθίνει.. φθίνει Ε. on L. § 44. p.83. 612,13. καὶ πνεῦμα ταὐτὸν .. πόλει] 'And the same spirit does not last between friend and friend, nor between city and city. By a metaphor derived from the most ancient, and not altogether lost in modern times, the feeling of love or hatred is regarded as a breathing or exhalation. Cp. Aesch. Agam. 1206, ἀλλ᾽ ἦν παλαιστὴς κάρτ᾿ ἐμοὶ πνέων χάριν: Aesch. Cho. 34, κότον πνέων: ib. 952, ὀλέθριον πνέουσ᾽ ἐν ἐχθροῖς κότον: Aesch. Suppl. 30, δέξαιθ'.. αἰδοίῳ πνεύματι χώρας: Plut. Dion. p. 197, τὸ τῶν δημαγωγῶν πνεῦμα. Hence a change of feeling is further compared to a change of wind, as in Aesch. Ag. 219, φρενὸς πνέων δυσσεβῆ τροπαίαν. For the thought, cp. Aj. 679 ff. ὅ τ᾽ ἐχθρὸς ἡμῖν ἐς τοσόνδ' ἐχθαρτέος κ.τ.λ.

βέβηκεν Almost = ἔστιν, -see Essay on Language p. 97,-but (in relation to πνεῦμα) retaining the notion of fixity or continued movement. For the perfect of βαίνω, expressing a settled state or condition, cp. esp. infra 1684, νῷν δ᾽ ὀλεθρία νὺξ ἐπ᾿ ὄμμασιν βέβακε.

καὖθις φίλα It often happens in Greek that both sides of a complex statement are put forward when only one is relevant. Cp. Aj. 679 ff. quoted above, Trach. 134-135, τῷ δ᾽ ἐπέρχεται | χαίρειν τε καὶ στέρεσθαι. But the poet may have chosen to indicate the possibility of future reconcilement between Athens and Thebes.

εἰ Emphatic, =κεί. Cp. Ant. 551, εἰ γέλωτ᾽ ἐν σοὶ γελῶ. Essay on Language § 28. p. 47.

εὐημερεί καλῶς *τό Elmsley mentions that some MSS. give τέ acgive cented, which may be a remaining trace of the original reading τό or τά, εὐημερεῖ καλῶς τε, i. e. quasi eὖ καλῶς τε ἡμερεῖ, is indefensible, and the objection to the tautology καλῶς εὐημερεῖ is unfounded. See Essay on Language § 40. p. 75. And though on the part of Thebes towards you all be now serene as heart can wish. εὐημερεῖ continues the metaphor in πνεῦμα. τὸ πρὸς σε is epexegetic of the impersonal subject of εὐημερεῖ. All looks fair and well in relation to you:' or (bringing out the image a little more), There is no cloud in the heavens between Thebes and you. For the construction, cp. supra, πρὸς πόλιν πόλει, and Hdt. 3. 49. εἰ μέν νυν Περιάνδρου τελευτήσαντος τοῖσι Κορινθίοισι φίλα ἦν πρὸς Κερκυραίους.

μυρίας .. ἰών There are countless nights and days which time begets in his onward course. For the form of sentence. cp. El. 1364-1366, τοὺς γὰρ ἐν μέσῳ λόγους, πολλαὶ κυκλοῦνται νύκτες ἡμέραι τ᾽ ἴσαι, αἱ ταῦτά σοι δείξουσιν, Ηλέκτρα, σαφή-a passage which also illustrates the present tense, as used of something future but certain.

ἐν αἷς .. δεξιώματα In which they will sunder with the sword on slight pretext your now well-plighted fellowship. The letter corresponding to a in L is rather an unfinished ∞ ( x ) than an a.

ἐκ σμικροῦ λόγου Out of a small occasion. Cp. Εl. 415-416, πολλά τοι σμικροὶ λόγοι | ἔσφηλαν ἤδη καὶ κατώρθωσαν βροτούς.

ἵν' On the very spot where. 623. Cp. Aj. 783, εἰ Κάλχας σοφός.

τἀκίνητα For κινεῖν of breaking silence, cp. Ant. 1060, τἀκίνητα διὰ φρενῶν: Ο. Τ. 354, οὕτως ἀναιδῶς ἐξεκίνησας τόδε | τὸ ῥῆμα; 625-626. τὸ σὸν μόνον | πιστὸν φυλάσσων] Either, (1) ‘Only keeping care- fully thine own good faith, or (with πιστόν as supplementary predicate), (2) Only keeping thine own part faithful. The position of πιστόν favours (2).

ἐφαίνετο is subjective middle.

ἡ δορύξενος ἑστία The hearth of warlike friendship, the article introducing a general notion, as in Tr. 398, τὸ πιστὸν τῆς ἀληθείας. See Essay on Language § 21. p. 34. The abstract is express- Declared on his own part, or Declared through the concrete; i. e. ἑστία is ed himself ready to perform (ἐφαίνετο τελῶν). Essay on Language § 31. p. 53, d. Cp. Ο. Τ. 148, ὧν ὅδ᾽ ἐξαγγέλλεται: Aj. 1376-1377, τἀπὸ τοῦδ᾽ ἀγγέλλομαι.. εἶναι φίλος.

ὅτου.. ἑστία Whose friendly alliance, first of all, has been ever known amongst us as a common possession; the family of Cadmus being πρόξενοι of Athens and not merely ξένοι of Theseus; publicum hospitium dicit, ut opponatur ἰδιοξένῳ. Linw. Or (2), reading ὅτῳ with Suidas, Who, first of all, has a home and place of defence always open to him in our land;' κοινή, in right of a mutual bond. Semper apud se paratum esse Oedipo hospitium pro mutua quadam vel inter ipsos vel inter majores eorum necessitudine.' Herm. Euripides represents Polynices as having been the ξένος of Theseus: Eur. Suppl. 930. For the alliance supposed to exist between Athens and Thebes, cp. supr. 606, 616, 618, infr. 758, 929. used for ξενία, like δόρυ for. πόλεμος. For the expression of a similar feeling, cp. Plat. Legg. 1. 642 Β, τυγχάνει ἡμῶν ἡ ἑστία τῆς πόλεως οὖσα ὑμῶν πρόξενος.

αἰέν On all occasions,' i. e. independently of his other claims on us.

ἔπειτα.. τίνει The sentence returns from the relative to an independent construction. Essay on Language p. 64. Theseus with noble brevity, (supr. 569), gives two or more reasons in one. Oedipus is (1) an ally, (2) a suppliant claiming Divine protection, (3) he promises to secure victory for Athens.

ἔμπαλιν On the contrary. The conjectural emendation ἔμπολιν (Musgr.) is unnecessary, and if it were accepted the opposition of clauses would not be sufficiently marked by δé. The word ἔμπολις occurs only once, infra 1156. ('Non opus ἔμπαλιν : fortius ἔμπολιν.' Herm.)

εἰ δ΄.. μίμνειν δέ = But with regard to the particular spot, referring to the comprehensive word χώρᾳ preceding.

τούτων, κ.τ.λ. A general apodosis relating to both the preceding clauses is substituted for the apodosis of the latter clause.

τούτων . . κρίναντι χρῆσθαι χρῆσθαι, sc. τῷ ἑτέρῳ. To make choice between these alternatives and use the one so chosen.' Cp. Ο. Τ. 640, δρᾶσαι.. δυοῖν ἀποκρίνας κακοῖν.

τῇδε Sc. ᾗ ἂν σὺ κρίνῃς. Cp. Εl. 1301-1302, ὧδ᾽ ὅπως καὶ σοὶ φίλον | καὶ τοὐμὸν ἔσται τῇδ᾽.

ξυνοίσομαι I will concur. 647. μέγ᾽ ἂν λέγοις .. συνουσίας] You seem to intimate a great boon which your abode with us will confer.' ἂν λέγοις = ἔοικας λέγειν, cp. El. 1372, οὐκ ἂν μακρῶν ἔθ᾽ ἡμὲν οὐδὲν ἂν λόγων | Πυλάδη, τόδ' εἴη τοὔργον. τῆς συνουσίας, genitive of relation (Essay on Language § 9. p. 13), A great gift in respect of your dwelling with us.

If you abide by your words and make them good to me. τελοῦντι, with σοί, proleptic. Cp. O. Τ. 863, εἴ μοι ξυνείη φέροντι | μοῖρα τὰν εὔσεπτον ἁγνείαν λόγων, κ.τ.λ. Some take 76- λοῦντι as agreeing with μοι (cp. 630). But Oedipus has only to remain where he is. The fulfilment of his promise does not take place till after his death. There is no meaning in a condition which is so far in the future.

Cp. the line attributed to Aeschylus, Fr. 385, οὐκ ἀνδρὸς ὅρκοι πίστις, ἀλλ᾿ ὅρκων ἀνήρ.

You would gain nought more by that than by my simple word.' 652. Herm. reads άνδρες. But cp. 656, where if the sense was not unfinished the article would be equally required.

ὅρα με λείπων Beware, in leaving me. ἃ.. δρᾶν] Nauck conj. ἃ χρή μ᾿ ὁρᾶν. But such a transition from the idiomatic imperative ὅρα to this rare use of the inf. ὁρᾶν, 'to provide for (Phil. 504, τὰ δείν᾽ ὁρᾶν), is very unlikely. For the use of a general word like δρᾶν in such a connexion, cp. Αj. 1373, σοὶ δὲ δρᾶν ἔξεσθ᾽ ἃ χρῆς. 658, foll. And many threats and many vain words have ere now been uttered in anger:' (Lit. 'Many threats have uttered many vain words:') but when the mind has power of herself again, nothing remains of all that was so threatened. For ἀπειλαὶ κατηπείλησαν, cp. infr. 794, τὸ σὸν.. στόμα πολλὴν ἔχον στόμωσιν : 779, ὅτ᾽ οὐδὲν ἡ χάρις χάριν φέροι : Plato, Theaet. 153 D, ἕως ἂν ἡ περιφορὰ ἢ κινουμένη, in all of which instances a process is personified and grammatically regarded as the agent. Also infr. 794, for a similar echo of sound. See Essay on Language § 44. p. 83. The conjecture πολλοὶ δὲ πολλοῖς πολλά gives a misplaced emphasis. Qy. πολλοὶ δ᾽ ἀπειλαῖς, κ.τ.λ.?

αὑτοῦ In its own possession. For the genitive as predicate, see Essay on Language § 9. p. 12. A similar emphatic use of αὑτοῦ occurs in Tr. 144, τοιοῖσδε. - χώροισιν αὑτοῦ. 661 ff. And with regard to the Thebans, though they have had the audacity to boast great things about carrying you away, they will find, I am well assured, that the way hither would be over a long and dangerous sea.' δείν] δεῖν' L.

αὑτοῦ αὐτοῦ LA.

κείνοις is in a twofold construction with ἐπερρώσθη and φανήσεται. ἐπερρώσθη is impersonal, (sc. τὸ λῆμα, ἡ ῥωμή), so that κείνοις ἐπερρώσθη λέγειν is equal το ἐπερρώσθησαν ὥστε λέγειν.

τῆς σῆς ἀγωγῆς is a genitive of respect.

ἄνευ, having the force of a preposition, adheres closely to the word which follows it, and the spondee in the 5th foot is thus justified. See on 115 supr. ἐν γὰρ τῷ μαθεῖν.

I am sure that, even in my absence (ὅμως.. ἐμοῦ μὴ παρόντος), my name will guard thee from ill.' There is a pause in the action of the play. Oedipus has now received from Theseus himself the final assurance of rest and protection. The scruples of the chorus have been pacified by the words of the king as well as by Ismene's performance of the sacred rites, and the anxiety of Oedipus has been calmed. Creon is on his way from Thebes, but his approach, though apprehended by Oedipus, is not yet present to the mind of the chorus. It is in this moment of tranquil security that the chorus give their welcome to the stranger, and sing the praises of Colonus and Athens.

Couldst thou find a fairer dwelling-place than this bright land? Here the nightingale keeps haunt, and sings in deep impenetrable coverts of green dells, where no sun, nor wind, but only the joyous presence of Dionysus comes. Here daily blooms the saffron and Demeter's flower, nor do the waters of Cephisus fail, nor Aphrodite shun the spot.

And there is a better plant than grows in Asian or Dorian soil, that flourishes of itself in this our land, the nurse of childhood, the terror of our foes, the grey-leaved olive, which Zeus and Athena ever protect from harm. Nor has Poseidon left us without his gifts. Our mother-state is famed for horsemanship and famed by sea. Here first the son of Cronos tamed the steed, here swiftly glides the oarèd bark, keeping pace with the multitude of sea-nymphs.

The metres of this ode are composed with especial care.

The ruling logaoedic rhythm of the 1st strophe is represented by the following line

Thou art come, stranger, to the homes of this land famed for steeds, the best homes on earth.

εὐίππου Cp. supra 59, τόνδ' ἱππότην Κολωνόν, and note. The epithet is intended to apply first and specially to Colonus, and then generally to Athens. εὐίππου τᾶσδε χώρας is attributive to τὰ κράτιστα γᾶς ἔπαυλα. Cp. supra 45, ἕδρας γῆς τῆσδ᾽.

γᾶς is partitive genitive with κράτιστα. Cf. infra 739, εἰς πλεῖστον πόλεως.

ἔπαυλα Here generally dwellings, homes, with some association from the care of horses, which was an occupation of the Coloniatae. Cf. Aesch. Pers. 870, Θρηκίων ἐπαύλων.

τὸν ἀργῆτα Κολωνόν An accusative added epexegetically in the same construction with ἔπαυλα. ἀργῆτα (cp.

ἀργήεις, ἀργινόεις), gleaming, either from the colour of the rock, or rather from the marble structures, such as the altar of Poseidon, which made it conspicuous in the sunlight from a distance.

ἔνθ᾽ ἁ The addition of the breathing which restores the metre, also, by introducing the article, rather improves the sense. Cp. El. 147, ἀλλ᾿ ἐμέ γ᾿ ὁ στονόεσσ᾽ ἄραρεν φρένας: infra 693, ἁ χρυσάνιος Ἀφροδίτα: 716, ὁ δ᾽ εὐήρετμος. The synaphea is not a strong objection where the metre is continuous, as here, and is at any rate more probable than that a glyconic verse should begin with a dactyl, and θεαῖν, at the end of l. 683, be taken for a monosyllable.

θαμίζουσα Il. 18.386, πάρος γε μὲν οὔτι θαμίζεις.

χλωραῖς ὑπὸ βάσσαις In coverts of green glades.ὑπό, with dative=down in. Cp. Ant. 336-337, περιβρυχίοισιν περῶν ὑπ᾿ οἴδμασιν : Ovid, Fast. 4. 427, Valle sub umbrosa locus est. 674. τὸν οἰνῶπ᾽ ἀνέχουσα κισσόν] Remaining constant to the empurpled (wine-coloured) ivy. For this meaning of ἀνέχω, cp. Aj. 211, λέχος δουριάλωτον | στέρξας ἀνέχει: Eur. Hec. 123, ἀνέχων λέκτρ᾽ Ἀγαμέμνων: Pind. Nem. 7.89, εἰ δ᾽ αὐτὸ καὶ θεὸς ἀνέχοι; and especially Aristides, l. 19, καὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ὅσοι θεοφιλεῖς, οὐκ Ἄτη πατεῖ τὰς κεφαλάς, Ἀθηνᾶ δὲ ἀνέχει καὶ ἐμβατεύει. The conjecture νέμουσα (Dind.) is certainly not less questionable than the text. νέμειν γῆν may be said, but hardly νέμειν κισσόν, φυλλάδα. (Cp., however, Ar. Av. 239, ἐπὶ κισσοῦ κλάδεσι νομὸν ἔχει). οἰνῶπα refers to the rich colour of the ivy, as if flushed with wine.

ἄβατον θεοῦ φυλλάδα μυριόκαρΔιόνυσος] ἀμφιπόλων πον The inviolable leafy grove, with countless berries, sacred to the God:' referring chiefly to the laurel and olive bushes, for the epithet ἀνήλιον can hardly apply to the vine: cp. supra 17, δάφνης, ἐλαίας, ἀμπέλου. For μυριόκαρπον, cp. O. T. 83. And for θεοῦ φυλλάδα, cp. Trach. 754, βωμοὺς ὁρίζει τεμενίαν τε φυλλάδα.

θεοῦ Probably Dionysus, to whom such thickets are sacred, as δενδρίτης θεός. Pind. Fr. 130, δενδρέων δὲ νομὸν Διόνυσος πολυγαθὴς αὐξάνοι. The mention of him is suggested by the ivy, and he is presently spoken of by name as haunting the spot. Cp. the similar introduction of Poseidon in 709, foll., and of Nessus in Tr. 556-558.

ἀνήλιον. - χειμώνων Cp. Od. 5. 478 sqq., τοὺς (θάμνους sc.) μὲν ἄρ᾽ οὔτ᾽ ἀνέμων διάη μένος ὑγρὸν ἀέντων, | οὔτε ποτ' ἠέλιος φαέθων ἀκτῖσιν ἔβαλλεν, | οὔτ᾽ ὄμβρος περάασκε διαμπερές, ib. 19, 440, ff. For the genitive, see Essay on Language § 10. p. 16.

θείαις.. τιθήναις The Nymphs of Nysa, who, according to a legend, were the nurses of the infant Bacchus, Il. 6.132, Διωνύσοιο τιθῆναι. Το the conjecture θεαῖς, which has been suggested for the metre, may be objected, (1) that the fem of θεόs is not elsewhere found as a monosyllable (unless in 683); (2) that the Nymphs are not properly spoken of as θεαί.

ἀμφιπολῶν Careering round. A picturesque inversion, representing the confusion of the Bacchanalian rout, in which it is uncertain who leads and who follows. But qy. ἀμφίπολος, used passively, as in Pind. Ol. 1. 96, τύμβον ἀμφίπολον ἔχων ? 681-693. The antistrophe passes from the wooded hollow to the open height, on which the crocus and narcissus blow: and then to the meadow that is watered by the stream.

οὐρανίας ὑπ᾿ ἄχνας ‘By the dew of heaven from above.

καλλίβοτρυς With fair clusters,' i. e. with several heads upon a stem.

μεγάλαιν θεαΐν The great Goddesses, Demeter and Persephone. See the Hymn to Demeter, 11. 6-18, where Persephone, after gathering crocus and other flowers, is tempted by a narcissus with a hundred heads, which Earth purposely causes to grow, so as to fix the attention of the maiden until Pluto comes. Ancient commentators observed that the chaplet worn in honour of Demeter and Persephone was not one of flowers, but of myrtle, or of ears of grain, and they proposed either to read μεγαλᾶν θεᾶν, referring to the Eumenides, whom Euphorion had described ας ναρκίσσῳ ἐπιστεψέες πλοκαμίδας, or to emphasize ἀρχαῖον, with reference to the former time before Persephone was carried away. But see note on 685.

χρυσαυγής Cp. Tennyson, Oenone, And at their feet the crocus brake like fire. The Schol. observes that Sophocles in the Niobe makes the 685

Κηφισού κηφισσοῦ Β Vat.

ἐπινίσσεται ἐπινίσεται L. ἐπινείσεται AR. crocus an emblem of Demeter. οὐδ᾽ ἄϋπνοι κρῆναι μινύθουσιν Κηφισοῦ νομάδες ῥεέθρων] Either (1) Nor fail the ever-wakeful springs that feed Cephisus stream,' referring to the abundant fountain-heads on the slopes of Parnes: or (2) Nor do the ever-wakeful rills decrease, dispensers of Cephisus' flood,' referring to the system of irrigation (διανομή) that goes on to this day. Although this allusion to an artificial process may seem unpoetical to the modern reader, the latter interpretation agrees better with πεδίων ἐπινίσσεται, besides giving a more definite meaning to νομάδες, and one immediately connected with Colonus. For a similar allusion in lyric poetry, cp. Pind. Ol. 5. 12, καὶ σεμνοὺς ὀχετούς, Ιππαρις οἶσιν ἄρδει στράτον. For the meaning of νομάδες, cp. Plat. Legg. 11. 931 C, δίκαιοι νομεῖς .. ἀγαθῶν, where νομεύς is similarly used.

ἀλλ᾽ αἰὲν .. χθονός But ever, each new day, with quickening power, he (Cephisus) pours his clear waters over the bosom of the plain. ἐπ᾽ ἤματι] Not=ἦμαρ ἐπ᾽ ἤματι ('day after day'), but on each day, like кат' ἦμαρ. Cp. Heracl. Fr., ἥλιος νέος ἐφ᾿ ἡμερῇ. The hiatus between this and the following line indicates a pause before the change of rhythm.

ὠκυτόκος Schol. ὠκύτοκα ποιῶν τὰ πεδία καὶ ἔγκαρπα. Ellendt rightly observes that this explanation may stand although πεδίων is to be joined (in the first instance) with ἐπινίσσεται.

For the general use of ὄμβρος for the element of water, cp. O. T. 1428, μήτ᾿ ὄμβρος ἱρός. Ε. on L. p. 98.

στερνούχου Cp. Hes. Th. 117, γαῖ᾽ εὐρύστερνος. Schol. ἴσον τῷ γονίμου. Meineke conj. σπερμούχου.

οὐδὲ Μουσᾶν, κ.τ.λ. Cp. the praise of Athens in Eur. Med. 830 ff. There was a temple of the Muses, near that of Athena, in the Academy. Paus. 1.30, 2.

viv The region,' i. e. Colonus and the neighbourhood.

οὐδ᾽ *ἄρ᾽ | ὁ χρυσάνιος Ἀφροδίτα There is some defect in the MS. text, as the hiatus οὐδὲ | å is not admissible between the two logaoedic lines. οὐδέ γ' | ἁ (Brunck), οὐδὲ | μάν (Herm.), have been conjectured. οὐδ᾽ ἄρ᾽ | ἁ may be suggested: ἄpa, i. e, as the beauty of the region testifies.

χρυσάνιος Ἀφροδίτα Cp. χρυσόνωτον ἡνίαν, Αj. 847.

ἔστιν δ᾽ οἷον . . βλαστόν In expatiating on the glories of their home, the religious mind of the Coloniatae dwells chiefly on the rival gifts of Poseidon, their patron deity, and of Athena, the special patroness of horsemen (infr. 1070), and of the Morian olives (706), as well as of Athens and of the tree in the Acropolis. The chorus are thinking chiefly of their own neighbourhood. Only in ll. 711, 716-9, do they speak of what relates to Athens apart from Colonus. The olive-plant immediately referred to is that in the Academy, mentioned by Pausanias as Division of 698.

ἐκχέων Α. having sprung up independently of the one in the Acropolis :-δεύτερον τοῦτο λεγόμενον φανῆναι, Paus. 1. 32. On the sacred feeling attaching to the Athenian olive, see also Hdt. 5. 82, 8. 55. The genitive, γᾶς Ἀσίας, is rather partitive than possessive, and to be taken closely with ἐπακούω. A thing such as I cannot hear of anywhere in the Asian land, nor as having ever sprung, etc. The participle βλαστόν is introduced by an afterthought in the second clause. The Peloponnese is called a Dorian island by an anachronism similar to that by which the Athenian youth are called Theseidae in 1066. Asia and the Peloponnese are cited as the two rivals of Athenian greatness.

φύτευμα is the subject of ἔστιν, although not thought of at the beginning of the sentence.

ἀχείρωτον This reading is supported by the remark of Pollux, 2. 154, which probably refers to this passage, ἀχείρωτον δὲ Σοφοκλῆς εἶπε τὸ ἀχειρούργητον. The simpler interpretation, however, is more probable, unravaged, anticipating the thought in 699 and 702-705.

αὐτόποιον Self-created, That springeth ever of itself; i.e. That needs not to be renewed by human agency.

τᾷδε .. χώρᾳ i. e. (1) Along the banks of the Cephisus: or (2) in Attica generally. Cp. Hdt. 5. 82, λέγεται δὲ καὶ ὡς ἐλαῖαι ἦσαν ἄλλοθι γῆς οὐδαμοῦ κατ᾿ ἐκεῖνον τὸν χρόνον, ἡ Ἀθήνῃσι.

παιδοτρόφου Simply childnourishing. Cp. Hes. Op. 226, εἰρήνη δ᾽ ἀνὰ γῆν κουρότροφος. The interpretations which refer to the custom of suspending an olive-crown where a male child was born, or to the propagation of shoots and offsets from the parent stock, are more ingenious than true. For the synecdoche, φύλλον ἐλαίας, cp. Αj. 14, ὦ φθέγμ᾽ Ἀθάνας.

τὸ μέν τις οὔ, *νεαρὸς οὔτε γήρα This line seems to have been tampered with by some one who had an ear for the iambic rhythm. The simplest alteration is to omit te and place a comma after οὔ. Which no commander, young or old... For the order of τις οὔ, see Essay on Language § 41. p. 71, and for the omission of the first οὔτε, ib. § 39, p. 67, and Phil. 771, ἑκόντα μήτ᾽ ἄκοντα. For the variety of expression (veapὸς σημαίνων, γήρα σημαίνων), cp. Ant. 808, νέατον φέγγος λεύσσουσαν κούποτ' αὖθις: and for the dative γήρᾳ, which has given offence, Ο.Τ. 172, οὔτε τόκοισιν ἀνέχουσι γυναῖκες. μέν, assuredly. Cp. El. 1240, τόδε μὲν οὔποτ᾽ ἀξιώσω τρέσαι, κ.τ.λ. Sophocles, in his description, blends the olive of the region, whether that in the temple of Athena Polias in the Acropolis, which Xerxes could not destroy (Hdt. 8.55), or the olives of the Academy which according to Androtion, quoted by the Schol., Archidamus spared, with the olive generally.

σημαίνω is used in the Homeric sense of to command an army. II.16.172, πέντε δ᾽ ἄρ᾽ ἡγεμόνας ποιήσατο, τοῖς ἐπεποίθει | σημαίνειν. The allusion which has been found in this passage to the invasions of Xerxes and Archidamus, is not improbable.

Λακεδαιμόνιοι γὰρ ἐμβαλόντες ἐν τῇ Αττικῇ δέκα μυριάσι Πελοποννησίων καὶ Βοιωτῶν ἡγουμένου Ἀρχιδάμου τοῦ Ζευξιδάμου Λακεδαιμονίων βασιλέως, ἀπέσχοντο τῶν λεγομένων μορίων, Ἀθηνᾷ θύσαντες, (Ἀθηνῶν δείσαντες, Meineke conj.), ὡς Ανδροτίων φησί, Schol. See also the quotation from Istrus in Schol. on 701. The reading of L, εἰσαιὲν ὁρῶν, sustains the choriambic rhythm; and παραπτομένα in the antistrophe is justly suspected. See note on 717.

κύκλος Phil. 1338, ὦ τὰ πάντ᾿ ἰδόντες ἀμφ᾿ ἐμοῦ κύκλοι.

Μορίου Διός i. e. Zeus regarded as the protector of the μορίαι or sacred olives in the Academy. Cp. Ar. Nub. 1005. Apollodorus, quoted by the Schol., says, περὶ Ἀκαδήμειαν ἐστὶν ὅ τε τοῦ Καταιβάτου Διὸς βωμός, ὃν καὶ Μόριον καλοῦσι, τῶν ἐκεῖ μορίων παρὰ τὸ τῆς Ἀθηνᾶς ἱερὸν ἱδρυμένων.

γλαυκώπις occurs here only in the extant plays of Sophocles. Probably grey-eyed, cp. γλαυκᾶς supr. 701. Essay on Language § 44. p. 82. a

ἄλλον . . εὐθάλασσον I have yet another mighty praise for this city that hath reared me, the gift of that great deity, to tell, her great pride, that she is renowned for the fairest steeds, the fairest colts, and for glorious sea. εἰπεῖν is added epexegetically in construction with ἔχω. The adjectives, εὔιππον, etc., agree with αὐτήν, which is to be supplied as the object of εἰπεῖν, if indeed some word equivalent to this has not been lost. Porson, to complete the metre, supplied χθονός before αύχημα. But perhaps the line may have stood, δῶρον τοῦ μεγάλου δαίμονος, εἰπεῖν γέ νιν, αὔχημα μέγιστον, κ.τ.λ. ματροπόλει = 'the state our mother.' Cp. 1480, γᾷ ματέρι. The word probably refers to Athens, as presiding over the smaller townships. But in ταίσδε .. ἀγνιαῖς, infr. 715, the neighbourhood of Colonus is meant.

For, son of Cronos, it was thou... γάρ is postponed after the vocative.

αὔχημ᾿ For the unconscious repetition of aὔχημα, see Essay on Language § 44. p. 84.

The dative ἵπποισι depends immediately on κτίσας, and is to be resumed with ἀκεστῆρα. Having framed for horses the bit, which tames their rage. Cp. Pind. O1. 13. 85, φάρμακον πραῦ τείνων ἀμφὶ γένυι.

ταῖσδε κτίσας ἀγυιαῖς Having instituted in these roads. κτίσας, having invented and brought into use. ταῖσδε . . ἀγυιαîs] In the roads about Colonus. The note of the Schol. here is curious: ὁ γὰρ Κολωνὸς ἱππεὺς ὠνομάσθη, παρ' ἃς ἐξεθέμην αἰτίας διὰ τὸν Ἄδραστον (κατ' Ἀνδροτίωνα, Rom. ed.). ὁ δὲ ἐπὶ τὸ σεμνότατον ἄγει τὸ πράγμα.

These lines expand the epithet εὐθάλασσον. 'And the well-plied oar, passing through the sea, flits wondrously by the hand of man, and darts onward, following in the track of innumerable Nereids. ἁλία may be taken either as an attribute of πλάτα, or with the participle.

εὐήρετμος Rather from εὖ ἐρέσσω than from εὖ ἐρετμόν. Join ἔκπαγλα θρώσκει.

χερσὶ παραπτομένα has been taken to mean fitted to the hand. But this is prosaic, and interferes with the figure by which the oar is put for the ship. As in O. T. 17, πτέσθαι may be a syncopated form of πέτεσθαι. But the metre is doubtful, cp. supr. 704.

ραϊσσομένα, περιπτυσσσομένα, παραιπεμ πομένα, have been conjectured.

πα-

ἑκατομπόδων As in ἑκατογκάρανος, ἑκατόγχειρος, ἕκατον is used vaguely to give the impression of multitude. The first part of the epithet is most important, as in πυκνόπτεροι, etc., the second part being chiefly pictorial. An allusion to the number 50 would be an awkward conceit; and the bare mention of an exact number, such as 100, would have no poetic force. 721 ff. Ismene is not yet returned. The dreaded Creon is seen advancing instead. The boast of a strong dwellingplace, and of the unconquered olivetree, will now be put to proof. νῦν σοὶ.. δὴ σοί, sc. πάρεστι, cp. Phil. 1165, ἀλλὰ γνῶθ᾽, εὖ γνῶθ᾽, ὅτι σοὶ | κῆρα τάνδ᾽ ἀποφεύγειν. The conjecture σόν in both places is unnecessary. δή emphasizes the whole sentence: cp. Ant. 726, οἱ τηλικοίδε καὶ διδαξόμεσθα δὴ | φρονεῖν, κ.τ.λ. The reading δεῖ may have arisen from the difficulty of σοί, and the unusual position of δή. φαίνειν] Causative, as in Phil. 297, ἔφην᾿ ἄφαντον φῶς. Cause these words to shine, shine,' i. e. manifest their truth in action : = ἀποδιδόναι ἐναργῆ. Cp. Τr. 239, εὐκταῖα φαίνων: Pind. Nem. 10. 11, Ζεὺς .. τοῦτον κατέφανε λόγον: Hdt. 3. 36, εὔνοιαν φαίνων.

ἡμῖν ἡμῖν, the dative of remote reference, has greater liveliness than ἡμῶν, which has been conjectured here. Here is Creon coming to trouble us.

τέρμα τῆς σωτηρίας The end of safety; i. e. The safety that is the end of my desire.

θάρσει, παρέσται Fear not: you shall have your wish. The same words occur above (305) in a different connection. Elms. prefers κυρῶ to ἐγώ. 728-1043. Creon advances with his two attendants, and deprecating suspicion, attempts to persuade Oedipus to come home to Thebes, for his own and daughters' sake, according to the unanimous wish of the people. Oedipus, who is informed by Ismene, and by the oracles he had formerly received, of the real intention of the Thebans, indignantly resents the cruel meaning of the fair-sounding offer; taunts Creon with hypocrisy, in first banishing him against his will, and now trying to draw him unwillingly from Athens: and utters a curse on Creon and on his sons. altercation continues till Creon throws off the mask of gentleness, avows that he has seized Ismene, and threatens to carry off Antigone. The chorus (834 ff.) expostulate, and call for aid. He per- The

γεγήρακεν L. sists, and sends her away by his servants, adding reproaches against Oedipus, and, on the chorus further expostulating, threatens to lay hands on Oedipus, who thus provoked, utters a special curse on Creon. A scuffle ensues between the two old men: Creon taking hold of Oedipus to drag him away. The chorus (877 ff.) again cry aloud for help, and Theseus, who has been sacrificing at a neighbouring altar, enters in haste. On learning what is the matter, he orders the people from the sacrifices to pursue the fugitives, and threatens Creon with arrest if the maidens are not produced immediately. He is sure that Thebes will not resent this. She cannot countenance such violence. Creon then speaks for himself. He could not have supposed that Athens would have cared to protect his kindred, or would have received an incestuous person and a parricide under the shadow of the hill of Ares. Hefurther excuses his assault by the curses of Oedipus. He is in Theseus' hands, but will resist harsh treatment. The mention of hisunwitting crimes calls forth a fresh outburst of passion from Oedipus. Theseus breaks off further conference by peremptorily commanding Creon to show him where the maidens are. Oedipus is left alone with the chorus. Cp. O. T. 512-862.

ὁρῶ . . ἐπεισόδου I see that a sudden fear has overcast your eyes at my coming in. ὀμμάτων is a genitive of place, or of the part affected. For εἰληφότας, cp. Αj. 345, τάχ᾽ ἄν τιν αἰδῶ κἀπ᾿ ἐμοὶ βλέψας λάβοι: Eur. Suppl. 1050. ὀργὴν λάβοις ἂν τῶν ἐμῶν βουλευμάτων | κλύων: Plat. Soph. 243 C, ταὐτὸν τοῦτο πάθος εἰληφότες ἐν τῇ ψυχῇ. And for the whole expression, Aesch. Eum. 407, θαῦμα δ᾽ ὄμμασιν πάρα: Eur. I. A. 1128, Ar. Vesp. 447-

μήτ᾿ ἀφῆτ᾽ ἔπος κακόν As often happens, the sentence passes out of the relative construction. Cp. supr. 467.

Creon endeavours to allay the alarm occasioned by his coming, and to win confidence by dwelling (1) on his own age and apparent feebleness, (2) on the age and condition of Oedipus, which needed protection at home, (3) on his intention to use persuasion only. (4) on the public authority and responsibility of his mission, (5) on his personal and private motives for undertaking it.

εἴ τιν᾿ Ἑλλάδος For the attraction, cp. Aj 488. εἴπερ τινὸς σθένοντος ἐν πλούτῳ Φρυγῶν. Ε. on L. § 35. p. 60.

ἄνδρα τόνδε τηλικόνδ᾽ ἀπεστάλην The text, while giving a more natural order of the words than the VOL. I. Aa ï conjecture τηλικόσδ' ἀπεστάλην, is also capable of a suitable meaning. Creon, wishing to show the reasonableness of his coming, points to the extreme age and feebleness of Oedipus as a ground for inducing him to return under the protection of Thebes. There is a peculiar emphasis on the words τηλικόνδε and πείσων, i. e. To induce this poor old man by persuasion only to return home.' For the combination of the demonstrative with the pronominal adj., cp. Phil. 128, τοῦτον τὸν αὐτὸν ἄνδρα: ib. 572 πρὸς ποῖον ἂν τόνδ'..;

οὔνεχ᾽ ἡκέ μοι γένει Since kindred makes it incumbent on me. For ἧκε, the simple for the compound verb, see Essay on Language p. 101-104, and cp. Phil. 141, σὲ δ', ὦ τέκνον, τόδ᾽ ἐλήλυθεν πᾶν κράτος ὠγύγιον. And for a similar use of προσήκει, cp. Hdt. 8. 100, οὐδὲν πρὸς Πέρσας τοῦτο προσήκει τὸ πάθος.

εἰς πλεῖστον πόλεως Above all that are in the city.

δικαίως Rightfully. Cp. Aj. 1108-1110, τόνδε δ'.. εἰς ταφᾶς ἐγὼ θήσω δικαίως.

ἐκ δὲ τῶν] Essay on Language § 21. p. 30.

πλεῖστον .. κάκιστος Cp. Phil. 631, τῆς πλεῖστον ἐχθίστης ἐμοὶ | κλύοιμ' ἐχίδνης.

ὄντα μὲν. ἀλήτην A stranger, and not only so, but ever wandering.

ἐπὶ προσπόλου μιᾶς With the support of one attendant. ἐπί, as it were leaning on. The expression is analogous to ὁρμεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἀγκύρας, Hdt. 7.188.

ὅσον i. e. εἰς ὅσον, one preposition, as frequently happens, sufficing both for antecedent and relative.

τηλικοῦτος At her age, i. e. just approaching womanhood. Cp. supr. 345-346, ἐξ ὅτου νέας | τροφῆς ἔληξε καὶ κατίσχυσεν δέμας. For the termination, cp. El. 614. 753 ff. Alas, I have uttered a sad reproach upon thee and me and our whole race. And yet, what is openly displayed cannot be concealed: wherefore do you, Oedipus. be induced by me to return voluntarily to thy city and palace and to hide thy disgrace there. For ἆρα, see Essay on Language § 29. p. 50. Creon professes to be horror-struck at his own words (ἆρ᾽ ἄθλιον τοὔνειδος, κ.τ.λ.): but excuses himself by the publicity which Oedipus gives to their common calamity in wandering from home. It rests with him to bury the reproach within the palace walls, where his daughter at least will find protection, and his kindred will not have the shame of seeing him an outcast. Cp. O. Τ. 1425, foll. τὴν γοῦν .. φλόγα | αἰδεῖσθ᾽ ἄνακτος Ἡλίου, τοιόνδ᾽ ἄγος | ἀκάλυπτον οὕτω δεικνύναι, κ.τ.λ.: Εl. 624-625, σύ τοι λέγεις νιν, οὐκ ἐγώ. σὺ γὰρ ποιεῖς | τοὔργον· τὰ δ᾽ ἔργα τοὺς λόγους εὑρίσκεται.

θελήσας Consenting. Cp. Ο. Τ. 649, πιθοῦ θελήσας, κ.τ.λ.

τήνδε τὴν πόλιν φίλως εἰπών First giving words of friendship to this city: for she deserves them well.' giving

ἡ δ᾽ οἴκοι Sc. πόλις, cp. supr. 433, τὴν .. αὐτίχ᾽ ἡμέραν. ‘But the city you have left behind, which so long nourished you, has by right a stronger claim to be reverenced by you.'

δίκῃ Essay on Language § 14. p. 20.

σέβοιτο For the passive, which occurs here only, see Essay on Language § 31. p. 54.

πάλαι i. e. in his prosperity, which is now regarded as long past.

κἀπὸ .. ποικίλον Who out of every cause wouldst bring some subtle fabrication of a just plea.Cp. infr. 806-807, ἄνδρα δ᾽ οὐδέν᾽ οἶδ᾽ ἐγὼ | δίκαιον, ὅστις ἐξ ἅπαντος εὖ λέγει. The present participle, as in Phil. 1052, νικᾶν γε μέντοι πανταχοῦ χρήζων ἔφυν, is used to express a quality without reference to time (Essay on Language § 32. p. 55), and is combined with ἄν, so that ἂν φέρων = ὅστις ἂν φέροις.

ταῦτα is cognate or adverbial accusative. Herm. reads καί με. But for the slight emphasis on the pronoun, see Essay on Language § 41. p. 78 €.

In a matter, in which I should be most vexed if I were caught. ἐν οἷς = ἐν τούτοις ἐν οἷς. In that particular in which, i. e. in his relation to Thebes and to his sons, in which he was most bent on continuing the present estrangement.

This is brought in to explain δεύτερον in 763.

τοῖσιν οἰκείοις κακοῖς When I was absorbed in my own personal sorrows. Ср. О. Т. 1414-1415, τἀμὰ γὰρ κακὰ | οὐδεὶς οἷός τε πλὴν ἐμοῦ φέρειν βροτῶν. Probably not my self-inflicted evils, although this might be supported by comparing El. 215, οἰκείας εἰς ἄτας : Αj. 919. ἀπ᾿ οἰκείας σφαγῆς.

ἡνίκ᾽ ἤδη μεστὸς ἢ θυμούμενος Cp. Dem. de Falsa Legat. 1175-1174, ἐπειδὴ δὲ μεστὸς ἐγένετο ἀγανακτῶν.

The line καὶ μάνθανον τὸν θυμὸν ἐκδραμόντα μοι, repeated here from supr. 438. has been rejected by all recent editors. Cp. O. T. 1200. and v. rr.

τότ᾽ ἐξεώθεις κἀξέβαλλες Then you began to thrust me forth and banish me.

τὸ συγγενές τοῦτ' The tie of kindred of which you now speak; supr. 738 Cp. Aesch. Prom. 39, τὸ συγ γενές τοι δεινόν.

καὶ γένος τὸ πᾶν 'And the Aa2 whole people,' i.e not only the authorities of the city (Theseus), but the inhabitants with one consent. Cp. Aj. 861, κλειναί τ' Ἀθῆναι καὶ τὸ σύντροφον γένος. The words in both places are intended to move the Athenian audience.

You try to tear me away, with cruel speeches couched in flattering terms.

τίς αὕτη appears not only in B Vat., followed by Triclinius, but also in L². The parallel of Thuc. 3. 12, τίς οὖν αὕτη ἡ φιλία ἢ ἐλευθερία πιστή; the frequent use of ὥσπερ without a definite antecedent in introducing an illustration, the doubtful correlation of τοσαύτη ὥσπερ (cp., however, El. 532, οὐκ ἴσον καμὼν ἐμοὶ λύπης, ὅτ᾽ ἔσπειρ᾽, ὥσπερ ἡ τίκτουσ᾽ ἐγώ), and the fact that the reading τίς αὕτη is not confined to one family of MSS, lead to the conclusion that the reading of LAV³, τοσαύτη, like σημαίνει for σαίνει, supr. 320, is a clerical error. τέρψις, repeated by unconscious tautology from supr. 766, is here active.

σοί is accented because of the antithesis in 781, καὶ σὺ προσφέρεις ἐμοί. As in the speech beginning at l. 960, esp. in l. 992, Oedipus uses the argumentum ad hominem in the debate with Creon. And yet what kindness is there in befriending men against their will? Suppose, for instance, when you were eager to obtain some boon, one were to refuse and grant you nothing, and not choose to gratify you, but when your soul was already satisfied, were then to make the offer, when the kindness was no longer kind! Would not that be an empty satisfaction for you to obtain? Yet such is the favour you now offer me.

The stress is on ματαίου. Would not the pleasure so received by you be vain?'

πόλις δέ σοι... χθονός And your city may come off unharmed from her encounter with the land of these men.For ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι, to come out of a contest. cp Ar. Plut. 271-272, μῶν ἀξιοῖς φενακίσας ἡμᾶς ἀπαλλαγῆναι | ἀζήμιος: and for χθών personified, cp. infr. 912, Ant. 187. The natural pause after κακῶν ἄνατος prevents ambiguity in τῶνδε. Others read τῆσδ᾽ ἀπαλλαχθῇ χθονός, with the meaning, may get out of this land, which is less forcible.

Join (1) ἐκεῖ χώρας. My evil genius ever lurking in the region of that land. The genitive is not strictly partitive. For a similar instance where the genitive and locative adverb are co-extensive, cp. Phil. 899, ἀλλ᾽ ἐνθάδ᾽ ἤδη τοῦδε τοῦ πάθους κυρῶ. Οr (2), χώρας ἀλάστωρ οὑμός, My vengeful spirit ravaging the land. But this twofold relation of ἀλάστωρ makes a harsh expression, and the pause before ἐκεῖ requires that the sense should run on to the word immediately following it. For the general meaning, cp. Aesch. Suppl. 413-415, μήτ᾿ ἐν θεῶν ἕδραισιν ὧδ' ἱδρυμένας | ἐκδόντες ὑμᾶς τὸν πανώλεθρον θεὸν | βαρὺν ξύνοικον θησόμεσθ' ἀλάστορα.

'They shall inherit their father's land, only by dying there.' The comparison of Aesch. S. c. Τ. 730, ὠμόφρων σίδαρος | χθόνα ναίειν διαπήλας ὁπόσαν καὶ φθιμένοισι | κατέχειν, τῶν μεγάλων πεδίων ἀμοίρους, is just, but the thought is not identical, for ἐνθανεῖν is in apposition to λαχεῖν τοσοῦτον, and not merely epexegetic of τοσοῦτον = ἐν ὅσῳ ἐνθανεῖν. The words therefore do not refer to the six feet of earth, but to the fact that the only part of their inheritance the sons obtain is to die on Theban ground. Cp. Ant. 146-147. 794-795. But you are come hither with a feigned tongue full of sharpness.' For ὑπόβλητον, cp. Αj. 188, ὑποβαλλόμενοι κλέπτουσι μύθους. And for the play of words in στόμα .. στόμωσιν, see Essay on Language § 44. p. 82.

τὰ πλείονα The article defines the more in contradistinction to the fewer.

ἀλλ᾽ οἶδα γάρ (as often with ἀλλὰ γάρ) gives the reason for breaking off and saying no more.

ταῦτα refers not to the whole tenor of the speech but to the γνώμη, ἐν δὲ τῷ λέγειν, κ.τ.λ. But I know that to this warning you will not attendenough then, begone!

οὐ γὰρ ἂν κακῶς Said scornfully in answer to Creon's expressions of affected pity.

εἰ τερποίμεθα If I have what I desire. The optative puts the case generally, because of the uncertainty of Oedipus' mode of life.

Do you think that the course of our present talk is disastrous for me in my relation to your affairs? (referring to 787 ff., 795-796). Are not your words much more disastrous to yourself? Schol. ἀντὶ τοῦ, ἐν τῷ μὴ πείθεσθαί σε μᾶλλον σὺ δυστυχεῖς ἤπερ ἐγώ. i. e. You accuse me of ignorance of your and your sons' destiny (1.787, 8): but you show much greater ignorance of your own best interests by refusing to come.

μήτ᾿ ἐμέ.. μήτε τούσδε The emphasis is on τούσδε : μήτ᾿ ἐμέ is taken for granted, and only introduced for the sake of the antithesis It would delight me, if you fail in persuading these men here as you will fail to persuade me.

λῦμα τῷ γήρα For the dative, see Essay on Language § 13. c, p. 19.

ἐξ ἅπαντος In every cause. Cp. supr. 761-762.

οὐ δῆθ᾿ ὅτῳ γε νοῦς ἴσος καὶ σοὶ πάρα (1) My words are certainly not seasonable in the judgment of one who has so little sense as you have; i. e. A wise speech sleeps in a foolish ear. Schol. τοῖς κατὰ σὲ οὐ δοκῶ καίρια λέγειν. For the dative, see Essay on Language § 13. p. 20, e. Or (2), I do not speak seasonably, in speaking to one so devoid of understanding. Cp Cp. Aesch. Prom. 983, σὲ γὰρ προσηύδων οὐκ ἄν, ὄνθ᾽ ὑπηρέτην. For ἴσος καί, cр. О. Т. 1187.

φύλασσ᾽ ἐφορμῶν ἔνθα χρὴ ναίειν ἐμέ Two explanations of this are possible, (1) Keep watching (lit. blockading) me and prescribing my abode;' the notion of dictation being implied in φύλασσ᾽ ἐφορμῶν: (2) Keep watching me and blockading my destined dwelling place. For (1) cp. El. 16, τί χρὴ δρᾶν ἐν τάχει βουλευτέον; supr. 654, μὴ δίδασχ' ἃ χρή με δρᾶν. But (2) is more pointed, and on the whole more probab'e.

μαρτύρομαι τούσδ', οὐ σέ Το them I appeal and not to you! And for the terms of your answer to your friends, if I once take you --. The intended threat ('you shall answer at Thebes') is broken off by Oedipus' retorting, But who can take me,' etc. Creon angrily repels the claim of Oedipus to speak for the Attic elders (ἐρῶ πρὸ τῶνδε), whom he calls to witness Oedipus' treatment of him. The latter words refer (1) to the lines in which Oedipus curses his sons (ἔστιν δὲ παισὶν μόνον), which Creon treats as the answer to the message which he had brought from the Καδμείων λέως: cp. infr. 850, φίλους ὑφ᾽ ὧν ἐγὼ | ταχθεὶς τάδ' ἔρδω. The structure closely resembles Hom. Il. 1. 338, τὰ δ᾽ αὐτὼ μάρτυροι ἔστων, | πρός τε θεῶν μακάρων, πρός τε θνητῶν ἀνθρώπων, | καὶ πρὸς τοῦ βασιλῆος ἀπηνέος· εἴποτε δ' αΰτε | χρειὼ ἐμεῖο γένηται ἀεικέα λοιγὸν ἀμῦναι | τοῖς ἄλλοις, where the final threat is in like manner suppressed. In the present passage, however, dé is strictly adversative, distinguishing Creon's personal injury from the supposed offence against Eteocles and the Thebans: unless (2) φίλους refers to Creon himself, as professing friendly intentions and as next of kin. But cp. supr. 788-790.

κἄνευ τῶνδε Without this, i. e. without my taking you. The ambiguity of τῶνδε would probably not be felt by a Greek, and is not a sufficient reason for altering the reading to τοῦδε, 817. Creon's tone implied that something had been done. Seeing that the chorus as well as Oedipus are impracticable, he breaks into open hostility, and avows the capture of Ismene, who had been seized and carried off before she could return from making her offering.

οἰμώζειν τάδε (1) ‘Το exclaim at this;' τάδε, the capture of the maidens; or (2), τάδε, cogn. acc., thus to exclaim. Probably the first.

τήνδε τ᾽ And this one ere long. The correction of γ᾽ to τ᾽ or δ᾽ seems to be necessary.

οὐ μακροῦ χρόνου Sc. ἕξω.

τὸν ἀσεβή Cp. 922, συλῶντα τὰ τῶν θεῶν βίᾳ | ἄγοντα φωτῶν ἀθλίων ἱκτήρια. He appeals to the known piety of the chorus.

οὔθ᾽ ἃ πρόσθεν εἴργασαι In seizing Ismene.

ὑμῖν, κ.τ.λ. Said to Creon's attendants; supr. 723.

ἂν εἴη For a similar use of av with the optative, cp. Τr. 728, σιγᾶν ἂν ἁρμόζοι σε τὸν πλείω λόγον, Εl. 1372.

εἰ.. πορεύσεται For the v. r. cp. πημαίνεις below, in v. rr. on l. 837.

Creon, as next of kin, is guardian of the children of the outlawed Oedipus. Cp. O. T. 1448, καὶ γὰρ ὀρθῶς τῶν γε σῶν τελεῖς ὕπερ: Aesch. Suppl. 387-389, εἴ τοι κρατοῦσι παῖδες Αἰγύπτου σέθεν | νόμῳ πόλεως, φάσκοντες ἐγγύτατα γένους | εἶναι, τίς ἂν τοῖσδ᾽ ἀντιωθῆναι θέλοι;

τοὺς ἐμοὺς ἄγω For the plural and masc., see Essay on Language § 20. pp. 30, 31. 835-836. The excitement, indicated by the broken lines, culminates in the dochmiac rhythm, to which the diiambus, ἰὼ πόλις, is introductory. 876-885, following the second attempt of Creon, are antistrophic to 833-843, agreeing very closely (except εἴργου – – in 836 = δοκῶ u - 879) even to the division of the words. This lyrical repetition, with the balanced rhythm of the intervening dialogue (containing one short outburst of Creon, 841-855, and one of Oedipus, 864-870), may be compared with O. T. 649-659, 678-688.

εἴργου • Keep off!' 837. The Scholiast, who, according to the reading of L, rightly explains πόλει by ταῖς Θήβαις, evidently assigned this speech to Creon.

Creon, while defying the chorus, refrains at present from taking part in the actual violence, which he leaves to his attendants. It is to one of these that the words of the chorus are addressed.

οὐκ ἠγόρευον ταῦτ᾽ ἐγώ! Oedipus rather alludes to his prophecy in 605 ff., that war would come between Athens and Thebes, than to his warning in 653, which is already fulfilled. Creon's present threat (πόλει μαχεῖ γάρ) comes near to Oedipus' prediction.

The chorus and Creon are giving opposite commands to the attendant.

χαλᾶν Το leave hold.' 841. The change to ἔντοποι (cp. Phil. 211), is necessitated by the dochmiac metre.

πόλις ἐναίρεται My city suffers violence. The chorus in their indignation, as Theseus afterwards in his scorn (903, ξένῳ .. τῷδε χειρωθεὶς βίᾳ) represent the attempt of Creon as an assault on the liberties of their city.

σθένει By main force. Cp. infra 1089, σθένει ᾿πινικείῳ τὸν εὔαγρον τελειῶσαι λόχον. The expression here is more nearly equivalent to κατὰ κράτος than to Bíᾳ. Cp. Eur. Bacch. 953, οὐ σθένει νικητέον | γυναῖκας. The adverbial dative following the parenthesis is rather weak. Qy. πόλις ἐμὰ στένει? Cp. Aesch. S. c. T. 247, στένει πόλισμα.

ὦ ξένοι ξένοι The last appeal of Antigone to the chorus is so worded as to recall her former supplication, ὦ ξένοι αἰδόφρονες, l. 237.

ἐκ τούτοιν .. σκήπτροιν With these to lean upon.' ἐκ = by means of, with the help of. Cp. Phil. 91, οὐ γὰρ ἐξ ἑνὸς ποδὸς | ἡμᾶς τοσούσδε πρὸς βίαν χειρώσεται.

καὶ τύραννος ὢν ὅμως Although I am a prince. For τύραννos = one of royal blood, cp. Eur. Med. 957, τῇ τυράννῳ νύμφῃ. Creon is moreover regent of Thebes; O. Τ. 1418.

τάδε = τὸ παρὸν πρᾶγμα.

ἐπίσχες αὐτοῦ, ξεῖνε Creon, after launching the above speech at Oedipus, turns to follow Antigone and the attendants who are dragging her off. The chorus interfere to prevent him.

τῶνδε The maidens, of whom Ismene, though in the background, is not far off.

αὑτόν These lines may be differently explained according as πόλει is taken to refer to Thebes or to Athens. Either reference is possibl possible, but πόλει in Creon's previous speech, supr. 837, is clearly Thebes. ῥύσιον is that which is held by one party, and claimed or seized by another, who is said ῥυσίων ἐφάπτεσθαι (Aesch. Suppl. 412, καὶ μήτε δῆρις ῥυσίων ἐφάψεται, ib. 314, Ἔπαφος ἀληθῶς ῥυσίων ἐπώνυμος). (1) Then assuredly you will quickly pay moreover a heavier forfeit to my state, for I will seize not the maidens only. For this meaning of τίθημι see L. and S. s. v. A. II, 8. Or (2), 'Then assuredly you will cause your city to have a still greater prey to redeem. For πόλει in (2), cp. Eur. Suppl. 120, ἦλθον ἐξαιτῶν πόλιν, (Adrastus speaks of Thebes, which is not his city).

δεινὸν λέγεις That is indeed a threat! Cp. supra 661, κεἰ δείν᾽ ἐπερρώσθη λέγειν. Know that this shall certainly be done forthwith (νῦν). For the ellipse with ὡς, cp. Αj. 39, ὡς ἔστιν ἀνδρὸς τοῦδε τἄργα ταῦτά σοι. The reduplicated future has not here the force of a future-perfect, but is simply emphatic.

ή σὺ γάρ How? do you mean to say that you...

μὴ γάρ γάρ gives the reason of an implied negative, repelling Creon's injunction of silence. Nay, but I will not. For I would not have these goddesses close my lips to this one curse.' 865. ἔτι adds emphasis to τῆσδε τῆς ἀρᾶς: i. e. Though they enjoin silence from cursing, let them not enforce it here.

ὅς μ' The omission of the antecedent rather adds to the passionate force of the expression. Cp. supra 263, κάμοιγε ποῦ ταῦτ᾽ ἐστίν, οἵτινες, κ.τ.λ., and see Essay on Language § 22. p. 35. and § 39, p. 72.

ψιλὸν ὄμμ' βίᾳ Who hast added to the former loss of my eyes by violently tearing away the poor defenceless means of sight that were still left to me.The ψιλὸν ὄμμα are his daughters, Antigone (τῆς ὑπέρ τ᾿ ἐμοῦ αὐτῆς θ' ὁρώσης, supra 33. 4) and Ismene, who brought him intelligence of things in Thebes. For the expression, cp. Shak., King Lear, 4. 6, Lear. Read. Gloster. What, with the case of eyes?' βίᾳ is to be joined with the phrase ἀποσπάσας.

σὲ καὐτόν, κ.τλ. Cp. Phil. 620, τὸ σπεύδειν δέ σοι | καὐτῷ παραινῶ κεἴ τινος κήδει πέρι. The change to σε τ' αὐτόν is unnecessary here. The case is different in 1417, where σε τ' αὐτόν is a tmesis for σαυτόν τε.

οἷον κἀμέ ἐμέ is accusative by attraction το σέ.

ἄξω βίᾳ Cf. infra 922, βίᾳ ἄγοντα φωτῶν ἀθλίων ἱκτήρια.

Creon, provoked by the curse of Oedipus, is about to carry out his threat (860), although, since the attendants are gone with the maidens, he has no one to help him. As to the reading, γηρῶν . . βαρύς; either γηρῶν has originated in a gloss on χρόνῳ βραδύς, and βαρύς, as elsewhere, from a misreading of βραδύς, or there was an early various reading, γήρᾳ βαρύς, for which, cp. O. T. 17. On the order of the words, see Essay on Language § 41. p. 78 8.

τάνδ'. πόλιν Then I will no longer account this a city. The Scholiast, who explains by νομιῶ, seems to have read the future, which is therefore substituted for νέμω. Cp. El. 150, σὲ δ᾽ ἔγωγε νέμω θεόν.

τοῖς τοι δικαίοις (1) In a just cause. Essay on Language § 11. p. 18. Or perhaps (2) the dat. is instrumental;- With weapons of justice. χώ βραχὺς νικᾷ μέγαν] Even slight men overcome the mighty. 882. Ζεὺς *γ᾿ ἂν εἰδείη, σὺ δ᾽ οὔ] There is a lacuna of an iambic penthemimer, or, if the correction Ζεὺς ταῦτ᾽ ἂν εἰδείη is right, of an iambic metre. The sense required is, ΧΟ. τά γ'᾽ οὐ τελεῖ.

Ζεύς μοι ξυνίστωρ. ΚΡ. Ζεύς γ᾽ ἂν εἰδείη, σὺ δ' οὔ.

ἰὼ γᾶς πρόμοι This is the summons to which Theseus, the chief of the land,' responds.

ἐπεὶ πέραν | περῶσ' *οἵδε δή Elmsley's emendation has been generally adopted, and has the advantage of closely resembling 843, προβάθ᾽ ὧδέ μοι. But the correction is uncertain. (1) Since they are passing all bounds.' Cp. supra 155. Hermann's rule, that πέραν can never be used metaphorically, appears arbitrary, and when they have just left the stage it is too soon to say, (2) They are passing the frontier.' But possibly the words may mean, (3) They are passing out of reach.' Cp. infr. 902, ὡς μὴ παρέλθωσ' αἱ κόραι, and the hyperbolical expression in 842, πόλις ἐναίρεται.

Theseus, perhaps moved by the strange advent of Oedipus. is sacrificing at the neighbouring altar of Poseidon, the chief guardian deity of Colonus. This act, which is natural in itself, is convenient, as the Scholiast remarks, for assigning a sufficient reason why Theseus, whose presence will be again necessary, should, when off the stage, be still within call. The sacrifice also occasions a gathering of people, who are ready to start in pursuit of Creon and frustrate his attempt. The trochaics are expressive of the haste with which Theseus comes-θάσσον ἢ καθ᾽ ἡδονὴν ποδός (890). They are conventionally associated with the sudden arrival on the stage or departure from it of important persons. Cp. Aesch. Pers. 155 ff.

ἔσχετε Stayed ye my hand. Cp. 429, οὐκ ἔσχον οὐδ᾽ ἤμυναν.

Dear friend (I know thy voice addressing us).' Cp. O. T. 1322-1326, ἰώ, φίλος .. οὐ γάρ με λήθεις, ἀλλὰ γιγνώσκω σαφῶς | καίπερ σκοτεινός, τήν γε σὴν αὐδὴν ὅμως. .. 894-895. Has torn away from me the two children that were my all. οἴχεται ἀποσπάσας, cp. supra 866, El. 809, 10, ἀποσπάσας γὰρ τῆς ἐμῆς οἴχει φρενός, κ.τ.λ. The use of μόνην is pathetic. Cp. ψιλὸν ὄμμα, supra 866.

The readiness of Theseus in comprehending the situation, and his promptitude, are traits which assist the action while they excite the admiration of the spectators. Cp. supra 569, 631.

τούσδε βωμούς This neighbouring altar.

ἄνιππον ἱππότην τε Cp. Ant. 1104, οἱ τ' ὄντες οἱ τ᾽ ἀπόντες. If, as suggested by the writer of the 1st ὑπόθεσις (see Introd. p. 259), Colonus was a place where horses stood for hire, the presence of horsemen at the sacrifice is easily accounted for.

σπεύδειν ἀπὸ ῥυτῆρος The testimony of the grammarians (Phryn. ap. Bekker. p. 24, ἀπὸ ῥυτῆρος τρέχειν ἵππον : οἷον ἀπὸ χαλίνου ἢ ἄνευ χαλίνου : Pollux l. 214, καὶ ἀπὸ ῥυτῆρος ἀνεῖναι τὸν ἵππον), and the passages in Diodorus Sic. (19. 26), and Dion. Hal. (11. 40), leave no doubt that ῥυτήρ in this expression is not a trace but a rein, and that the use of ἀπό is emphatic. τρέχειν ἀπὸ ῥυτῆρος, of a horse, would then mean, to gallop away from (i. e. without check from, without the effect of) the rein,' and in σπεύδειν ἀπὸ ῥυτῆρος the notion is transferred from the horse to the rider = to ride at full gallop. The phrase is immediately connected with ἱππότην, but the notion of full speed is extended to the whole sentence. It is singular that the ancient Scholiasts should have lost the key to this expression as they seem to have done. If ῥυτήρ were a trace' as elsewhere (Il. 16.475 etc.), the meaning would be ⚫ without putting to,' i. e. riding, not driving.

ἔνθα .. ὁδοί ‘Το just where the two hollow ways of travellers meet.' μάλιστα belongs in meaning to the antecedent clause, like the superlative in ἐπεὶ τάχιστα. δίστομοι suggests the appearance of the roads in a hill-country, each opening out of a narrow gorge of its own. Cp. Hom. h. Dem. 177, κοίλην κατ' ἀμαξιτόν.

συμβάλλουσιν As rivers are said συμβάλλειν ῥοάς, or as persons are said συμβλῆσθαι ἀλλήλοιν, Hom. Il. 14. 27, etc. For the absolute use (on which see Essay on Language § 53. p. 98, c), cp. Eur. Or. 335, δάκρυα δάκρυσι συμβάλλει: Plat. Pol. 273 Α. ὁ δὲ μεταστρεφόμενος καὶ ξυμβάλλων. The two roads appear from 1047 to be those from Daphne and Phyle.

The reason for so much haste is to prevent uncertainty as to the route taken by the enemy.

γέλως δ᾽ ἐγὼ .. βίᾳ ·And I be vanquished and become a laughingstock to this foreigner; i. e. to Creon. The dative, though governed chiefly by γέλως . γένωμαι, also depends slightly ση χειρωθεὶς βίᾳ: cp. Plut. Dion. p. 199. Theseus angrily speaks of the success of Creon's exploit as a conquest over himself (supra 842, note). Cp. Ant. 485, εἰ ταῦτ᾽ ἀνατεὶ τῇδε κείσεται κράτη: ib. 525, ἐμοῦ δὲ ζῶντος οὐκ ἄρξει γυνή. 905 ff. Cp. Eur Suppl. 581 ff. (the whole speech reads like an echo of this), οὔτοι μ' ἐπαίρεις ὥστε θυμῶσαι φρένας | τοῖς σοῖσι κόμποις· ἀλλ᾽ ἀποστέλλου χθονός, | λόγους ματαίους οὔσπερ ἠνέγκω λαβών.

* οὔσπερ .. ἔχων The MS. reading ὥσπερ κ.τ.λ has been explained, As he himself came hither under the protection of the laws, so he shall be corrected by the laws, (and not by violence). This makes a strong antithesis to 11. 904-906. But αὐτός is without point, and the reference to the laws without further qualification is un-Greek. Cp. Eur. Heracl. 1010, τοῖσιν Ἑλλήνων νόμοις. Either the correction οὔσπερ must be adopted, as in the text, or there is a slight inexactness of correspondence between the clauses. ('Etenim non τούτοισιν referendum est ad ὥσπερ, sed intelligendum οὕτω,' Herm. 1841. Rectius Reisigius, τούτοισι κοὐκ ἄλλοισι idem esse quod τοῖς αὐτοῖσι, quod minus infrequens est cum ὥσπερ compositum. Ellendt.). In any case the meaning is: (instead of being roughly handled) he shall be reduced to order according to those very rules of conduct which he brought with him in coming hither. i. e. As he has taken by compulsion so by compulsion he shall be checked in return.' Cp. infr. 916, supr. 832. For the meaning ning of vouos, see Essay on Language p. 88. And for the combination of the article and relative pronoun, cp. Ant. 404, ὃν σὺ τὸν νέκρον | ἀπεῖπας : Aesch. S. c. Τ. 553, τῷδ', ὃν λέγεις τὸν Ἀρκάδα.

τούς has the force of a possessive pronoun: those principles of his.'

κοὐκ ἄλλοισιν And these alone. ἄλλοισιν follows the construction of τούτοισι, without νόμοις or any other substantive being consciously supplied.

Until you bring those maidens hither and set them before my face.' ἐναργεῖς] · Without possibility of mis- take.' Tr. 223, τάδε σοι βλέπειν πάρεστ᾽ ἐναργῆ : Ε1. 878, ἐναργῶς, ὥσπερ εἰσορᾶς ἐμέ.

ἐπεὶ δέδρακας οὔτ᾽ ἐμοῦ καταξίως Since what thou hast done is unworthy alike of me and thine own lineage, and thy land.' The conjecture οὔτε σοῦ takes away the point from αὐτός in l. 912. Cp. infra 914, 915, 926.

οὔθ᾽ ὧν πέφυκας αὐτός The royal house of Thebes. Cp. O. T. 1235, θεῖον Ἰοκάστης κάρα.

Γκουσαν 913 δίκαι᾿ ἀσκοῦσαν] Cp. Hdt. 1.96, 1.90, (of Deioces), δικαιοσύνην ἐπιθέμενος ἤσκεε,

κραίνουσαν Used here in the Homeric sense of accomplishing, perfecting, and so = determining.

15. ἀφεὶς .. κύρια Casting off the authorities of this land. Cp. infra 1537, τὰ θεῖ ἀφείς.

ἄγεις παρίστασαι βίᾳ Carry off and forcibly make subject to you what you will. Cp. Hdt. 3. 45, εἴπερ αὐτοὶ ἱκανοὶ ἦσαν Πολυκράτεα παραστήσασθαι. ἄγειν as in λείαν ἄγειν-originally of cattle.

κένανδρον Spiritless. Aesch. Pers. 118, 121, uses κένανδρος and γυναικοπληθής of the city whose fighting men are slain. Cp. infra 939, ἄνανδρον, in the reply of Creon.

It is not her wont to rear unrighteous men.

3. βίᾳ | ἄγοντα Added in explanation of the preceding clause.

φωτῶν ἀθλίων ἱκτήρια Poor suppliant mortals. The periphrasis (for which see Essay on Language § 10. p. 17) adds pathetic emphasis to both parts of the expression.

οὔκουν And I would not. οὖν marks the accordance of what Theseus lays down as the rule of his own conduct with the claim he makes on Thebes. Cp. γοῦν.

οὔθ᾽ εἰλκον .. ἦγον Would neither have dragged away nor carried off. εἶλκον expresses a greater degree of violence.

ἀξίαν οὐκ οὖσαν, sc. αἰσχύνεσθαι. For τὴν αὐτὸς αὐτοῦ, cp. infr. 1356.

καί σ'.. κενόν And length of years gives folly to be the companion of thine age. Lit. In making thee old makes thee at the same time void of wisdom. Cp. Ant. 281, μὴ 'φευρεθῇς ἄνους τε καὶ γέρων ἅμα.

τὰς παῖδας .. τινά That the maidens be brought hither. The impersonal form of expression is here more dignified than if σε were repeated.

μέτοικος The Schol. observes that this word is used in the general sense of ἔνοικος, and not in its ordinary special meaning. See Essay on Language § 52. P. 97. § 54. p. 99.

These words come from my mind as truly as from my tongue.'

ὡς .. δίκαιος Since judging by the city from which you spring, you are shown to be just, and are then found to be doing evil. The chorus point the moral of Theseus' speech. Cp. supr. 919, καίτοι σε Θηβαί γ᾽ οὐκ ἐπαίδευσαν κακόν, 912 ff.

ἄνανδρον Without manhood, referring to κένανδρον, supr. 927. Some have tried to preserve the reading of L (λέγω) by joining ἄβουλον (940) with ἔργον (941), but the epithet does not agree with the tenor of Theseus' speech. Cp. Eur. Suppl. 314-323.

οὔτ᾽ ἄβουλον Nor without counsel; referring to 913-914, δίκαι' ἀσκοῦσαν εἰσελθὼν πόλιν, κἄνευ νόμου κραίνουσαν οὐδέν.

γιγνώσκων δ' ὅτι But judging that.

οὐδεὶς.. βίᾳ They would never be seized with an officious desire of maintaining my relations against my will. αὐτούς, sc. τοὺς Ἀθηναίους, implied in τήνδε τὴν πόλιν supr. For the accusative αὐτούς, see Essay on Language § 16. p. 23, and cp. Ο. Τ. 713, ὡς αὐτὸν ἥξοι μοῖρα πρὸς παιδὸς θανεῖν.

ἤδη δ' And I was sure. Cp. the use of ἐπίσταμαι in Herodotus.

κἄναγνον κἄνανδρον in L. is clearly a misreading from l. 939. Ср. Ο. Τ. 894, ἔρξεται.

6. Nor one who was discovered to be living in incest with his own parent.' Lit. With whom were found unholy marriages of children with parents. τέκνων is not genitive of the object, but attributive genitive (Essay on Language § 9. p. 12), sufficiently defining the ἀνόσιοι γάμοι, although τέκνων πρὸς γονέας might be a more complete expression.

Such a seat of good counsel did I know them to possess, the hill of Ares in this land. εὔβουλον opposed to ἄβουλον supra 940. For the argumentative use of τοιοῦτον, see Essay on Language § 22. p. 35.

To it I trusted when I seized this prey.' Creon, as the next of kin, claims the right of dealing summarily with the homicide.

The Schol. here quotes the proverb, ὁ θυμὸς ἔσχατον γηράσκει, as being referred to by Alcaeus. Cp. Thuc. 2.44.6, τὸ γὰρ φιλότιμον ἀγήρων μόνον. For anger yields not to age, until death comes. No pain indeed can touch the dead.' Aesch. Fr. 250, ἄλγος δ᾽ οὐδὲν ἅπτεται νεκροῦ. After life's fitful fever, he sleeps well; Treason has done his worst: nor steel, nor poison, Malice domestic, foreign levy, nothing, Can touch him further.' Shak. Macb. 3. 2.

ἐρημία Cp. 875. This, as Theseus presently suspects (1029-1031), is a false pretence.

κεί δίκαι᾿ ὅμως λέγω i. e. ὅμως κεὶ δίκαια λέγω.

σμικρόν Cp. βραχύς, supra 880.

πρὸς δὲ τὰς πράξεις But still I will endeavour to resist violence, if it is offered, old as I am. πράξεις here is not a mere repetition of the notion of the verb πράξεις supra 956, but is spoken with some emphasis, in allusion to Theseus' threats of compulsion, supr. 908, 935.

Oedipus means that Creon's language reflects disgrace upon himself as the brother of Jocasta, and as having made an outcast of his kinsman. Cp. supr. 770, 800, 1, πότερα νομίζεις .. ἐν τῷ νῦν λόγῳ; 753-754, ἆρ᾽ ἄθλιον τοὔνειδος.. ὠνείδισ᾽ εἰς σὲ κἀμέ; infr. 978 ff. And for λῆμα, Pind. Pyth. 3. 25, λῆμα Κορωνίδος.

ὅστις φόνους μοι Who hast allowed to pass thy lips against me the mention of that murder and that disastrous marriage which I unfortunate endured unwittingly. The general word συμφοράς (here, as in O. T. 99, equivalent to ἄγος) sums up the preceding notions, and adds to them. Cp. O. Τ. 1407-1408, χὠπόσα | αἴσχιστ᾽ ἐν ἀνθρώποισιν ἔργα γίγνεται.

Who would seem to have had some old cause of wrath against our race.' Cp. Plat. Phaedr. 244 D. πόνων τῶν μεγίστων, ἃ δὴ παλαιῶν ἐκ μηνιμάτων ποθὲν ἔν τισι τῶν γενῶν ἦν.

The comparative innocence of VOL. I. Oedipus in his voluntary actions is a chief point in the tragic interest of the Oedipus Tyrannus, and is still more strongly asserted in this play.

ἐμοί Sc. προσόν.

ἀνθ᾿ ὅτου In retribution for which; involuntary crimes being regarded as a punishment for some previous crime.

χρησμοῖσιν .. παίδων Poetical (generalizing) plural. Cp. O. Τ. 711-713.

ὥστε 'That he should die by his son's hand;' i. e. an oracle, whose fulfilment lay in his being slain by his son. Cp. 1350, δικαιῶν ὥστ᾽ ἐμοῦ κλύειν λόyous, and see note on O. T. 713. 972-973. Who was not yet begotten or conceived, but at that time had not come into being.'

And if, coming into the world as I came, marked by misfortune, I fought with and slew my father, all ignorant of what I was doing and to whom, how then can you in fairness blame me for what I did, seeing it was Bb unwitting?' ὡς ἐγὼ ᾿φάνην refers to the conditions of the oracle given to Laius. Cp. O. Τ. 1376, ὅπως ἔβλαστε.

* δάν, ( = δὴ ἄν, cp. El. 314), is a correction of y' av, in which the reduplication of the particles makes γε doubtful. For a similar error in the MSS. cp. supr. 51, ἄτιμός γ᾽ ἔκ γ᾽ ἐμοῦ.

ἶκον = ἀκούσιον. Essay on Language p. 94, cp. supra 239, ἔργων ἀκόντων.

Being such as I will presently tell of: for no, I will not keep silence, when you have gone to such a height of impiety. οὖν represents Oedipus' speaking as the natural consequence of Creon's.

εἰς τόδε.. ἀνόσιον στόμα (1) Το this height of impiety in speaking.' Cp. supra 132, τὸ τᾶς εὐφήμου στόμα φροντίδος ἱέντες. This is better than (2) taking ἀνόσιον στόμα separately, as an accusative of limitation. To such a height in thine impious speech.

ἔτικτε.. οὐκ εἰδυῖα She was, she was my mother, though we knew it not; i. e. ἦν μητὴρ οὐκ εἰδότος οὐκ εἰδυῖα.

Brunck's διστομεῖν was suggested not by levity, as Elmsley thought, but by the correction of Par. A.

ἄκων is used in two senses: (1) unwittingly, δι' ἄγνοιαν, (2) against my will, βίᾳ.

ἀλλ᾽ οὐ γάρ But (your charge is groundless), for, etc. So in Tr. 552, ἀλλ᾽ οὐ γάρ, ὥσπερ εἶπον, ὀργαίνειν καλὸν | γυναῖκα νοῦν ἔχουσαν: Εl. 595.

ἀλλ᾽ οὐ γὰρ οὐδὲ νουθετεῖν ἔξεστί σε. Essay on Language § 25. p. 43.

ἀκούσομαι I shall be reputed.

κτείνοι Were to attempt to kill.

ὁ καίνων He who was trying to kill you. Cp. Hdt. 3. 99, οἱ μάλιστά οἱ ὁμιλέοντες κτείνουσι.. ὁ δὲ ἄπαρνός ἐστι, κ.τ.λ. Eur. Phoen. 1600, (ΟΙΔ.) ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἐγενόμην, εὐθὺς ὁ σπείρας πατὴρ | κτείνει με, κ.τ.λ. Essay on Language § 32. p. 55.

Methinks, as you love life, you would punish the aggressor, and not scrutinize too closely the justice of the case.

εἰσέβην I came into. Cp. Aesch. Suppl. 470, ἄτης δ' ἄβυσσον πέλαγος οὐ μάλ' εὔπορον | τόδ' ἐσβέβηκα.

And I do not think that my father's spirit, were he alive, would gainsay my words.' The antecedent to ois is the argument from 989-996.

εἰ γὰρ οὐ δίκαιος You, however, for you only profess to be just, and think any word decorous, whether fit to be spoken or not, you pour these reproaches upon me in the presence of these men. Cp. supra 992, σὲ τὸν δίκαιον, and Creon's reasons 941-952.

τοῦθ' τοῦδ᾽ LBVat.

And it suits your purpose well to flatter the name of Theseus, and Athens and her noble institutions. 1003. τὸ Θησέως ὄνομα θωπεῦσαι] Viz. in the courteous address, ὦ τέκνον Αἰγέως, supra 940.

καλόν So in Phil. 1155, νῦν καλὸν..

κορέσαι στόμα.

καὶ τὰς Ἀθήνας, κ.τ.λ. Supra 733-734, 758-759, 943-953. κατώκηνται καλῶς] Cp. Plat. Legg. 683 Α, τὴν εἰς Λακεδαίμονα κατοίκισιν..

ἣν ὑμεῖς ὀρθῶς ἔφατε κατοικεῖσθαι καὶ Κρήτην ὡς ἀδελφοῖς νόμοις. 1005. And then amidst all your praises (join ὧδε πολλά), you forget this praise.' 1007. The correction of Par. F (2886), ῶν θεοὺς, suggests *θεῶν.. τιμάς.

τοῦθ' This land is foremost in that virtue. For the genitive in the reading of L, cp. El. 1095-1097, ἃ δὲ μέγιστ᾽ ἔβλαστε νόμιμα | τῶνδε φερομέναν ἄριστα. But the reading of A is in this case clearer and more harmonious. Bb2

τὸν ἱκέτην γέροντ᾽ ἐμέ Cp. O. T. 1153, Phil. 930.

Wert seizing me. and hast carried away my children. For the imperfect, cp. supr. 950. ἐχειροῦ is read in Par. F.

θ' is added from a corrector of Par. F.

δέ is in each case slightly adversative. The stranger, my lord, is honest: his calamities, indeed, are horrible, but they deserve our help.' The mind of the chorus is divided between horror and pity. Cp. O Τ. 1296, τοιοῦτον οἷον καὶ στυγοῦντ᾽ ἐποικτίσαι. The subdued tone of this speech, compared with 1044-1095, affords a good instance of the different functions of the chorus in the dialogue and in the lyric passages.

οἱ ἐξηρπασμένοι Schol. oἱ θεράποντες Κρέοντος. This interpretation, (1) implies that ἐξηρπ. is perfect middle. See Veitch, Irr. Verbs, s. v. ἁρπάζω. The force of the middle voice would be, Having effected their purpose of capture. (2) The captured ones, i. e. they and their attendants, are speeding away. The masculine form is used because the captors are included in the expression. See Essay on Language § 20. p. 30, and cp. supr. 902, ὡς μὴ παρέλθωσ᾽ αἱ κόραι: infr. 1057-1060, and notes. An early corrector of L, without erasing the termination οι, has changed it to ην, making the accusative to be governed by σπεύδουσιν as a causative verb. This is the reading also of Vat. and Par. B.

τί δῆτ᾿ ἀμαυρῷ φωτὶ προστάσσεις ποιεῖν;] (1) What then are your commands for one who is powerless to resist them? This meaning of ἀμαυρός is sufficiently supported by Eur. Andr. 204, αὐτή τ᾿ ἀμαυρὰ κοὺ τύραννος ἦν Φρυγῶν. For φώς used by the speaker of himself, cp. infr. 1109, ὦ σκῆπτρα φωτός. Creon continues his pretence of helplessness: supr. 956-958. The excessive meekness of this expression may be thought hardly consistent with ll. 958-959, 1037, and the words may be construed as an expression of contempt for Oedipus, (2) What then is your bidding on behalf of this wretched nobody?' But the first interpretation (1) is probably right.

τῆς ἐκεῖ i. e. ἐκεῖσε. “To lead the way yonder.' Hdt. 7. 147, καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐκεῖ πλέομεν ἔνθαπερ καὶ οὗτοι.

πομπὸν δ᾽ * ἐμὲ | χωρεῖν That I, however, accompany you. The infinitive depends on the notion My will is, implied in the preceding words. ἐμέ in this connection is more expressive than με, and the authority of the MSS. respecting such a difference is slight.

τὰς παῖδας ἡμῶν The genitive ἡμῶν has something of a privative force. You have the maidens whom you have taken from us. Cp. supr. 821, τὴν παῖδ᾽ ἔχεις μου; Ο. Τ. 1522, μηδαμῶς ταύτας γ᾽ ἕλῃ μου. Theseus throughout represents himself as aggrieved by Creon's act. οἶμον is an ingenious but unnecessary conjecture. The word would be superfluous after ὁδοῦ, supr. 1019. 1022-1024. (1) But if men are fleeing with them in their power, we may spare our pains, for there are others urging that pursuit (supr. 897 ff.), whom to have escaped out of this land they shall never glory before the gods.' The reading of most MSS, ἐπεύχονται or ἐπεύχωνται, is not defensible. For the variation of x and §, cp. Ο. Τ. ξ έ 297, οὐξελέγχων. Par. B. has ἐπεύχωνται. For the mode of expression, cp. Plat. Soph. 235 C, οὔτε οὗτος οὔτε ἄλλο γένος οὐδὲν μή ποτε ἐκφυγὸν ἐπεύξηται τὴν μέθοδον : Legg. 10. 905 Α, οὔτε σὺ μήποτε οὔτε ἄλλος ἀτυχὴς γενόμενος ἐπεύξηται περιγενέσθαι θεῶν. Otherwise, (2) As having escaped from whom they shall never glory over the gods of this land. But although Theseus speaks hyperbolically of the success of Creon in capturing the maidens as a conquest over himself, he cannot speak of the Thebans as glorying over the defeat of Poseidon, Athena, the Eumenides, Dionysus (!), etc. who are not gods of Colonus and Athens only, but universally reverenced ἐπεύξωνται Βο. 1028, τόδ' in Hellas. And the order of the words, especially the position of φυγόντες, is adverse to this interpretation.

χώρας.. τήσδε (gen of motion) is added, because when they entered Boeotia they would be safe.

ἐπεύξωνται contains at once the notion of glorying and of thanksgiving. Cp. the exulting language of Ajax in his imagined victory to Athene, Aj. 92-96, ὡς εὐ παρέστης· καί σε παγχρύσοις ἐγὼ στέψω λαφύροις τῆσδε τῆς ἄγρας χάριν.. κόμπος πάρεστι κοὐκ ἀπαρνοῦμαι τὸ μή. 6

ἀλλά In repeating a command or request, as often in Plato. Come, lead the way.'

In catching, you are caught; and fortune has taken you as you were pursuing after your prey.' The substitution of δίκη for τύχη is unnecessary and wrong. Fortune is continually regarded as the instrument of the Divine will. Cp. Phil. 1317, τὰς μὲν ἐκ θεῶν | τύχας δοθείσας: Shak. Hamlet, Act 3, Sc. 4. 'Take thy fortune; Thou find'st to be too busy is some danger.'

δόλῳ | τῷ μὴ δικαίῳ The dative is governed by the verbal notion'in κτήματα. Essay on Language p. 94.

κοὐκ ἄλλον. τάδε And you shall have no one to help you in this; for I well know that you were not unaided or unprepared, when you reached the height of insolence which is implied in this daring deed; but there were others to whom you trusted when you acted thus.

εἰς τόδε ‘For this task, viz. that of leading to where the maidens are. Cp. supr. 507, χωροῖμ᾽ ἂν ἐς τόδ᾽;

ὕβριν. τόλμης For the gen., see Essay on Language § 10. p. 17. Cp. Creon's assertion, supra 957-958, ἐρημία με κεὶ δίκαι᾿ ὅμως λέγω | σμικρὸν τίθησι. Theseus will not allow Creon to take any one with him, either of his own attendants, who may be lurking near, or of the Athenians, whom he may have corrupted. ψιλόν refers rather to the former suspicion, ἄσκευον (i.e. ἄνευ παρασκευῆς) to the latter. Cp. Thuc. 2. 12, ξυμπέμπουσί τε τῷ Μελησίππῳ ἀγωγοὺς ὅπως μηδενὶ ξυγγένηται.

πιστός Relying in confidence on some one. For πιστός active, cp. Aesch. Prom. 917, τοῖς μεταρσίοις κτύποις πιστός: Thuc. 3. 40, ἐλπίδα λόγῳ πιστήν: Plat. Legg. 824, νυκτερεύτην δὲ ἄρκυσι καὶ πλεκταῖς πιστόν.

Which things I must look into, and not allow this state to be overpowered by a single man.' Cp. supra 842, 879, 933, and the similar feeling in Ant. 663-664, ὅστις.. τοὐπιτάσσειν τοῖς κρατύνουσιν νοεῖ: 678, κούτοι γυναικὸς οὐδαμῶς ἡσσητέα. These lines may be taken to hint at a suspicion of treachery within the city, to which ἄσκευον may also point. Cр. О. Т. 124-125, πῶς οὖν ὁ ληστής, εἴ τι μὴ ξὺν ἀργύρῳ | ἐπράσσετ᾿ ἐνθένδ᾽, ἐς τόδ' ἂν τόλμης ἔβη; and note; also Ant. 689-694, and esp. Lys. c. Eratosth. p. 128, τοσοῦτον δ᾽ ὑμῶν καταπεπεφρόνηκεν ἢ ἑτέροις πεπίστευκεν, ὧν ἀμφοτέρων ἄξιον ἐπιμεληθῆναι, ἐνθυμουμένοις ὅτι οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἐκεῖνα δύναιντο ποιεῖν μὴ ἑτέρων συμπραττόντων οὔτ᾽ ἂν νῦν ἐπεχείρησαν ἐλθεῖν κ.τ.λ.

ἢ μάτην.. χώτε ταῦτ᾽ ἐμηχανῶ] Or are the considerations that I am urging as unmeaning to you now as they were when you devised this plot? The sentence is concluded as if the preceding words had been ἢ τὰ ἐμοὶ λελεγμένα δοκεῖ μάτην λελέχθαι ὁμοίως νῦν.

Join μεμπτόν. ἐμοί, Essay on Language § 41. p. 77.

νυν

χἡμεῖς I, in my turn.

χωρῶν ἀπείλει νυν Well, threaten as you please, but go on. qualifies the whole sentence, of which the participle is the emphatic word, and is used, as often elsewhere, with the imperative, e.g. supra 21, κάθιζε νύν με. For the emphatic participle, cp. Phil. 590, Ε. σὲ θήσομαι τῶνδ᾽ αἴτιον. Ν. ποιοῦ λέγων, I will make you responsible for this. Do as you please in making me responsible, if you will only speak.

πιστωθείς Under my assurance. As the middle πιστοῦμαι means to give mutual pledges, πιστωθείς is here used passively = having received pledge, i. e. being assured. a

While Oedipus remains alone upon the rock, an object of profound pity, the chorus burst into an exulting strain, anticipating the victory of Theseus and the restoration of Antigone and Ismene. The fray will soon begin. Would I were there to see! Where will the foemen turn to bay? At the pass of Mount Aegaleon, or by the Eleusinian shore? There will Theseus rouse the combat, and the maidens shall be present at the achievement of their deliverance. Or descend they now from Phyle, westward of the rock, the chariots with the pursuing cavalry? The enemy shall be overpowered. Mighty are the men of Theseus: valiant are the horsemen of our deme. They all are wor- α. shippers of Athene Hippia and of Poseidon. Are they engaged? or is the action still to be? My prophetic spirit pleads for the restitution of the muchenduring, much-wronged, maiden. O had my vision wings, that, lifted on some airy cloud, I might look upon the victory which I foretell! 'Zeus, grant our people the attainment of the fair prize and Pallas, his dread child, and ye, Apollo and Artemis, who love the chase, come jointly to our country's aid.' The metre of this chorus, at first glyconic, passes more and more into slow trochaic and iambic movements, with frequent long syllables. The whole is marked by great solemnity, with an occasional note of triumph. ―下​CCICI IFCCICI ICCICI CICIト​CCIILCI ーーーー トレーートレー トリートー 10= 10- ?? トトートー ICCI- LLACI 1, 2, 3, Glyconic with monosyllabic base, 5, 12, Pherecratean, 14, Adoniad, 6, 11, logaoedic, 4, 7, iambic dimeter with long syllables in the alternate feet, 8, 9, 13, trochaic, with long syllables in the alternate feet. The interweaving of the logaoedic with the iambic and trochaic rhythms is marked by the interposition of the iambics in 4 between the glyconic and Pherecratean, and the trochees in 13 between the Pherecratean and Adoniad. The epitritic movement, - - - - - - -, prevails throughout. Line ro of the strophe, if the text is right, may be compared with Phil. 1082, 1103, 1123, 1146, 1147, where the same form ㄥ​ㄧ​ㄥ​に​ト​し​て​! is combined with glyconic and Pherecratean measures. In Phil. 1147 it answers to a glyconic - - トー in 1124. But this does not remove the difficulty of finding a probable emendation of 1069, which may secure a tolerable correspondence between strophe and antistrophe. See note on 1069. β΄. D レレトート​(I LLCI ートレビー alcllcC1I !!ト​C!!!いー Lullトーー LU ICICII LUIIト​CIK CLLCICIU

The slow (epitritic) movement with frequent long syllables is continued in the second strophe and antistrophe, and only in lines 5 and 8 is quickened by the introduction of the dactyl. The opening syllables of 1 and 2 may have been exceptionally prolonged. Line 3 is probably to be scanned as an iambic dimeter with syncope of 3rd and 4th thesis. Syncope of thesis occurs also in 11. 5 and 10. Cp. O. T. 190, 193, 200, Christ's Metrik. § 393.

Might I be where soon the foemen shall wheel round and begin the fray with clanging arms.' The imagination of the chorus is excited by what Theseus has said, supr. 1022, 1029 ff.

δαΐων ἀνδρῶν ἐπιστροφαί i. e. δάϊοι ἄνδρες ἐπιστρεφθέντες: cp. Eur. Alc. 606, ἀνδρῶν Φεραίων εὐμενὴς παρουσία.

Ἄρη | μίξουσιν Like μάχην συνάπτειν, with the additional notion of a confused hurtling contest. Il. 20. 374, τῶν δ᾽ ἄμυδις μίχθη μένος, ὧρτο δ' ἀτή. 1048-1049. ἢ πρὸς Πυθίαις.. ἀκταῖς] Either by the cliffs of Pythium or those torch-lit cliffs... i. e. the shores of the Thriasian plain. ἀκταί seems to be a general expression for the seaward cliffs, including those not actually touching the sea. But the word is chosen to suit the mention of Eleusis. The question is whether the engagement will be in the pass of Daphne, or at some further point on the Eleusinian way. Cp the skirmish at ῾Ρειτοί in Thuc. 2.19. The Pythian cliffs' are so named from the Pythium, a shrine of Apollo in the deme of Oenoe, probably at the place now called Daphne. According to some authorities the Pythium was on the Megarian frontier. But the place so designated could not be on the way to Thebes. Philochorus, quoted by the Scholiast, says, ἐν Οἰνόῃ.. ἐν τῷ Πυθίῳ. For the adjective λαμπάς, cp. infra 1060, πέτρας νιφάδος. The Schol. quotes a line of Aeschylus describing the Eleusinian procession, Fr. 376, λαμπραίσιν ἀστραπαῖσι λαμπάδων σθένει.

οὗ πότνιαι.. προσπόλων Εύμολπιδᾶν] (1) Where dread mysteries are dispensed to mortals by reverend goddesses, whose golden (i. e. sacred, cp. O. T. 158, 187) key holds fast the tongue of their attendants of Eumolpus' race.' καί introduces a further description of the goddesses who preside at the mysteries. The initiation of the Eumolpidae is mentioned, as being more solemn than that of the Mystae, inasmuch as they have received their consecration immediately from Demeter and Persephone:-'quae silentio sacro continent suorum ora ministrorum.' Reisig. Hermann objects that the duty of silence was imposed on all initiated persons He refers ὧν τo θνατοῖσιν, and would render (2), On whose tongue hath passed the sacred key of the ministering Eumolpidae. And the Scholiast gives the same explanation: ὧν· τῶν τετελεσμένων. καί in this case may be supposed to emphasise the necessity of initiation as a condition of seeing the mysteries, or to distinguish the act of the priests from that of the deities. In favour of the first rendering (1), it may be urged that it makes καί more intelligible, gives more force to προσπόλων, and suits better with the position of the words χρυσέα κλής.

τιθηνοῦνται τέλη θνατοῖσιν, · Minister sacred rites to men,' as a nurse ministers to an infant. τέλη is a sort of cognate accusative, i e. ποιοῦνται οἷα ἂν τιθῆναι.

ἔνθ᾽ Bo Where (i. e. somewhere on the sacred way) methinks that Theseus and the two virgin sisters will soon mingle in the fray of battle which is to deliver them:'or, taking αὐτάρκει in a more general sense, in the valorous combat, the rescue that achieves its purpose.'

† ἐγρεμάχαν Hom. Hymn to Demeter, 424, Παλλάς τ᾽ ἐγρεμάχη καὶ Ἄρτεμις ἰοχέαιρα. The various reading ὀρειβατάν or ὀρειοβατάν may have arisen from a confusion of the letters e, ο-μ, β-χ, τ. This would not be a greater perversion than τήνδε θεσπίζει γραφήν for τήνδ᾽ ἔθεσθ' ἐπιστροφήν, Ο. Τ. 134, or ἐμοῖς ἐπὶ πόνοις for ἐμὸς ἐπίπολος, ib. 1322. The line does not exactly correspond to that in the antistrophe; see note on infr. 1067-1070. νας.

Θησέα. So φονέα, Eur. Hec. 882.

διστόλους i. e. δύο δισσῶς ἐσταλμέ- The word recalls the two bands of Thebans who had carried off Ismene and Antigone and would now resist their rescue. But the second part of the compound is subordinate. Elmsley says, διστόλους ἀδελφάς dixit pro δισσῶν ἀδελφῶν στόλον. The maidens and their captors are spoken of in a single phrase, as in supr. 902, 1016.

1056. ἀδμῆτας, virgin, perhaps with the further association of unconquered; i. e. exempt from captivity, cp. infr 1147. The latter part of the sentence is adapted to the nearer subject (Essay on Language § 36. p. 65, 2). The first intention was to speak of Theseus and the captors of the maidens as joining battle; then the thought occurs, the maidens also will be in the midst of the fray. Hence ξυμμίξειν with μάχην, or an equivalent word in the accusative, is changed to ἐμμίξειν with the dative, and the word for battle is expanded into the phrase αὐτάρκης βοά, i. e. either ἑαυταῖς ἀρκοῦσα, defending them, or αὐτὴ ἀρκοῦσα, sufficient without more ado. See Essay on Language § 43. p. 81, § 56. p. 102, § 3. p. 7. The latter meaning is probably right. The word is of good omen, like ἐσθλῶν, εὔαγρον, infra. ἐμμίξειν (intrans. cp.

προσμίσγω, συμμίσγω, συμβάλλω) is rightly construed with the dative, and Boa is used in the sense of a sudden rally or skirmish, almost = βοήθεια. Cp. supra 887, τίς ποθ' ἡ βοή; where βoή is the summons to such a sudden fight: Aesch. Ag. 1349: Suppl. 730, εἰ βραδύνοιμεν βοῇ: Od. 22. 77, βοὴ δ᾽ ὤκιστα γένοιτο,

τούσδ᾽ ἀνὰ χώρους This resumption of ἔνθα, which in 1054 summed up 11. 1047-1053, prepares the way for the fresh alternative, ἤ που, κ.τ.λ.

Or perhaps the scene of the contest is more distant. Or haply, leaving the pastures of Oea' (a deme of the Oenean tribe) they draw near the region that lies westward of the snowy rock.' τόν] Sc. χῶρον,

πελῶσ' γρ. πελάζουσι C2. mg. ῥίμφαρμαρτοσ C². ῥίμφαρμάτας.. ἁμίλλας Β. AR. Θησειδᾶν] θησιδᾶν L.

ρια .. ἄμβασισ. 1070. τὸν L. τὰν CA.

νιφάδος i. e. Where the snow lies longest. Schol. λέγων τὴν οὕτω λεγομένην λείαν πέτραν. The place meant is probably the precipitous western end of Parnes, overhanging the pass of Phyle, and clearly visible from Athens.

πελῶσι They will be drawing near. For πελάζω with the accusative in this sense, cp. Phil. 1163, πέλασσον.. πελάταν: Eur. Andr. 1167, Δελφίδος ἐκ γῆς δῶμα πελάζει.

πώλοισιν ἁμίλλαις With their horses, or in the nimbly-racing chariots in which they flee. πώλοισιν refers to the pursuers, ῥιμφαρμάτοις φεύγοντες ἁμίλλαις to the pursued, who are supposed to have provided chariots for the capture of the maidens.

ἁλώσεται.. ἀκμά ‘He' (the enemy, just referred to in φεύγοντες) will be overpowered. Terrible is the valour of our neighbours: terrible also is the youthful might of Theseus men.' For the singular number of ἁλώσεται, cp. Ant. 106, τὸν.. φῶτα βάντα πανσαγίᾳ : and for its absolute use, cp. Aj. 648-649, ἀλλ᾽ ἁλίσκεται | χὼ δεινὸς ὅρκος, κ.τ.λ.

προσχώρων, cp. supra 493.

Θησειδᾶν The patronymic is used by an anachronism for the youth of Athens, with an allusion to the leadership of Theseus. Cp. Hdt. 1. 125, βασιλέες οἱ Περσείδαι. Of those who were assembled at the sacrifice of Theseus, some would be attendants of Theseus, but others would be gathered from the vicinity of the altar.

πᾶς γὰρ .. ἄμβασις Although the emendation of these lines is uncertain, their general meaning is clearly a reminiscence of the command of Theseus to the horsemen in 899, 900, σπεύδειν ἀπὸ ῥυτῆρος, just as the description of the two passes is suggested by his words in 900-901, ἔνθα δίστομοι . . ὁδοί. Herm. (1841) conj. πᾶσα δ᾽ ὁρμᾶται χαλῶσ᾽ | ἀμπυκτήρια πωλικά : reading ὀρειβάταν in the strophe, and rejecting φάλαρα as a gloss. Bothe reads, κατά | ἀμπυκτήρια. Cp. Aj. 42,5, Tr. 510 (?). The rhythm lucul is not impossible (for the resolved trochee, cp. Phoen. 227, 237); but the change of rhythm from l. 10 of the strophe (1054) cannot be justified by such examples as Phil. 1124-1147. When all the difficulties are looked at together, it seems most probable that there is some corruption here or in l. 1054, if not in both. Qy. ἔνθ' οἴομαι ἐγρεκύδοιμον - (κατὰ) λάμπρ᾿ ἀμπυκτήρια πώλων, (-)? The words as they stand may be construed, The riders all are rushing on, in the direction of,' (κατά, cp. κατ' οὗρον, κατὰ πόδα) the bridles of the horses; i.e. Every horseman gives his steed its head.

κατά may or may not be genuine, but Hermann's conjecture χαλῶσ᾽ ἀμπυκτήρια is somewhat prosaic.

ἄμβασις, abstract collective for ἀναβάται, ἱ. ε. ἱππόται. Cp. the common prose expression ἡ ἵππος. Essay on Language § 50. p. 94. For Ἀθήνη ἱππία and her temple in the Academy, see Paus. 1. 30.

Ῥέας One syllable, as in Il. 15.187, οὓς τέκετο 'Ρέα (where Poseidon speaks).

* ἔρδουσ᾽, ἢ μέλλουσιν; ὡς] Herm. corrected the antistrophe to ὦ Ζεῦ θεῶν πανταρχέτα. But the slow movement レレトート ​_ is characteristic. See note on the metre.

ὡς προμνᾶταί τί μοι | γνώμα] How my thoughts are pleading!' προμνᾶσθαι is generally to plead for another: and the chorus (infr. 1096) say this in the interest of Oedipus. But προperhaps conveys the association of beforehand, anticipating the event. The thought of the chorus is like a messenger, who goes before to urge the claim of a sovereign. τὶ is cognate accusative. Cp. supr. 965, Tr. 67, μύθοις εἴ τι πιστεύειν χρεών.

τάχ᾿ ἀνδώσειν That they will quickly restore. Although Pind. Fr. Thr. 4, Φερσεφόνα .. ἐς τὸν ὕπερθεν ἅλιον . . ἀνδιδοῖ ψυχὰν πάλιν, is not a conclusive instance of this use of ἀναδίδωμι, the existence of such a meaning is not improbable (cp. ἀνακομίζειν, ἀνακτᾶσθαι, ἀναλαμβάνειν, and esp. ἀναπέμπειν in Pind. Ι. 6 (7), 10, Ἄδραστον ἐξ ἀλαλᾶς ἄμπεμψας ὀρφανὸν μυρίων ἑτάρων ἐς Ἄργος ἵππιον), and exactly suits this place. The subject, as in ἁλώσεται, supra 1065, is easily supplied. If ἐνδώσειν is read, the words must be construed in the same way: That they will soon surrender, etc. τάχ᾽ ἂν δώσειν is indefensible, and ἐνδώσειν τᾶν . . τλασᾶν . . εὑρουσᾶν . . πάθη. That Creon will yield from the maidens,' or That the sufferings of the enduring ones much wronged by their kindred will abate, is forced, and gives a poor sense.

τὰν .. τλᾶσαν i. e. Antigone, whom the chorus had actually seen carried off. She is the heroine of this play as well as of the Antigone.

δεινὰ τλᾶσαν, supra 345-351. Eur. I. A. 932, σὲ δ', ὦ σχέτλια παθοῦσα πρὸς τῶν φιλτάτων: ib. 942, ἡ δεινὰ τλᾶσα κοὐκ ἀνεκτὰ παρθένος. Linw. reads τὼ δεινὰ τλάσα, δεινὰ δ' εὑρούσα, suggested by Dindorf in 1842.

δεινὰ δ᾽.. πάθη Because Creon, who was her kinsman, had carried her off by the order of Eteocles.

τελεῖ Future.

τι Α thing;' ie. The thing we desire. Essay on Language § 22. p. 36.

(1) 'Í am a prophet on the side of the good contest.' i. e. My prophetic power takes part with the good cause. Cp. Ο. Τ. 879, τὸ καλῶς ἔχον πάλαισμα. Or (2) I prophesy a good issue of the contest. Cp. Εl. 1499, μάντις εἰμὶ τῶνδ᾽ ἄκρος. And for ἐσθλῶν, ib. 646, εἰ μὲν πέφηνεν ἐσθλά,

(1) Would that as a stormswift dove of strong pinion I might from a lofty cloud light on this conflict, voyaging thither with mine eye. αἰθερίας νεφέλας is ablative genitive. From the cloud as from a watch. tower, οἷον ἀπὸ σκοπιᾶς.

κύρσαιμι Lit. Might find;' i. e. Might descry. Or, (2) Might reach a lofty cloud and become spectator of this conflict,' etc.

θεωρήσασα τοὐμὸν ὄμμα Lit. Having gone as a spectator with mine eye. θεωρεῖν as in θεωρεῖν εἰς Ὀλύμπια and the like expressions. See esp. Plat. Legg. 12. 951. The construction of τοὐμὸν ὄμμα is difficult, but not more so than Tr. 914, κἀγὼ λαθραῖον ὄμμ᾽ ἐπεσκιασμένη φρούρουν, or Phil. 151, φρουρεῖν ὄμμ᾽ ἐπὶ σῷ μάλιστα καιρῷ. Such expressions as οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι ἐθεώρουν (i.e. sent θεωροὶ) ἐς τὰ Ἴσθμια are not sufficient to establish a transitive use of θεωρεῖν. In Plat. Legg. 12. 951 C, ἂν κακῶς αὐτὴν θεωρῶσιν, αὐτὴν (sc. τὴν θεωρίαν) is cognate accusative. The peculiar attraction, or metaphor, by which θεωρήσασα agrees in gender with πελειάς, is in keeping with the lyrical wildness of the whole ode. ὄμμα is probably an accusative of limitation, restricting the imaginary voyage of discovery to the sense of sight; i. e. If I were there but in vision. Cp. Tennyson's In Memoriam, 12, As a dove when up she springs... Like her I go, I cannot stay; | I leave this mortal ark behind, | A weight of nerves without a mind, | And leave the cliffs, and haste away, And reach the glow of southern skies, And see the sails at distance rise. | and back return | To where the body sits, and learn, | That I have been an hour away.

δαμούχοις Protectors of the people;' i. e. Theseus. Plural for singular. Cp. supra 884, ἰὼ γᾶς πρόμοι, and note: infra 1348, τῆσδε δημοῦχος χθονὸς .. Θησεύς.

σθένει . . λόχον Το make triumphant their ambush by successfully taking the fair prey.' ἐπινίκειος for ἐπινίκιος for the sake of the metre. The dative is to be taken closely, as instrumental, with τελειώσαι.

ἐπινικείῳ σθένει is a periphrasis for νίκῃ. τὸν εὔαγρον is slightly proleptic (Essay on Language § 38. p 70), and contains an allusion to Antigone as the fair occasion of the expedition. λόχος is properly an ambush, but is here generalised to mean a foray, or skirmishing expedition.

πυκνοστίκτων Many spotted. Cp. Phil. 183, στικτῶν ἢ λασίων μετὰ θηρῶν: Eur. Alc. 584, ποικιλόθριξ νεβρός.

ὀπαδόν Following in the chase; ' i. e. ὀπάζουσ ὀπάζουσαν αὐτούς. Cp. Il. 8.341, ὡς Ἕκτωρ ἄπαζε καρηκομοῶντας Ἀχαίους.

For the change to the third person, cp. O. Τ. 159-163, Ἀθάνα ..

Αρτεμιν καὶ Φοῖβον ἑκαβόλον ἰώ, τρισσοὶ ἀλεξίμοροι προφάνητέ μοι: and for στέργω, I long, Ο. Τ. 11, δείσαντες, ἢ στέρξαντες, Plat. Legg. 10. 907, τὰ δ' ἐναντία πως ἤθη στέρξαι. The intense lyrical condensation of this chorus assists the illusion by which the pursuit, and capture, and return, are crowded into a few minutes. Cp. Shakespeare, Henry V. Prologue to Act. 3, Thus with imagined wing our swift scene flies, In motion of no less celerity Than that of thought.

The coryphaeus announces in senarii a new incident following the choral ode in Soph. only here: in Aesch. S. c. T. 369 ff., Ag. 258 ff.

τῷ σκοπῷ Your watchman; referring to the image in 1074-1084. 1097-1098. τὰς κόρας . . προσπολουμέvas] For here I see the maidens, brought near once more hitherward by an attendant band. προσπολουμέναs is well explained by Herm. Hoc dicit chorus, 1105. Om. L. add. C². mg. se virgines cernere illaesas observanterque curatas ab iis, qui eas raptoribus ereptas huc adducunt. Cp. infr. 1103, φιλτάτων τ᾽ ὀπαόνων.

τίς ἂν θεῶν i. e. πῶς ἄν τις θεῶν; Cp. Αj. 879, τίς ἂν δῆτά μοι ..

ἀπύοι ; ἰδεῖν] The momentary tense is expressive. But once to see.

βαστάσαι ‘Το hold in my embrace.' Cp. Aesch. Prom. 1019, πετραία δ᾽ ἀγκάλη σε βαστάσει. This and other expressions, meaning to 'hold in the hand, come to be used more generally for to touch, handle, embrace. Cp. El. 1226 (Electra to Orestes), ἔχω σε χερσίν ; For the passive form of expression, i. e. τὸ μηδαμὰ ἐλπισθὲν ἤξειν for ὁ μηδαμὰ ἤλπισα ἥξειν, see Essay on La § 31. р. 54.

You ask what you shall obtain, for desire accompanies the gift.' Essay on Language § 42. p. 80. Cp. Eur. H. F. 1408-1409, Ηρ. ποθῶ, πατρός τε στέρνα προσθέσθαι θέλω. Αμ. ἴδου τάδ', ὦ παῖ τἀμὰ γὰρ σπεύδεις φίλα.

τῷ τεκόντι πᾶν φίλον To the parent nothing is not dear; i. e. Even the children of such a marriage. So Hermann following Reisig. But perhaps this is merely a γνώμη, like 508-509, τοῖς τεκοῦσι γὰρ | οὐδ᾽ εἰ πονῇ τις δεῖ πόνου μνήμην ἔχειν.

οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἂν.. εἴην Nor should I be all unhappy were I now to die. θανών, i. e. εἰ θάνοιμι.

ἐρείσατε, sc. μοι, suggested by τῷ φύσαντι following. The ἀμφιδέξιον is supplementary predicate, almost = ἀμφωτέροθι : (ὥστε μοι ἀμφιδέξιον γίγνεσθαι, Herm.). latter part of the compound is partly lost, but serves to suggest the notion of firmness in supporting.

The variety of reading is most easily accounted for by supposing an earlier reading ἐμφύντε (which Mudge conjectured). The singular ἐμφῦσα is inadmissible, and if ἐμφῦτε is read, the asyndeton, which is too abrupt for this place, has also the effect of separating the dative, τῷ φύσαντι, from ἐρείσατ', which seems to require a dative. Press your sides close to mine, supporting me on either hand, engrafted on your father. This seems better than Support both my sides, although ἐρείδω admits of TE either construction. For the παρονομασία, or verbal play, see Essay on Language § 44. P. 75- κἀναπαύσετον] And ye shall give me rest in my hapless wandering, which was lonely till ye appeared: i.e. And ye will relieve the loneliness of my unhappy wandering life. Cp. supra 500-502, μόνον δέ με | μὴ λείπετ· οὐ γὰρ ἂν σθένοι τοὐμὸν δέμας | ἔρημον ἕρπειν οὐδ᾽ ὑφηγητοῦ γ᾽ ἄνεν. The reading of Β Vat., κἀναπαύσατον, has been adopted by many editors.

τοῦδε δυστήνου πλάνου The effect of the pronoun is pathetic, and the repetition of the article in the other reading, τοῦ τε, has no sufficient reason. Oedipus is thinking generally of his condition, which, when his daughters were carried off, seemed as forlorn as it had been before Antigone came from Thebes to be his guide.

ὡς βράχιστα ‘As briefly as ye may. It may be doubted whether βράχιστα agrees with τὰ πρ. as supplementary predicate ('make the matter brief in telling it'), or is to be taken as a cognate or adverbial accusative after εἴπατε. The latter is more probable.

Cp. Phil. 1304, ἀλλ᾽ οὔτ᾽ ἐμοὶ τοῦτ᾽ ἐστὶν οὔτε σοὶ καλόν. She means that while she will be spared the recital, the tale as told by Theseus will not be tedious to her father. Cp. infr. ll. 1143-1144.

O sir, think it not strange that I prolong my speech unduly to my children, who have appeared beyond my hopes. Some join πρὸς τὸ λιπαρές with θαύμαζε (cp. Tr. 1211, εἰ φοβεῖ πρὸς τοῦτο: Thuc. 2. 22, πρὸς τὸ παρὸν χαλεπαίνοντας). But the expression, τὸ λιπαρές = τὸ ἐμὸν λιπαρὲς τοῦ λόγου, even with the epexegesis following, seems too abrupt for Sophocles. Badham's conjecture, πρὸς τόδ', εἰ πάρος | τέκν᾽ ἐκφανέντ᾽ ἄελπτα (cp. the reading of Par. A. and infra 1141), besides changing poetry to prose, leaves πάρος without a correlative.

πρός expresses result, as in πρὸς ἡδονήν. Cp. esp. Thuc. 2. 53, ταχείας τὰς ἐπαυρέσεις καὶ πρὸς τὸ τερπνὸν ἠξίουν ποιεῖσθαι : Eur. Οr. 606, γυναῖκες ἐμποδὼν ταῖς ξυμφοραῖς | ἔφυσαν ἀνδρῶν πρὸς τὸ δυστυχέστερον.

λιπαρές 'Persistent; here used with an association of blame.

For the construction of τέκνα (with μηκύνω λόγον), see Essay on Language § 16. p. 22, and cp. esp. O. T. 31, 32, σε ἑζόμεσθ' ἐφέστιοι. ..

γάρ explains μὴ θαύμαζε, Wonder not (as if I were ungrateful). I have a clear sense of my obligation to you.

την is Musgrave's conjecture for σήν, which Elmsley and others have defended. But σήν has probably been invented to supply the omission of ἢ παρὰ σοῦ after ἄλλου μηδενός, for which see Essay on Language § 39. p. 73, 6. Cp. infra 1250, ἀνδρῶν γε μοῦνος, and note. σήν, which must have a strong emphasis, would be awkwardly placed, and, as Hermann remarks, l. 1123, would be superfluous. For τήνδε τὴν τέρψιν, cp. Ο. Τ. 1477, τὴν παροῦσαν τέρψιν ἤ σ' εἶχεν πάλαι.

ὡς ἐγὼ θέλω According to my wish. Cp. Hom. H. Cer. 137, δοῖεν κουριδίους ἄνδρας καὶ τέκνα τεκέσθαι, | ὡς ἐθέλουσι τοκῆες: Eur. Hel. 1405, θεοὶ σοὶ . . δοῖεν οἷ᾽ ἐγὼ θέλω.

αὐτῷ τε καὶ γῇ τῇδε Theseus' interests are throughout identified with those of Athens. Cp. supr. 308-309, εὐτυχὴς .. τῇ . . αὑτοῦ πόλει. . τίς γὰρ ἐσθλὸς οὐχ αὑτῷ φίλος; 1130 ff. The action which no doubt accompanied these lines would make them clearer to the spectator than they are to the reader. Oedipus reaches forth his hand towards Theseus, then draws it back, and on becoming aware that Theseus is bending towards him, repels him gently with a movement of his hand.

ψαύσω Sc. σου.

εἰ θέμις This expression occurs frequently in tragedy, ἢ θέμις rarely or never. Cp. esp. Phil. 661, εἴ μοι θέμις, θέλοιμ᾽ ἄν. It has been objected that καίτοι makes too strong an opposition, after such an expression of doubt. But the hesitation expressed in εἰ θέμις is only the courtesy of a stranger addressing a sovereign, whereas the following clause expresses the revulsion of feeling caused by the recollection of his misfortunes.

πῶς *σ᾽ ἂν .. ξύνοικος (1) Unhappy that I am, how should I desire thee to give thy hand to one, in whom what brand of evil is not found? Or, possibly. (2) reading πῶς δ᾽ ἄν, κ.τ.λ. as in the MSS, And how should I think of touching one who is a man, I, the ill-starred wretch, who bear in me the stain of every ill? Hermann's correction, τίς for τις, is borne out by ξύνοικος, which would be too emphatic if the meaning were a man, who has no stain upon him, as well as by the order of words in which the inversion τις οὐκ would have no point. Essay on Language § 41. p 78 yb: cp. supr. 702. Herm. also changed δ' τo σ', and in this he has been generally followed. But the words as they stand in the MSS. are not altogether impossible. The previous context, and the natural pause after ἀνδρός, may justify the reference of to the subject of θελήσαιμι. In this case ἀνδρός, although implying Theseus, is quite general: cp. О. Т. 1375-1379, ἀλλ᾽ ἡ τέκνων δῆτ᾿ ὄψις ἦν ἐφίμέρος · οὐ δῆτα οὐδ᾽ ἄστυ γ' οὐδὲ πύργος, οὐδὲ δαιμόνων ἀγάλμαθ᾽ ἱρά. δ', making a fresh beginning after τί φωνῶ, seems not unnatural, but is as likely to have been wrongly inserted as to be a corruption of σ'. Cp. supr. 52.

οὐκ ἔγωγέ σε Sc. θελήσω θιγεῖν μου, or some more general verb, expressing the whole action, e. g. ταῦτα ποιήσω.

No, nor shalt thou. ἐάσω] Sc. σὲ ψαῦσαι ἐμοῦ. For this ellipse, cp. El. 632, ἐῶ, κελεύω, θύε: supr. 407, ἀλλ᾿ οὐκ ἐᾷ τοῦμφυλον αἷμά σ᾽, ὦ πάτερ. Essay on Language § 59. p. 73, 6. The word μόνοις in the following line implies the antithesis ἀλλ᾽ οὐχὶ σοί. The words in О. Т. 1414-1415, imply the same feeling, although in a different connexion : τἀμὰ γὰρ κακὰ | οὐδεὶς οἷός τε πλὴν ἐμοῦ φέρειν βροτῶν: cp ib. 1430-1431, τοῖς ἐν γένει γὰρ τἀγγενῆ μάλισθ' ὁρᾶν | μόνοις τ᾿ ἀκούειν εὐσεβῶς ἔχει κακά. In infr. 1632, where Oedipus bids Theseus to give the maidens the pledge of his right hand, he does not himself take the hand of Theseus. Cp. Hom. Od. 19. 346-348, where Ulysses refuses the services of the handmaids of Penelope, εἰ μή τις γρῆνς ἔστι παλαιή, κεδνὰ ἰδυῖα, | ἥτις δὴ τέτληκε τόσα φρεσὶν ὅσσα τ᾽ ἐγώ περ | τῇ δ᾽ οὐκ ἂν φθονέοιμι ποδῶν ἅψασθαι ἐμεῖο. The feeling of Fr. 814. ὃς μὴ πέπονθε τἀμά, μὴ βουλευέτω is slightly different, resembling that of Leonato in Shak., Much Ado, 5. 1, Nor let no comforter delight mine ear | But such an one whose wrongs do suit with mine.

σὺ δ᾽ αὐτόθεν μοι χαῖρε · But do thou receive my salutation from where thou standest,' without coming nearer.

ἐς τόδ᾽ ἡμέρας Hitherto : ἡμέρα used abstractedly for time, as in Aj. 131, 622. 1139 ff. This refers to 11. 1119 ff.

μήκος . . ἔθου Essay on Language § 40. p. 75. The slight formality of this expression and of θαυμάσας ἔχω belongs to the dignified courtesy of Theseus manner. It has not moved my wonder, that in the delight of having your children here you have been led to prolong your talk with them. For this use of τίθεσθαι, cp. Ο. Τ. 134, ἐπαξίως γὰρ Φοῖβος, ἀξίως δὲ σὺ | πρὸ τοῦ θανόντος τήνδ᾽ ἔθεσθ᾽ ἐπιστροφήν : Ant. 151, θέσθε λησμοσύναν.

Nor that in choosing to converse with them you thought not first of me.' The genitive to be supplied with τοὐμοῦ is not ἔπους, but something more general, e. g. μέρους. Elms. reads οὔτ᾽, perhaps rightly. τῶνδε is objective genitive, or rather expresses a reciprocal relation.

γάρ, as in 1121, refers to the general meaning of the preceding sentence. There is no need of an apology, for that gives me no offence.

ὧν The genitive is gen. of respect after ἐψευσάμην, and also partitive after οὐδέν.

ὤμοσ' Supr. 1039-1040.

ἀκραιφνεῖς τῶν κατηπειλημένων Untouched by the harm that VOL. I. CC was threatened them.' 1140 1145 1148. This is not the place for an episode like the description of the Isthmian races in El. 680, foll., or the history of Oedipus in O. T. 777. foll. The end is near, and the interview with Polynices is yet to come. The necessary omission is accounted for by the tender age of Antigone (1116-1118), and the magnanimity of Theseus, who prefers doing to speaking of his deeds. Cp. El. 1364 ff., τοὺς γὰρ ἐν μέσῳ λόγους, κ.τ.λ., Shak. Coriolanus, 1. 9, Pray now, no more: my mother, | Who has a charter to extol her blood, | When she does praise me, grieves me..... I have some wounds upon me, and they smart | To hear themselves remembered. an

ἅ γ' εἴσει.. ξυνών Since you will learn this without my telling you in conversation with your children here.Illud quaeri potest, verba τί δεῖ μάτην κομπεῖν utrum cum sequentibus construenda sint, quo facto quasi quaedam aposiopesis erit post ᾑρέθη, sint precedentibus jungenda, quo illa ἅ γ' εἴσει, explicationis causa adjecta esse censendum: an denique cum utrisque sint nexa: quod ego quidem nescio an praeferendum sit, quia saepe ita media inter duas protases est apodosis: de qua figura saepius alibi monitum.' Hermann. ye shows that the words are added in explanation. For αὐτός, cp. infra 1155, ὡς μὴ εἰδότ', αὐτόν, κ.τ.λ.

But impart to us your counsel on a matter that has just now fallen in my way as I was coming hither. The construction of the antecedent λόγος is left undetermined, and this imperfect or pendent construction is smoothed over by the attraction, for which see Essay on Language § 35. P. 59, and cp. Eur. Or. 591 ff. Ἀπόλλων ὃς στόμα νέμει σαφέστατον, τούτῳ ..

πιθόμενος τὴν τεκοῦσαν ἔκτανον.

συμβαλοῦ γνώμην In Hdt. 8.61, πόλιν γὰρ τὸν Θεμιστοκλέα παρεχόμενον, οὕτω ἐκέλευε γνώμας συμβάλλεσθαι, and Plat. Polit. 298 C, γνώμην συμβαλέσθαι, the phrase means to take part in conference. So Theseus may be supposed courteously to ask Oedipus for his opinion, although he might use authority. See below, 11. 1178, 1348. Otherwise (2), συμβαλοῦ γνώμην, sc. τῷ λόγῳ, may mean,' Bring your thought to bear on this matter, i. e. consider it. Cp. the Epic σὺ δ᾽ ἐνὶ φρεσὶ βάλλει σῇσιν. This is more consistent with the position of Oedipus, of which, however, Theseus is not yet thoroughly informed.

It is a small thing to tell of, and yet singular.' 1153. The Scholiast, who interprets ἄνθρωπον δέ φησιν ὄντα οὐδὲν πρᾶγμα κακίζειν δεῖ, must have read as in the text. πρᾶγος is too general a word to stand alone, as it must if we read οὐδέν᾿ ἀνθρώπων. For ἄνθρωπον, cp. Ο. Τ. 977, τί δ᾽ ἂν φοβοῖτ᾽ ἄνθρωπος, ᾧ τὰ τῆς τύχης | κρατεῖ, πρόνοια δ᾽ ἐστὶν οὐδενὸς σαφής; Man, who is the creature of circumstance, may not neglect anything that occurs.

σοὶ μὲν ἔμπολιν οὐκ ὄντα, συγγενή δέ This must have been gathered from the terms of his supplication, or from his answer to those who questioned him.

προσπεσόντα πως Who had somehow suddenly come thither. Polynices had come when the altar was deserted for the pursuit, and while there was an ἡσυχίη τῶν ἀνθρώπων (Hdt. 1.45) about the sacrifices. Hence the indefinite adverb, marking that his coming was unobserved. Cp. Tr. 695, τὸ γὰρ κάταγμα τυγχάνω ῥίψασά πως. He was found there by the people returning thither, who brought word to Theseus when on his way to Colonus with the maidens (στείχοντι δεῦρο, 1151).

The use of παρά with the relative assists the locative use of the dative in the antecedent; ie. παρὰ τῷ βωμῷ, παρ' α...

ἔκυρον The form κύρω (cp. supr. 1082) is adopted by the Tragedians from Epic poetry.

ἡνίχ᾽ ὡρμώμην ἐγώ 'When I set forth, i. e. When I left the altar on the occasion which led to the pursuit. (Supr. 888, 897, 1019.) Elmsley, Hermann, and Schneidw. refer ἡνίχ᾽ ὡρμώμην τo προσπεσόντα, and transl. 'dum aberam ego. But ἡνίκα is not equi- valent to ἐν ᾧ. And such a departure from the obvious meaning is not justified by a trifling inconsistency, which is after all a verbal one, for although Theseus did not go direct from the altar to the pursuit, yet the swift action of 886-1041 is part of a continuous movement which began when he was called away from the sacrifice. There is therefore no reason for detaching the clause from the nearer antecedent.

ἐγώ belongs in meaning to ἔκυρον as well as to ὡρμώμην.

τί προσχρήζοντα τῷ θακήματι;] What does he want by sitting there? i. e. What is the meaning of his supplication? The dative is used πρὸς τὸ σημαινόμενον, as if προσχρήζοντα had been αἰτοῦντα.

οὐκ ὄγκου πλέων No great matter, i. e. Not likely to give trouble. Cp. infra 1341, βραχεῖ εὺν ὄγκῳ καὶ χρόνῳ.

οὐ γὰρ .. λόγου ‘For the manner of his supplication imports no trifling matter.'

(1) His sole request. they say, is to be allowed to have conference with thee, and to be allowed to return, without receiving harm through his coming hither.' ὁδοῦ is a genitive of respect after the privative adverb. Cp. infra 1399, foll. Vauvillers' conjecture, μόνον, founded on Musgrave's μόνον τ', is justified both by the awkward pleonasm in ἐλθεῖν μολόντα, to come and be admitted, and by the synaphea, which cannot be defended by such examples as O. Τ. 332-333, τί ταῦτ᾽ ἄλλως ἐλέγχεις; where the running on is assisted by the pause immediately preceding. This is true even of Ar. Av. 1716-1717, θυμιαμάτων δ᾽ | αὖραι, κ.τ.λ., where the licence is caricatured. Schndw. joins μολύντ᾽ αἰτεῖν, “ He is come and asks, but the participle is then still more inopportune.

τίς δῆτ᾽ ἂν εἴη Who can it be? Until he hears of Argos, Oedipus is left to mere conjecture.

ὑμίν τοῖς Λαβδακίδαις.

ἐγγενής i. e. ἐν γένει ὤν. Cp. О. Т. 941.

ἀκούων τῶνδ' When I hear this, i.e. Your last speech, in which you mention Argos. For τῶνδε, where τούτων would be more exact, see Essay on Language § 22. p. 34, and cp. Phil. 628, οὔκουν τάδ', ὦ παῖ, δεινά; The reference to Ismene's information in 378, foll., which Reisig and Hermann supposed, would be too obscure.

ὁ προστάτης The suppliant. The word occurs in this sense only here and in 1278. But cp. El. 1378, λιπαρεῖ προὔστην χερί. CC2

For the optative, see Essay on Language § 36. p. 62, and cp. Thuc. 3. 84.

ἐστίν is equivalent to ἂν εἴη supra. Cp. Eur. Med. 599, μηδ' ὄλβος, ὅστις τὴν ἐμὴν κνίζοι φρένα.

My son, O king, hated by me to whom of all the world I should most detest to listen. For the inexact use of the genitive ἀνδρῶν after the superlative, see Essay on Language § 9. p. 14. and cp. supra 105, μόχθοις λατρείων τοῖς ὑπερτάτοις βροτῶν. 1177,8. The sound of that voice has come to be abhorrent to his father's ear, and, I beseech thee, do not compel me to yield in this.' φθέγμα, see Essay on Language $ 50. p. 94, and cp. El. 1225, ὦ φθέγμ᾽, ἀφίκου; And for the meaning of ἥκει, see Essay on Language p. 97.

But what if his suppliant posture necessarily compels you? Consider :-whether you do not owe a reverence to the God. εἰ is to be taken in the sense of whether, or what if. σκόπει is a double construction, with εἰ, κ.τ.λ., and μή, κ.τ.λ., the second clause being added in ex. planation of the first. The emphatic ἐξαναγκάζει refers to ἀνάγκῃ προσβάλῃς in 1178. Several editors have preferred μή μοι. But although it is suitable for Antigone in 1183 to speak of Theseus' religious scruples, it is more consistent with the tone of Theseus himself to give this friendly warning to Oedipus.

ἐξαναγκάζει i. e. Is thoroughly sufficient to compel you, without any constraint from me.

νέα Essay on Language §. 23. p. 38. For the meaning, cp. Aesch. Suppl. 361, σὺ δὲ παρ᾽ ὀψιγόνου μάθε γεραιόφρων.

τὸν ἄνδρα.. τόνδε If these words referred to Polynices, as Hermann thought, Antigone would show less tact in addressing her father than in supplicating the Elders (supra 237). Theseus has indicated a strong wish, as Oedipus Oe perceives (1178, 1350), that Polynices should be allowed to come, and also has expressed a fear that to repulse him would be to dishonour the God. Antigone appeals to her father's respect and gratitude towards Theseus, and to his affection for his daughters, as the motives most likely to influence him.

The antecedent to a is a second accusative after παρασπάσει, SC.

ταῦτα τῶν λεγομένων. Fear not. He will not wrest thy judgment to such words of his as are against thy purposes.

συμφέροντα] Not = profitable, but in the more literal sense of agreeable to, conspiring with. Essay on Language p. 96.

τά τοι καλῶς, κ.τ.λ. καλῶς is the MS. reading, and κακῶς, the emendation of Hermann, is not specially in point. His explanation is unsatisfactory. Antigona, ut confirmet, quod dixit, oratione audienda nihil damni accipi, rationem reddit hanc, quod male facta dicendo dissimulari nequeant, sed ipsa oratio proditrix esse mali consilii soleat. The words have no direct application to Polynices, but are a rhetorical generality, like some others in this play. Cp. Thuc. 2. 40, οὐ τοὺς λόγους τοῖς ἔργοις βλάβην ἡγούμενοι, ἀλλὰ μὴ προδιδαχθῆναι μᾶλλον λόγῳ πρότερον ἢ ἐπὶ ἃ δεῖ ἔργῳ ἐλθεῖν. For ἔργον, signifying a project not yet put in action, cp. Τr. 1157, σὺ δ᾽ οὖν ἄκουε τούργον : Αj. 466, οὐκ ἔστι τοὔργον τλητόν.

This seems to be the better of two ways of emending this line. Essay on Language § 41. p. 77. Others read κακίστων δυσσεβέστατ', ὦ πάτερ.

θέμις is indeclinable here. See L. and S. s. v.

ἀλλ᾿ αὐτόν- The conjecture of the Ist London edition, ἀλλ᾽ ἔασον, has been accepted with various modifications s by by subsequent sub critics. The text is eloquently defended by Mr. Palmer, who observes: 'I think it not quite impossible to understand the brief expression, backed up as it is by the argument which follows, as the language of earnest entreaty, and that the verb is to be supplied by the mind. Antigone had fully presented her request at the commencement of her speech, so that what she then said may be considered as referred to in this short broken sentence, ἀλλ᾿ αὐτόν. Nay, but receive him graciously ... there are others who have had bad sons and fierce anger, and as they have been charmed into gentleness by the soothing persuasion of their friends, so be you. If ἀλλ' αὐτόν were uttered in a tone of earnest entreaty, and the speaker abruptly added what follows, I can conceive that it would be very intelligible, and if so, the touching effect of the entreaty would be heightened by the very fact that the sentence was unfinished. Antigone leaves her father to imagine all she meant to say, and supplies what is wanting in words by the earnestness of her manner and beseeching tone of voice.' There is force in these remarks, though the quotation of parallel examples would be more to the purpose. The MSS. are practically unanimous; but the aposiopesis is all but unique. Cp. however Aesch. Cho. 749 ff., where Schütz and other editors suppose a lacuna. And in this play there are several places where the original construction of a sentence is not carried out. Cp. esp. supr. 421 ff., 531 ff., infr. 1299 ff., 1370 ff., 1669. Comparisons between classical Greek and the New Testament are usually too remote to be of any use; but the language of affection has similarities in every age, and the ellipse in Philemon 12 is curiously parallel-σὺ δὲ αὐτόν (sc. προσλαβοῦ, which is added from the deferred apodosis in the Textus Receptus). The motive in both cases is the same, viz. a delicate tact, which shrinks from uttering the word of command or entreaty, and hastens to urge fresh topics of persuasion. The deferred apodosis is implied in line 1201, ἀλλ' ἡμῖν εἶκε. Cp. Aesch. Cho. 649 ff., where Dindorf supposes a lacuna, σε in Paris A (followed by R) is a gloss of some grammarian who understood the passage as it is explained in Canter's note: Insigne est hoc ἀναπόδοτον, ac singulare. Vult enim hoc dicere, ἀλλ αὐτὸν εἴκειν, καὶ νουθετούμενον ἐξεπάδεσθαι, etc.' For an equally difficult anacoluthon, see Thuc. 5. 22. Qy.

ἀλλ᾽ εἶξον (ΑΛΛΑΥΤΟΝ) ? 1193-

ἀλλὰ φύσιν But, on their receiving counsel, their nature is pacified by the counsels of friends, who charm away their passion.

μὴ τὰ νῦν (Sc. πήματα ἃ πάσχεις), i. e. Turn from the indignity which now enrages you to those former calamities which you suffered. not by your own fault, but by the fault of your father and mother. The correction μοι for μή is unnecessary, and gives a weak meaning to τανῦν. The note of the Scholiast, τὰ περὶ τὴν πήρωσιν λέγοι ἄν· οὐ γὰρ τὰ ἐξ ἀρχῆς πραχθέντα ὀνειδίζει αὐτῷ, ἀλλ᾽ ἃ ἀπὸ τῆς ἄγαν ὀργῆς ἀπέβη. τούτου γὰρ αὐτὸν ἀποτρέπειν βούλεται, is right in spirit, for Antigone is not reproaching her father. But, in gently approaching the subject, she alludes only in the most general way to the miseries which came from the rash impetuosity of Laius, Jocasta, and Oedipus, and, to avoid reproaching him, refers them all to their source in the actions of his parents. Cp. supr. 268, 595 ff. And for the meaning of θυμός, Ant. 493-494. φιλεῖ δ᾽ ὁ θυμὸς πρόσθεν ᾑρῆσθαι κλοπεὺς | τῶν μηδὲν ὀρθῶς ἐν σκότῳ τεχνωμένων.

For you have reasons enough to move you, when you think of your own sightless eyes, to which light returns not.' οὐχὶ βαιά] Hesych. Σοφοκλῆς δὲ Οἰδίποδι ἐν Κολωνῷ· οὐ βαιά, ἀντὶ τοῦ ἄφθονα καὶ πολλά. 1201-1202. λιπαρεῖν γὰρ οὐ καλὸν | δίκαια προσχρήζουσιν] (1) ‘It is not well that those whose request is just should make long supplication; i.e. They should be at once gratified. This involves a change of subject (Essay on Language p. 65), and requires that the acc.

προσχρήζοντας should have been attracted into the dat. in construction with καλών (ib. § 35 pp. 59, 60). Both difficulties may be avoided by taking λιπαρεῖν in the general sense of ' obstinate continuance,' as in Hdt. 1. 94, etc., and προσχρήζουσιν as = πρὸς προσχρήζοντας, or as if λιπαρεῖν were λιπαρή φαίνεσθαι: (2) It is not well to be obdurate to a just request. Cp. supr. 1119, τὸ λιπαρές. For this meaning, cp. Fr. 76, τοῖς γὰρ δικαίοις ἀντέχειν οὐ ῥάδιον. And for the dative, cp. O. T. 1373, οἷν ἐμοὶ δυοῖν, κ.τ.λ., and see Essay on Language § 12. p. 18. β 1. But the constant use of λιπαρεῖν in Attic, in the sense of ' to press with requests,' renders this interpretation improbable, and the former (1) is to be preferred. The use of οὐκ (rather than μή) in 1203 is accounted for by the attraction of the previous οὐ, and by reference to the actual circumstances. Essay on Language § 29. p. 49.

βαρεῖαν ἡδονὴν νικᾶτέ με You win me by your words to grant your request against my will. ἡδονή may either refer (1) to the pleasure which Oedipus gives to his daughters, cp. Αj. 114, ἐπειδὴ τέρψις ἥδε σοὶ τὸ δρᾶν: or (2) to the pleasure which he feels in hearing them; either being accompanied with pain to himself. For the accusative in (2) see Essay on Language § 17. p. 24, and cp. Tr. 960-961, χωρεῖν πρὸ δόμων λέγουσιν, ἄσπετόν τι θαῦμα. The oxymoron is more pointed in (2).

εἴπερ is emphatic, expressing some impatience at his forced consent. If he must come.

Let me never be delivered into the power of any man; i.e. By no means let me come into his power. For the periphrasis with ψυχή, cp. esp. Ant. 1069, Phil. 54, 5. And for μηδείς, see Essay on Language § 22. p. 36.

σῶς ἴσθ᾽ Sc. ὤν, Essay on Language § 39. p. 72, 1, c. Know thyself safe. The reading of L. may be due to a gloss to this effect, viz. σῶς/ὤν.

How foolish to desire long life, which but increases sorrow; while joys depart before the joyless hour of death. Far best for a man is never to be born; but after birth to go with all speed whence he came is next best by far. For when once thoughtless youth is come, [who escapes from grief?] what grief is not there? Blood, faction, strife, war, envy, and, last of ills, hateful, cold, helpless, friendless age, wherein all the greatest evils make their dwelling. So I have found, and so too this unfortunate is buffeted with a sea of troubles, some fresh calamity ever breaking over him, some borne on the sunset breeze, some at the rising of the sun, some coming through the noontide blaze, and some from the winds of night.

The iambic and trochaic metres which are here mingled with the glyconic and logaoedic, are lighter and more resolved than in the previous ode. Strophe and Antistrophe.

He whose desire of life keeps not the mean, but craves the larger share, will be convicted in my judgment of cherishing folly.' ζώειν must be closely connected with the genitives, and is rather to be explained as an accusative of respect than as epexegetic infinitive.

τοῦ μετρίου παρείς (1) Neglecting the moderate portion, a poetical construction for παρεὶς τὸ μέτριον. Cp. Plat. Legg. 3, 691 C, ἐάν τις μείζονα διδῷ τοῖς ἐλάττοσι δύναμιν παρεὶς τὸ μέτριον. The same construction occurs in Plat. Phaedr. 235 Ε, παρέντα τοῦ . . ἐγκωμιάζειν. Οι (2), supposing an ellipse of the inf., παρέντα τοῦ μετρίου χρήζειν, Omitting to desire the mean. Thuc 8.41, ἀφεὶς τὸ ἐς τὴν Χίον ἔπλει ἐς τὴν Καῦνον. The article, as elsewhere with words of number and measurement, opposing what is more to what is less. The expression d πλέον μέρος occurs in Cleobulus quoted by Suidas; ἀβουλία τὸ πλέον μέρος ἐν βροτοίσιν. Bergk, Poet. Lyr. Gr. Mel. xi.

φυλάσσων An Homeric expression. Il. 16. 30, χόλος ὃν σὺ φυλάσσεις.

ἐν ἐμοί i. e. So far as the decision rests with me. Cp. O. T. 677, ἐν δὲ τοῖσδ᾽ ἴσος: supr. 422-423, ἐν δ᾽ ἐμοὶ τέλος | αὐτοῖν γένοιτο, κ.τ.λ.

ἐπεὶ ἐγγυτέρω These words have been explained in two ways: (1) Since length of days brings many things (in life) nearer to grief. (Herm.) (2) Since length of days has in store much that is akin to sorrow.' (Elms.) A third way of taking κατέθεντο seems preferable. (3) Since length of days contributes much that is akin to sorrow; i.e. κατέθεντο is a subjective middle, like παρέχομαι. Not = Has laid up in store, which requires the perfect tense, but brings in,' sc. εἰς τὸν βίον. Cp Hesiod. Op. et D. 361. For the use of the adverb, cp. Ant. 933.4, θανάτου τοῦτ᾽ ἐγγυτάτω | τοῦπος ἀφῖκται, And see Essay on Language § 24. p. 40, 2.

οὐκ ἂν ἴδοις ὅπου Cp. Aj. 103, ἢ τοὐπίτρικτον κίναδος ἐξήρου μ' ὅπου; and esp. Aesch. Eum. 301, τὸ χαίρειν μὴ μαθόνθ᾽ ὅπου φρενῶν.

ὅταν . . θέλοντος (1) τὸ θέλον voluntatem significat... Genitivus vero non regitur a comparativo..sed ut τὸ πολὺ τοῦ θέλοντος, ita etiam τὸ πλέον dictum. Sensus est, si quis in id, quod in cupiendo nimium est, incidit: i. e. Si quis modum in cupiendo excedit. (Herm.) See Essay on Language § 30. p. 51. But the absence of joys comes not from desiring too much, but from having too much of life. Hence (2) it is better to explain τὸ θέλον, sc. τοῦ βίου, as that portion (of life) which is accompanied with desire to live. When one outlives the will to live. Musgr. conj.

σθένοντος. For εἰς.. πίπτειν in this connexion, cp. Eur. Ion, 700, πολιὸν ἐσπεσοῦσα γῆρας. It may be worth suggesting that, in Eur. L. Α. 657, τὸ θέλον should be read for τὸ θέλειν.

*ὁ δ᾽ ἐπίκουρος The correction turns simply on the substitution of o for ou and vice versa. The old spelling of either reading would be οδεπικορος. When ὁ 8' had been changed to οὐδ' the other change was natural, as we see from the Schol. The order is ὁ δὲ θάνατός (ἐστιν) ἐπίκουρος ἰσοτέλεστος ἐς τελεύταν, But death is an impartial ally to finish all at last. Cp. H. h. Merc. 97, ὀρφναίη δ᾽ ἐπίκουρος ἐπαύετο δαιμονίη νύξ. For the use of the article, see Essay on Language § 21. p. 33,5. A slighter change from the MS. reading, οὐδ᾽ ἐπίκουρος, which obtained in edd. before Brunck, may be explained to mean, and they find no helper, when death, etc., etc., comes. But the clauses are not well balanced, the metre is improbable, and a change, such as το τ' αὖ κατάμεμπτον is required in 1235. The reading οὐδ᾽ ἔπι κόρος is ingeniously adapted to ὅταν . . θέλοντος, in the sense, When one has fallen into an excess of wishing,' viz. and cannot have enough: but cannot be turned so as to give a satisfactory and consistent meaning to the whole sentence; besides which μηδέ and not οὐδέ would be required. And the reading of Hermann, adopted in the text, metrically corresponds to the antistrophe.

ἰσοτέλεστος seems to be a verbal with an active meaning. For instances of this. see Essay on Language p. 98. 1221-1222. Ἄϊδος ὅτε μοῖρα .. ἀναπέφηνε] 'When Hades hath his hour, attended not by marriage song, nor dance, nor lyre.' For ἀναφαίνεσθαι, of an unlooked for coming, cp. Aesch. Cho. 328, ἀναφαίνεται δ᾽ ὁ βλάπτων. Ἄΐδος μοῖρα, like θανάτου μοῖρα, Aesch. Pers. 917: Eur. Med. 987. "Αΐδος μοῖρα is either (1) the right of Hades in men, or (2) man's share of death, like μοῖρα βιότοιο. Death is imagined as lurking near until the appointed time.

ἄλυρος ἄχορος Cp. Aesch. Suppl.681, ἄχορον ἀκίθαριν δακρυογόνον Ἄρη.

τὸν ἅπαντα νικᾷ λόγον Stands first on the whole calculation; i. e. Is best of all. The construction is analogous to νικᾶν ἀγῶνα, μάχην, etc. Cp. Fr. 737, τἀληθὲς ἀεὶ πλεῖστον ἰσχύει λόγου. A similar expression of the early Ionic pessimism occurs in Theognis, 425, πάντων μὲν μὴ φῦναι ἐπιχθονίοισιν ἄριστον | μηδ᾽ ἐσιδεῖν αὐγὰς ὀξέος ἠελίου· | φῦντα δ᾽ ὅπως ἄκιστα πύλας Αίδαο περῆσαι. Cp. Hdt. 7. 46, ὁ μὲν θάνατος, μοχθηρῆς ἐούσης τῆς ζύης, καταφυγὴ αἱρετωτάτη τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ γέγονε. The words βῆναι κεῖθεν ὅθεν περ ἥκει come near to the language of Job 10. 19, I should have been as though I had not been; I should have been carried from the womb to the grave.

ἐπεὶ φανῇ] · When one hath seen the light. For the subjunctive without av, see Essay on Language § 27. p. 44; and for a similar omission of ἄν τις, cp. Ant. 1025, ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἁμάρτῃ.

βῆναι κεῖθεν ὅθεν περ ἥκει To go from whence he came. A curious attraction of the antecedent for κεῖσε ὅθεν περ. Essay on Language § 35. p. 60.

πολὺ δεύτερον Is next best by far. The phrase is paradoxically adapted from πολὺ πρῶτον. Essay on Language § 37. p. 69.

ὡς τάχιστα. These words assist the connection with what follows. As soon as possible; for, once let youth be there, etc.' See note on 1229.

ὡς εὐτ᾿ ἂν τὸ νέον παρῇ ..

φέρον Bonitz, deriving παρῇ from παρίημι, interprets, Since when one has passed youth with its light unconsciousness. And this is favoured at first sight by the analogy of such passages as Tr. 144-151, Aj. 552-559. But 1. The plural ἀφροσύνας, and the meaning of φέρον, are both harsh according to this φέρο interpretation. Hence Nauck conj. ἀφροσύνας γέμον. 2.The comparison of Fr. 713, ὕβρις .. ἐν νέοις ἀνθεῖ, and of Il. 3.108, αἰεὶ δ' ὁπλοτέρων ἀνδρῶν φρένες ἠερέθονται, support the more obvious meaning, When youth is present. 3. The connexion with ὡς τάχιστα, and the dark colouring of the whole ode, are in keeping with the most natural meaning of the words. For when once youth is there with her thoughtless follies... Greek tragedy is continually reminding us that men are plunged by mere thoughtlessness into the deepest calamities. The interpretation of l. 1231 is doubtful. It is clear, however, that if the words φόνοι, στάσεις, etc., are in any construction, the Scholiast is right in explaining τίς οὐ καμάτων ἔνι to mean οὐδείς ἐστι κάματος, ὃς οὐκ ἔνεστιν. For the genitive, cp. Τr. 146, πνευμάτων οὐδὲν κλονεῖ. On the other hand the subject of τίς πλάγχθη πολύμοχθος ἔξω is generally supposed to be τίς ἀνήρ. (1) What trouble-vexed mortal wanders out of the way (i. e, the broad way of trouble)?' i. e. Which of all the suffering race is exempt from suffering? The proleptic use of πολύμοχθος, although curious, is not by any means fatal to this interpretation (Essay on Language § 38. p. 70). But the inversion of the subject ('What man escapes? What trouble is not there?' when combined with the ellipse of ἀνήρ, is somewhat harsh. And πλάγχθη ἔξω is a strange expression for ἐξέφυγε. For πλάζεσθαι is generally, To miss a desired end; or to be driven out of an intended course. Who misses of being miserable? (τίς ἔξω τοῦ πολύμοχθος εἶναι ἐπλανήθη; 2nd Scholiast) is a paradoxical expression in which the paradoxical form has no force or meaning. And if the paradox had been intended it would have been more pointedly brought out. The interpretation of the 1st Scholiast is on the whole more probable: τοῦτο ἰδίως ἐξήνεγκεν, βούλεται δὲ τὸ τοιοῦτο σημαίνειν· τίς ἂν πλαγχθείη τῶν πολλῶν μόχθων; (2) Which of the many troubles will be turned aside?' i. e. anticipating the notion of καμάτων, τίς πολύμοχθος κάματος πλάγχθη ἔξω, τίς καμάτων οὐκ ἔνι; What troublous woe misses the life? What woe is not found therein? The retention of the same subject, and the antithesis of ἔξω and ἔνι, are in favour of this. The personification (cp. supra 536, μυρίων ἐπιστροφαὶ κακῶν) is in harmony with the catalogue which fol- ἐπιλέλογχε] ἐπιλέlows, and with ἐπιλέλογχε in l. 1236. Aesch. Prom. 275-276, ταὐτά τοι πλανωμένη | πρὸς ἄλλοτ᾽ ἄλλον πημονὴ προσιζάνει. Ant. 613-614, νόμος ὅδ᾽ οὐδὲν ἕρπων | θνατῶν βιότῳ πάμπολις ἐκτὸς ἄτας. The ellipse (of τοῦ βίου) after ἔξω is not more difficult than the similar ellipse after ἔνι. The collocation of πολύμοχθος κάματος is like πολύπλανοι πλάναι in Aesch. Prom. 585, and even the construction, πολύμοχθος καμάτων, if that is necessary, would be Homeric, like ἆ δειλὲ ξείνων, Od. 14. 361.

ἐπιλέλογχε πύματον Has allotted to him the last place of all.' πύματονis supplementary predicate agreeing with γῆρας, in the same construction as the adjective in πρῶτος λαχεῖν. ἐπι = Coming in after the rest. πύματος is an Epic word, stronger than ὕστατος.

κακὰ κακών Essay on Language § 40. p. 75, 4. For the thought, cp. Fr. 864, πάντ᾿ ἐμπέφυκε τῷ μακρῷ γήρᾳ κακά, νοῦς φροῦδος, ἔργ᾽ ἀχρεῖα, φροντίδες κεναί. And contrast that which should accompany old age, As honour, love, obedience, troops of friends, Macb. 5. 2. re-

πάντοθεν As Hermann marks, this word is to be referred to Oedipus rather than to the promontory to which he is compared.

κλονεῖται This, which is properly the apodosis, has been absorbed, as often happens in comparisons, into the relative clause, and the construction is therefore supplemented by the more explicit application of the simile in ὡς καὶ τόνδε, κ.τ.λ, Essay on Language § 35. p. 60.

ὡς καὶ τόνδε . . ξυνοῦσαι So he too is buffeted by fearful woes, that break like billows over his head, and never cease from him.

κατάκρας] Cp. Hom. Od. 5.313, ὡς ἄρα μιν εἰπόντ᾽ ἔλασεν μέγα κῦμα κατ᾿ ἄκρης. 1244, foll. The concluding lines are an expansion partly of πάντοθεν, partly of dei, the notions of space and time being confused. Cp. Hdt. 3. 114, Ἀποκλινομένης δὲ μεσαμβρίης, κ.τ.λ. where locality is signified in words expressing the time of day. Some from the region of the sunset, some with the break of day, some through the meridian brightness, some coming with the blasts of night.' The last expression has been variously interpreted. The Scholiast speaks of the Rhipaean mountains, which, he adds, were towards the west, and quotes a line of Alcman, ῥιπὰς ὄρος ἀνθέον ὕλᾳ, νυκτὸς μελαίνας στέρνον. The north rather than the west is the region of midnight. But it is not likely that after speaking so simply of morning, noon, and evening, the poet would have perplexed his reference to night with an obscure allusion to a remote locality. (2) Some modern interpreters compare Ε1. 106, παμφεγγεῖς ἄστρων ῥιπάς, and would render, From the twinkling fires of night, or, From the glimmerings of night.' Cp. τὰ νυκτερινὰ φέγγη in Plat. Rep. 6. 508 C. But this gives no distinct image, and the antithesis to ἀκτῖν' does not improve the sense. (3) Hermann with more probability says, De ventis, quos noctu maxime auribus percipimus, intelligenda vox ῥιπᾶν. Cp. Apollonius Rhodius, Apollonius l. 1015, οὐ μὲν ἰούσης | νυκτὸς ἔτι ῥιπὴ μένεν ἔμπεδον ἀλλὰ θύελλαι | ἀντίαι ἁρπάγδην ὀπίσω φέρον: Ib. 4. 1682,.. ἡ δ᾽ ὑπὸ νυκτὶ | ῥιπῇσιν μὲν πρῶτα τινάσσεται, ὕστερον αῦτε, κ.τ.λ. Perhaps with the image of the winds is associated some idea of ، impulse. The powers or influences of night.

*ἐννυχιᾶν The slight change recommended by Lachmann seems necessary in order to secure a probable rhythm. The substitution of the single for the double vor is one of the most frequent errors in L. And the Schol. says λέγει δὲ αὐτὰ ἐννύχια, κ.τ.λ. Cp. ll. 4-5 of the epode. The line does not make a harmonious ending here, and vυχιᾶν is improbable.

Here comes, as it would seem, the man from Argos, shedding copious tears:-and, father, it is indeed no other-. For ἡμῖν, cp. esp. supr. 81, and note. Here we have approaching to disturb us.' ἀνδρῶν γε μοῦνος] (1) Some appear to take this with λείβων δάκρυον, Weeping, unlike other men. Praeter morem virorum.' (Hermann.) But, besides the poverty of such a sense, the weeping of men is not uncommon in Greek poetry, or even in Greek history. Others (Schndw.) take μοῦνος = μονωθείς, Without companions, referring to the apprehension expressed in 1206-1207. This is rightly rejected by Dindorf. Antigone does not at once name Polynices, for fear of offending her father, but she cannot help ejaculating It is indeed no other; i. e. than Polynices, whom you supposed him to be (1. 1171). Cp. supra 321, μόνης τόδ᾽ ἐστὶ δῆλον Ἰσμήνης κάρα (' Ismene and no other'), 319, οὔκ ἐστιν ἄλλη: Τr. 261, μόνον βροτῶν : 355, μόνος θεῶν : Εl. 531, μοῦνος Ἑλλήνων. The imperfect expression makes the question of Oedipus more natural, τίς ούτος; Whom do you mean? 1252-1253. ὅνπερ καὶ πάλαι κατείχομεν γνώμῃ] Supra 1171.

Cp. the first words of Ismene, 11. 324-326.

τὰ τοῦδ᾽ ὁρῶν τά is in the same construction with κακά, governed by δακρύσω: but is also governed by ὁρῶν, which is added epexegetically. 1258, foll. In such raiment, whose hateful soilure hath grown old and settled on his aged frame, withering his side.' The conjectural emendation πίνος, which is due to Scaliger, agrees admirably with the context as well as with l. 1597, and the MS. reading is here indefensible.

The rhythm here curiously resembles that of supr. 314. 5.

κρατί is a locative dative, and ὀμματοστερής has a passive meaning.

ᾄσσεται The middle or passive form is used as in the Homeric expression ἀμφὶ δὲ χαῖται | ὤμοις ἀΐσσονται, ΙΙ. 6.510. 1263-1264. 'And of a piece with these miseries, as it would seem. is the provision for the poor belly's nourishment which he carries with him.' The word φορεῖ, taken in connection with the preceding context, shows that the remark of Polynices refers to the appearance of the scrip or wallet in which Oedipus, like the Telephus of Euripides, carried the scanted gifts which he received. (1. 3.)

And I declare that thy neglected condition proves me basest of Ask not others about me. For the correction, cp. El. 1225, μηκέτ᾽ ἄλλοθεν πύθῃ. The confusion of µ and λλ would easily occur with μὴ ἐξ ἄλλων following. For the meaning of ἥκειν, see Essay on Language § 52. p. 97; and for the dative τροφαῖς, ib. § 14. p. 21 (2).

But seeing that even Zeus has Mercy at his side in all his counsels, let her have place also by thee, O my father.'

For while it is possible to remedy the errors that have been committed, to add to them is now impossible; i.e. We can restore you to some comforts, but you cannot be made more miserable. For the expression, cp. Aesch. Eum. 645, πέδας μὲν ἂν λύσειεν, ἔστι τοῦδ᾽ ἄκος.

μέν ἐστι .. οὐκ ἔστ' This accentuation was retained by Elmsley from previous editions. The stress in the first clause is on ἄκη, in the second on οὐκ ἔστι.

The interrupted verse marks the solemn pause in which Polynices waits for his father to break silence.

ἃ μηνίεις Ε. on L. § 17. p. 25.

To unlock our father's lips, that will not speak nor be spoken to.' δυσπρόσοιστον = χαλεπὸν προσφέρεσθαι.

ἀπροσήγορον has rather a reciprocal than either an active or a passive meaning. Cp. Phil. 1353, τῷ προσήγορος; Eur. Alc. 195, ὃν οὐ προσείπε καὶ προσερρήθη πάλιν. Cp. supr. 1141 and note. For κινεῖν = ‘Τo excite to speech,' cp. Plat. Rep. 329 D, βουλόμενος ἔτι λέγειν αὐτὸν ἐκίνουν.

οὕτως *ἀφῇ γε The second με was rightly rejected by Turnebus. The second γε, on the other hand, gives an intelligible emphasis to οὕτως, which is further explained by μηδέν.. ἔπος. 1280 ff. The wisdom of this counsel is in keeping with the tact, beyond her years, which Antigone herself elsewhere displays.

'For speech, when lengthened out, may either by gratifying some fancy, by awakening some impatience or some pity. For the causative use of δυσχεραίνω and κατοικτίζω, which is assisted by the active τέρψαντα preceding, see Essay on Language § 53. p. 98, and cp. the passive κατῳκτίσθην in Eur. I. A. 686. The more usual meaning, By expressing anger or pity, is unsuited to the circumstances (Polynices was not likely to move Oedipus by expressing anger or pity), and affords no suitable connection with the following line.

ἔνθεν From whose altar. ἀνέστησεν] On raising the suppliant, cp. supra 264. 276, and notes.

κυρεῖν To be made good. For this emphatic use of κυρέω, cp. Tr. 291, νῦν σοι τέρψις ἐμφανὴς κυρεῖ.

ἅ Cp. supra 1274, and note.

γονῇ ·· γεραιτέρᾳ Of elder birth. See Essay on Language § 42. p. 80.

φύσει By birth, answering to πεφυκώς, supra. Cp. Hdt. 7. 134, φύσει γεγονότες εὖ.

χειρὸς οὔτ᾽ ἔργου i. e. οὔτε χειρὸς οὔτ᾽ ἔργου. Cp. Aesch. Ag. 532, Πάρις γὰρ οὔτε συντελὴς πόλις, κ.τ.λ. The first οὔτε may be suppressed because of οὔτε preceding. But Hermann's conj., οὐδ', is not improbable.

The reading of Lis more distinct than that of Par. A, but there is still some degree of inexactness in the language. For μάλιστα μέν does not oppose Polynices' own opinion to the words of the prophets, but the anger of Oedipus to other causes of disaster at Thebes.

The connection shows that the μάντεις are the soothsayers of his new army, who had obtained information of the oracle given to the θεωροί from Thebes: infr. 1331-1332, cp. supr. 387 ff.

Ἄργος .. Δωρικόν) The plain of Argolis, as distinguished from the Pelasgic Argos in Thessaly. II. 2. 681. rex

γῆς .. Ἀπίας Apis ut Sicyonii teste Pausania 2, 5, 5, ferebant, fuerat Peloponnesi, a quo tota Peloponnesus nomen Apiae terrae accepit. Ex iis, quae de eo rege Aeschylus Suppl. 270 seqq. (260 foll.) refert, intelligitur illud τὸν ἤπιον significare, fabulamque illam ad vitae humanioris cultum in illis locis introductum spectare. Hermann: whose inference is, however, scarcely justified by the words of Aeschylus.

καὶ τετίμηνται δόρει And are honoured most in war. The superlative notion is continued from πρῶτοι. Ср. О. Т. 1205 and note.

τὸν ἑπτάλογχον.. στόλον The article is probably used by an anachronism: i. e. The well-known expedition of the seven chieftains. Cp. supra 1066, and note. For the adj. cp. infr. 1311.

ἐς Θήβας depends on the idea of motion implied in the sentence = στόλον στειλάμενος.

πανδίκως Might either die and make an end, as is fitting. The latter part of the compound is subordinate, but supplies a certain notion of fitness, i. e. πανδίκως = πάντως, ὡς δίκαιον. The same thought is present as in Aj. 479-480, ἀλλ᾽ ἡ καλῶς ζῆν, ἢ καλῶς τεθνηκέναι | τὸν εὐγενή χρή.

ἐμαυτοῦ On my own account. Essay on Language § 9. p. 12.

σὺν ἑπτά τε λόγχαις Cp. Ant. 106, τὸν . . Ἀργόθεν φῶτα βάντα πανσαγία: 141-142. ταχθέντες ἴσοι πρὸς ἴσους ἔλιπον Ζηνὶ τροπαίῳ πάγχαλκα τέλη. (1) The uplifted spear of each leader is singled out for special mention as that to which all eyes would turn for the signal to march, etc. Cp. Trach. 856, κελαινὰ λόγχα προμάχου δορός, Aesch. Eum. 766, εὖ κεκασμένον δορύ. Although λόγχη, like ἀσπίς, is sometimes used collectively, ἑπτὰ ἀσπίδες could never mean seven heavy-armed battalions. (2) If τάξις might have the special meaning of a troop of cavalry, it might mig be proposed to read λόχοις for λόγχαις.

Ἀμφιάρεως.

πρώτα δ᾽ οἰωνῶν ὁδοῖς And skilled before all men in the intricate meanings of the flight of birds.

κατασκαφῇ Dative of the manner: πυρί, dative of the instrument: In utter demolition to burn with fire.

ὄρνυται Rushes on. The word indicates the fiery youth of Parthenopaeus.

ἐπώνυμος.. λοχευθείς Called so, because the late offspring of a mother, who beforetime was long a virgin. The genitive is governed partly by ἐπώνυμος and partly by λοχευθείς, which is added epexegetically. Cp. supra 1255, and note. Essay on Language § 43. p. 82.

χρόνῳ refers to the long-continued maidenhood of Atalanta, and is in construction either (1) with πρόσθεν, or rather (2) with λοχευθείς.

πιστός Steadfast: δίκαιος κἀγαθὸς παραστάτης, Ant. 671. An ornamental epithet, suitably applied by Polynices to one of his faithful companions. Cp. infra 1395.

ἐγὼ δὲ.. ἄγω Polynices ends with the mention of himself, but, instead of continuing the enumeration, distinguishes himself from the rest as the leader of all.

σός Sc. γόνος.

τοῦ κακοῦ πότμου φυτευθείς Cp. Ο. Τ. 1080, ἐγὼ δ᾽ ἐμαυτὸν παῖδα τῆς τύχης νέμων, κ.τ.λ.

Ἄργους is partly gen. of place = rdv ἐξ Ἄργους opposed to ἐς Θήβας, partly descriptive = 'Αργεῖον.

To make his supplication more impressive Polynices represents the whole army, which he has described, as joining in it. Ср. О. Т. 326-327, ἐπεὶ | πάντες σε προσκυνοῦμεν οἵδ᾽ ἱκτήριοι.

ἀντὶ.. ψυχῆς] 'By these thy children, and by thy life. This rare use of ἀντί is to be explained by the notion of equivalence. At the price of your children; i. e. As you love them. Cp. El. 537, ἀλλ ἀντ᾿ ἀδελφοῦ. 'But for his brother's sake.'

μήνιν εἰκαθεῖν Το yield your wrath.' The construction is singular, but εἰκαθεῖν = χαλᾶν. Essay on Language § 16. p. 23.

πάτρας The accusative would be an equally regular construction, but the genitive is preferred because admitting of a construction with both verbs.

For, if any event is to be believed in as issuing from prophecy, the God declared the victory to be with those whom you support.' ἐκ χρηστηρίων, sc. ἀποβαίνον. προσθῇ, SC. ἀλκήν, or the like. Cp. Hdt. 2. 160, τῷ ἀστῷ ἀγωνιζομένῳ προσθήσονται.

Now, by the wells and by the Gods of our race. Although ὁμογνίων adheres closely to θεῶν, the same idea is extended to κρηνῶν, The wells of which our fathers drank. The v. r., πρὸς θεῶν, deserves attention.

ἄλλους.. θωπεύοντες Courting favours from others at Argos and at Athens. οἰκοῦμεν) We obtain a dwellingplace.

ἐξειληφότες Having received. Cp. Plat. Soph. 227 B, where there is a similar doubt between εἰλήφασι and εἰλήχασι and the MSS. are strongly in favour of εἰλήφασι. For ἐξειληχότες, which is equally probable, cp. El. 760.

ὃν.. διασκεδῶ Whose forces I will scatter to the winds.' Eteocles stands for his power, as Polynices for his in Ant. 106, τὸν λεύκασπιν Αργόθεν φῶτα βάντα, κ.τ.λ.

τήμῇ · · φρενί If you will side with me. For this periphrasis, cp. Ant. 1015, τῆς σῆς ἐκ φρενός : ib. 1063, μὴ ᾿μπολήσων .. τὴν ἐμὴν φρένα: Τr. 538, ἐμπόλημα τῆς ἐμῆς φρενός.

With little effort and in brief time.' ὄγκος, is originally bulk' or mass. Hence it has the two secondary senses of (1) importance, (2) effort. Cp. Eur. Troad. 107-108, ὦ πολὺς ὄγκος ξυστελλομένων | προγόνων, ὡς οὐδὲν ἄρ᾽ ἦσθα. Virg. Aen. 1. 37, Tantae molis erat Romanam condere gentem. For διασκεδῶ, cp. supra 620, Ant. 287, γῆν ἐκείνων καὶ νόμους διασκεδῶν.

The objections to δημοῦχοι, which has the authority of the first hand of L. (but cp. 1355), are well stated by Hermann: Reisigius ingeniose conjecit, ἄνδρες τῆσδε δημοῦχοι χθονός. Non est tamen credibile, ita scripsisse poetam, tum quia tam verbosa compellatio minus convenit homini irato, tum quod nudum nomen Thesei hic, ubi regia auctoritate se permotum indicare vult Oedipus, non satis grave est. For δημοῦχος, as applied to Theseus, cp. supra 1087.

For the amplification of the phrase with ὥστε, cp. Phil. 901, ἔπεισεν ὥστε μὴ μὲ ἄγειν ναύτην ἔτι; Eur. Hipp. 1327, ἤθελ᾽ ὥστε γίγνεσθαι τάδε.

ὀμφῆς τῆς ἐμῆς My voice. For the solemn association attaching to ὀμφή, cp. supra 550, κατ' ὀμφὴν σήν, and note.

νῦν δ᾽ ἀξιωθεὶς εἶσι But now this shall be vouchsafed him ere he go; yea, and he shall hear words that shall in nowise cheer his path of life: thine, O thou wretch,' etc.

τὸν αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ For αὑτοῦ = σεαυτοῦ, and for the order of words, cp. supr. 930.

στολάς Supr. 1258.

φορεῖν Governed by the notion of causation in ἔθηκας = ἐποίησας.

κακών Added to supplement πόνῳ. Cp. supra 1029-1030, ὕβριν τόλμης. .. 1360-1361. This is no case for tears. By me these things must be borne, however I live, never forgetting that you are my murderer.' κλαυστά] Some editors read κλαυτά. Dd2 The MS. reading is defended by Hermann, who says, Ego quidem suspicor in hoc nomine verbali idem accidisse, quod in γνωστός et γνωτός factum videri at Oed. R. 362 (361) adnotavi, ut hae formae subtili quodam significationis discrimine distinguerentur. Nam, nisi fallor, κλαυτός proprie est defletus, deinde autem ad exemplum aliorum verbalium lacrimabilis; κλαυστός autem lacrimandus, i. e. quem convenit defleri.

ὥσπερ ἂν ζῶ Whatever my life may be. Cp. Hom. Od. 17. 586, οὐκ ἄφρων ὁ ξεῖνος δίεται, ὅσπερ ἂν εἴη. Some take ὡs in this place for ἕως (see Essay on Language § 28. p. 47), but such a use of ὥσπερ is inadmissible. As above rendered, the words have an obvious reference to 1357-1359, and to supr. 1625, 6, I ask not for your compassion; whether I live happily or miserably, I shall equally regard you as my murderer.

μεμνημένος is nominative by attraction to the relative clause.

ἐκ σέθεν In consequence of your acts. Essay on Language § 19. p. 28. According to Sophocles in this play, Polynices was the elder brother. Supr. 1295.

For the position of μή, see Essay on Language § 41. p. 78. 1370-1371. (1) (Reading οὗ τί πω) Therefore the Avenging eyes are upon τροφαὶ ΑR. thee, not indeed as they will be by-andby, if once those battalions move towards the town of Thebes. The curse of Oedipus is absolute: but its immediate execution depends on the action of Polynices. Antigone may be supposed to have these words in her mind when she entreats her brother to turn his army back. Infr. 1416 ff. The apodosis to which μέν looks forward (εἰσόψεται δέ) is absorbed in the relative clause, ὡς αὐτίκα, SC. εἰσόψεται. (2) Retaining που from L, and supposing ὡs to be pleonastic as in various adverbial expressions (cp. esp. El. 1452, ὡς ἐτητύμως: Phil. 58, πλεῖς δ᾽ ὡς πρὸς οἶκον), a different turn may perhaps be given to the expression. Therefore the eye of Heaven regards thee, I do not say for immediate vengeance, since these battalions are on their march to Thebes.' In this case Oedipus contrasts the proud advance of Polynices at the head of the Argive host (cp. Ant. 119 ff.) with his impending ruin. For this momentary suspension of the curse, cp. Phil. 961, ὅλοιο μή πω, κ.τ.λ. The deferred apodosis is resumed by implication in 1372 ff. εἴπερ, with the indicative, suits better with (2): if. as you tell me. This is a real example of tragic irony. In this case που is slightly better than πω, because assisting the ironical expression. Not, I suppose, for instant retribution, since your great host is still upon its way. ὡς αὐτίκα, sc. εἰσορῶν, i. e. κολάζων. In support of the above suggestion (2), it may be urged that αὐτίκα rarely opposes future time to present, though it is occasionally so used by Plato (Gorg. 459 C, Rep. 495 С).

οἵδε .. λόχοι Oedipus speaks as if he saw the army which Polynices has described. Cp. supr. 1326 ff.

οὐ γάρ, κ.τ.λ. The town, I say, for there is one who shall never call Thebes his "city." In the edition of Turnebus, ἐρεῖ τις is changed to ἐρείψεις, on which Hermann justly remarks, Etiam si illa fortasse codicis alicuju alicujus scriptura est, non levis manet suspicio, ingenioso eam correctori potius quam ipsi poetae deberi, non quod ἐρείψεις gravius verbum sit quam expectes, aut quod κείνην addi non opus fuerit; in hujusmodi rebus enim non est argutandum: sed quod codicum et veterum editionum scriptura tantum abest ut sensu careat, ut propterea tantum, quia difficilior est, correctione opus habuisse videatur.' The interpretation of the passage turns on the associations surrounding the word πόλις. (Cp. supra 837, 858.) Oedipus, in speaking to Polynices of Thebes, avoids the word πόλις, and uses ἄστυ instead, because, as he says with a sort of angry logic, Thebes shall never more be a city to Polynices, who shall be ἄπολις Θήβης as he is ἀπάτωρ ἐμοῦ (1383). It is to be remembered that the words πόλις and πατρίς were used by Greeks with the same affection. ate familiarity, and the same consciousness of the privileges attaching to them, as the words πατήρ, μήτηρ, ἀδελφός, and the like. This is not equally the case with ἄστυ, which is rather the place, while πόλις is the commonwealth, furnished well with men. Cp. Eur. Phoen. 613, Π. ὦ πόλις. ΕΤ. μολὼν ἐς Ἄργος ἀνακάλει Λέρνης ὕδωρ. On the use of the indefinite for the second personal pronoun, see Essay on Language § 22. p. 36. It may be further observed, against the reading of Turnebus, that Oedipus, who is looking forward to the defeat of the Thebans at his grave, is not likely thus to emphasize the impregnable strength of their city.

τοιάσδ᾽ ἀράς Viz. the curse of mutual slaughter. Sophocles here returns to the old legend, which he had altered so as to give a dramatic and ethical propriety to the curse of Oedipus. See Introd. p. 269. The curse thus solemnly recalled is the original curse of the old story, and not a mere accidental utterance like that in supra 421, foll.

ἀνακαλοῦμαι I invoke them anew in my behalf. So in Eur. Suppl. 626, κεκλημένους μὲν ἀνακαλούμεθ᾽ αὖ θεούς.

ἵν᾿ ἀξιῶτον, κ.τ.λ. For similar language accompanying a threat, cp. Ant. 310, 311: Tr. 1110-1111.

καὶ μὴ ἐξατιμάζητον, εἰ And may not think it a light matter that ye have been such sons to your blind father.

ἀτιμάζειν c. inf. in Eur. 608-609, is to neglect a duty. Hence ἐξατιμάζειν here means to persist in making light of a sin. For the compound, cp. ἐξουδενίζω. See Essay on Language p. 101. The clause εἰ.. ἔφυτον is the object of the verb. For the ethical force of ei='to think that,' see Essay on Language § 28. p. 46.

τυφλοῦ πατρὸς τοιώδ᾽ ἔφυτον is condensed for τυφλοῦ πατρὸς φύντες ἐγένεσθον τοιώδε: i. e. When your father was blind, you proved so undutiful.

Ultima hujus versus verba αἵδε γὰρ τάδ᾽ οὐκ ἔδρων, hac simplicitate sua admirabilem habent planeque divinam vim tum ad magnitudinem doloris propter impietatem filiorum, tum ad caritatem, quam filiae meruerunt, declarandam.' Herm.

Therefore they have power to frustrate thy supplication and thy claim upon the throne.' They, viz. (1) my curses,' which are the main subject, the reflection αΐδε ἔδρων being inserted parenthetically. For this, cp. Phil. 351, οὐ γὰρ εἰδόμην: 668, καὶ δόντι δοῦναι: 1034, αὕτη γὰρ ἦν σοι πρόφασις ἐκβαλεῖν ἐμέ: supra 280, φυγὴν δε του μήπω γενέσθαι φωτὸς ἀνοσίου βροτῶν. Otherwise (2), they, viz. the daughters, whose virtues justify the repulse of the son: sc. αὗται τοιαῦται γενόμεναι. But, although the verb is thus made to agree with the nearer subject, the words do not naturally bear this meaning. τὸ σὸν θάκημα has been interpreted to mean thine enthronement,' the whole line thus recalling the words of Polynices, supr. 1293, τοῖς σοῖς . . ἐνθακεῖν θρόνοις. But θάκημα has been used twice previously of the supplication of Polynices (11. 1160, 1179; cp. also 1163, 1166); and this meaning is here in point. Polynices has appealed not only to his right of primogeniture, but to the protection of Poseidon, from whose altar Theseus raised him with a solemn promise (supr. 1285-1290, 1293-1294). Оеdipus rejoins that both these claims are quashed by the righteousness of his paternal curse, which is justified by the filial ingratitude of both his sons, ap- 1380 1385 pearing still darker when contrasted with the piety of Antigone and Ismene.

If the righteousness of which old legends tell presides in the immemorial rule of Zeus. Demosth. Ρ. 772-725, τὴν ἀπαραίτητον καὶ σεμνὴν Δίκην, ἣν ὁ τὰς ἁγιωτάτας ἡμῖν τελετὰς καταδείξας Ὀρφεὺς παρὰ τὸν τοῦ Διὸς θρόνον φησὶ καθημένην πάντα τὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἐφορᾶν. The latter part of the compound παλαιφάτουis subordinate, so that it is little more than παλαιοῦ, but with an association from φάτις, φήμη, cp. Τr. 823; Hes. Op. 257. The laws of Zeus are personified, like the νόμοι ἄγραφοι in O. T. 866. But the eternal laws are here imagined rather as ruling over events than as claiming the allegiance of the heart: in their retributive more than their directive aspect. Cp. Ant. 604, ff., τεάν, Ζεῦ, δύνασιν τίς ἀνδρῶν | ὑπερβασία κατάσχοι ; τὸ τ᾽ ἔπειτα καὶ τὸ μέλλον καὶ τὸ πρὶν ἐπαρκέσει | νόμος ὅδ'.

ἀπόπτυστος.. ἐμοῦ Disowned, ay, and abhorred by me. Essay on Language § 41. p. 78, B, b. ἐμοί, from ἐμοῦ following, is probably to be supplied with ἀπόπτυστος. For the genitive of respect after the privative, see Essay on Language § 10. p. 16.

ἅς σοι καλοῦμαι Which I invoke on thee. Cp. infr. 1389, 1391. The force of the middle voice here is to mark the intensely personal nature of the act: which I invoke on them from my very soul. In supr. 1376 it is rather, which being my own, I summon to my aid. σοι is dative of direct reference. Essay on Language § 12. p. 18.

γῆς ἐμφυλίου The land of thine own kin. The word marks the sacrilegious nature of Polynices' enterprise. Cp. αἷμ' ἐμφύλιον.

τὸ κοῖλον Ἄργος The vale of Argos, as in supra 378. Cp. 1301, and Homer's κοίλην Λακεδαίμονα.

συγγενεῖ χερὶ . . ἐξελήλασαι] i. e. With brother's hand to slay and to be slain.' συγγενεῖ χερί and ὑφ' οὗπερ ἐξελήλασαι belong equally to both the infinitives. The phrase ὑφ' οὗπερ ἐξελήλασαι is a formal amplification, giving greater solemnity. For the legend, see Pind. Isthm. 7. (6.) 10.

And I invoke the hated gloom of the abyss to carry thee away to his place. πατρῷον is obscure. Either (1), there is an allusion to the curse upon the Labdacidae, I invoke on thee the horrid gloom of Erebus, thy sole inheritance from our sire: or (2) simply, where my father is: or (3), πατρῷος is used as an epithet of Tartarus, to mark off a special function; cp. ZΖεὺς ξένιος, ἱκετήσιος, etc. The gloom of the nethermost abyss, that avenges fathers.The dreadful hell that waits upon a father's curse.' Taken either way πατρῷον conveys more of horror than Nauck's κάτωθεν, or Meineke's στυγνοπρόσωπον. Τάρταρος, like Όλυμπος, is less definite in Sophocles than in earlier poetry. 1395

τό τοῦ LA.

τοὺσ-ουσ Β Vat.

ἐμβεβληκότα ἐ(κ?)βεβληκότα LL². ἐμ1393. κἀξάγγελλ' κἐξάγγελ' Α.

τάσδε δαίμονας Oedipus invokes the Eumenides against Polynices, as against Creon supr. 1010 ff., rather as his patron deities than in their primary character as Erinyes. See Introd. p. 281, and contrast Ajax' invocation of the same deities, Aj. 843.

Ἄρη The God of strife and destruction, who in Sophocles is often regarded as an evil power. Cp. O. T. 190.

For δεινόν, cp. supr. 336.

οὔτε.. ξυνήδομαι For the indirect mode of expression, see Essay on Language § 42. p. 72, and cp. Eur. Med. 136, οὐδὲ συνήδομαι, ὦ γύναι, ἄλγεσι δώματος.

ταῖς παρελθούσαις ὁδοῖς By reason of your journies hitherto; with special reference to the journey to Argos: supr. 378. See Essay on Language § 14. p. 21, § 51. p. 96.

κελεύθου For my coming hither. For τῆς ἐμῆς only expressed in the second member of the clause, see Essay on Language § 21. p. 33. b.

δυσπραξίας refers especially to the failure of his present mission, in which he is worse than ἄπρακτος.

Cp. Pind. Isthm. 6. (7). 10, quoted on l. 1076. οἷον ἄρ᾽ ὁδοῦ τέλος | Ἄργους ἀφωρμήθημεν] The accusative τέλος may be accounted for in one of two ways: either (1) as the accusative of motion transferred to time, or (2) as an accusative in apposition with the action of the verb expressing the result of the action. The latter is probably right. We set forth from Argos, with what a consummation of our enterprise!' Essay on Language § 16. p. 22, § 17. p. 25.

ὁδοῦ ie. The whole march from Argos to Thebes. Cp. infr. 1439-1440.

The words τοιοῦτον, κ.τ.λ. are epexegetic of olov in l. 1400.

οὐδ᾽ ἀποστρέψαι πάλιν Cp. infr. 1416. The sentence has passed out of the construction with olov. The object of ἀποστρέψαι is easily supplied. Cp. Hdt. 4. 43, ἀποστρέψας ὀπίσω, ἀπέπλεε.

ἀλλ᾽ ὄντ᾿ ἄναυδον, κ.τ.λ. The positive notion is here elicited from the negative (see Essay on Language p. 64); i. e. these words depend on χρή implied in οὐκ ἔξεστι. Cp. esp. O. T. 816-818.

ὦ τοῦδ᾽ ὅμαιμοι παῖδες O my own sisters, daughters of this my father. Against explaining τοῦδε as = ἐμοῦ, it is enough to urge that there is no other instance in Sophocles in which this pronoun stands alone for the first person. In the only two places where it is so used substantively (Tr. 305, τῆσδε, 1012, τῷδε) it is immediately followed by a participle in agreement with it. In ὅμαιμοι there is no reference (as in ὦ σπέρμ᾽ ὅμαιμον, 331) to the incestuous birth, an allusion which, though in character with Oedipus, supr. 328, would not be in character with Polynices here. Cp. infr. 1772: Ant. 512-513.

κλύετε †τοῦδ᾽ ἀρωμένου τοῦδε occurs three times in these three lines, and ταῦτα seems to be required to complete τὰ σκληρά. It may seem justifiable therefore to read ταῦτ᾽ for τοῦδ' in this line. But it may be observed that a certain amount of iteration of the dominant thought is natural to the broken language of such an entreaty. See esp. ll. 1407-1409. and cp. Phil. 473 ff. The thought of his father has a terrible fascination for Polynices at this moment.

*ἐάν The a is long here and in Aristoph. Vesp. 228. It is strange that car should occur so seldom before a vowel.

Cp. infr. 1769 ff.

But yourselves lay me in the tomb, and afford me funeral rites.' ἐν κτερίσμασιν is placed in construction with θέσθε in a slightly different sense, = περιστείλατε κτερίσμασιν. See Essay on Language pp. 60, 65, 2. The middle voice in θέσθε is subjective, i. e. it emphasises the personal nature of the action: θέσθε, i. e. προθυμήθητε θεῖναι. Essay on Language § 31. P. 53.

And the praise you now receive from him for your labours in his behalf shall have added unto it another praise moreover for the service done to me.' For the turn of expression, cp. O.T. 666-667, τάδ᾽ εἰ κακοῖς κακὰ ἡ γῆ) προσάψει τοῖς πάλαι τὰ πρὸς σφῷν. And for the use of φέρω, Αj. 293, γυναιξὶ κόσμον ἡ σιγὴ φέρει.

τοῦδ᾽ ἀνδρός is, ist, genitive of origin, You receive from him:' but, 2nd, suggests the object of πονεῖτον, sc. τῷδε or ὑπὲρ τοῦδε. οἷς = τούτοις ἅ: By reason of your labours.'

ἔτ᾿ ἄλλον οἴσει Cp. Tr. 618-619, ὅπως ἂν ἡ χάρις κείνου τε σοι | κἀμοῦ ξυνελθοῦσ᾽, ἐξ ἁπλῆς διπλῆ φανῇ.

τῆς ἐμῆς ὑπουργίας ‘By reason of, etc. Essay on Language § 10. p. 15.

The two trisyllabic feet coming together at the beginning of the line produce a singular effect, corresponding to the trembling eagerness of Antigone.

Some MSS. have ὦ φιλτάτη μοι ποῖον, which Hermann admitted. But if Par. A. has preserved the true reading, μοι was not unlikely to be conjectured to supply the syllable which was lost in L. On the other hand, μοι expresses greater tenderness. But in a point of such uncertainty, even a slight MS. preponderance must be allowed to determine the text.

γε, qualifying the whole sentence, marks the earnestness of the entreaty. Essay on Language § 26. р. 44. Meineke conj. σε. In this case στρέψαι is infin. active. As the text stands, it is either (1) infin. active (for imperative), or (2) imperative middle, i. e. στρέψον τὸ στράτευμά σου.

For how, if I once falter, can I again lead the same army the same way?᾽ αὖθις, another time, πάλιν, back to Thebes. Some would read ἄν for aὖ. This is unnecessary, see Essay on Language § 27. p. 45, (2), and gives av an awkward position, but makes no difference to the sense. Antigone meant Give up the expedition. But this idea can find no entrance to Polynices' mind. He only thinks of the possibility of a temporary yielding, like that of a general who meets with some unfavourable omen. And against this he argues, I cannot go back now, for if I did, my attempt falls through entirely. I could no longer command the army, which must sooner or later be led by me against Thebes.

But why need you again suffer your wrath to rise? Antigone vainly tries to reason against the fixed idea in Polynices' mind, and assumes that his passion may cool, and not be kindled again. αὖθις echoes αὖθις in 1418.

It is ignominious to be in exile, and that I, the elder-born, should be a laughing-stock to my brother, as I now am. Cp. supra 1339.

Seest thou, then, how his prophecies advance unchecked to their certain end? Vides ergo ut hujus vaticinia ad eventum ruunt.' (Herm.) ἐκφέρεις, the conjecture of Tyrwhitt, certainly deserves notice, and is supported by Pind. Nem. 4. 60, 1, ἄλαλκε δὲ Χείρων, καὶ τὸ μόρσιμον Διόθεν πεπρωμένον ἔκφερεν. But the image of the prophecy moving on steadily to the event is more impressive. For the absolute use of ἐκφέρει, cp. Tr. 824, ὁπότε τελεόμηνος ἐκφέροι | δωδέκατος ἄροτος.

ἐξ ἀμφοῖν From your mutual hands. Cp. supr. 1387, and note.

The existence of a verb χρήζω from χράω, suggested by the scholiast here, is questionable. See Eur. Hel. 516. At all events, the common meaning of χρήζει is suitable here. Antigone speaks of the curse of Oedipus as a prophecy: Polynices avoids her inference by arguing that it would be weak to yield to a mere outburst of wilfulness. He speaks his wish; but it does not become me to give way. Cp. Aesch. Prom. 928, σὺ θὴν ἃ χρήζεις, ταῦτ᾽ ἐπιγλωσσᾷ Διός.

τίς .. τἀνδρός On the order of words, see Essay on Language § 41. p. 77.

οὐδ᾽ ἀγγελούμεν (1) But we will not tell. δé adversative, arguing against the suggestion of Antigone. Or, (2) οὐδὲ ἀγγελοῦμεν, We will not even report bad news, i. e. and so they will not act upon them. For the thought in ἐπεὶ .. λέγειν, cp. the exhortation of Nicias to his men at Syracuse, Thuc. 7. 61.

Polynices contrasts the bitter business before him with what he hopes will be the lot of Antigone and Ismene.

Rendered ill-starred and disastrous by this my father and his avenging spirit. For πρός, cp. Ant. 51, πρὸς αὐτοφώρων ἀμπλακημάτων. Polynices here, and supra 1299, speaks in the Homeric manner of his father's Erinyes, without any reference to the Erinyes at whose sacred place he is standing. Cp. supr. 1391 and note.

σφῷν δ᾽ εὐοδοίη Ζεύς ‘But for you may Zeus prepare a prosperous way.' Cp. Hdt. 6. 73, ὡς τῷ Κλεομένεϊ εὐωδώθη τὸ ἐς τὸν Δημάρητον πρήγμα, which shows that εὐοδόω is properly followed by the dative of the person as well as the accusative of the thing. In the present case an accusative (e.g. τὸν βίον, τὰ πράγματα) is easily supplied. Hence the correction σφώ is unnecessary, and the conjecture εὖ διδοίη, besides being unnecessary, destroys a beautiful image, and the connection with 1432.

θανόντ' To avoid the unusual elision of of the dative, this has been explained as an accusative, by a change of construction; cp. El. 479, ὕπεστί μοι θράσος ἁδυπνόων κλύουσαν ἀρτίως ὀνειράτων: Aesch. Pers. 913-914, λέλυται γὰρ ἐμοὶ γυίων ῥώμη | τήνδ᾽ ἡλικίαν ἐσιδόντ᾽ ἀστῶν: Choeph. 410, πέπαλται δ᾽ αὐτέ μοι φίλον κέαρ τόνδε κλύουσαν οἶκτον. But it should probably be admitted that here and in Trach. 677, ἀργῆτ' οἰὸς εὐείρῳ πόκῳ, there is an elision of the 1, as well as in Eur. Alc. 1118. Γοργόν᾽ ὡς καρατόμῳ, where however the conj. карато- μῶν in not improbable, and in any case the licence is taken with a proper name. After θανόντι some general word like ὑπουργεῖν is to be supplied from τάδ' εἰ τελεῖτε.

ἐπεὶ οὔ μοι ζῶντί γ'] Not τάδε τελεῖν, but some more general notion of paying the tribute of affection, is to be supplied. The inexactness of this is similar to that noticed in 1410. Elmsley's conjecture, οὐ μὴ ζῶντά γ᾽ αὖθις ἕξετον is therefore unnecessary, as 1440. Cp. Pind. Nem. 9. 21, speaking of the same expedition, φαινομέναν δ' ἄρ᾽ ἐς ἄταν σπεῦδεν ὅμιλος ἱκέσθαι (because of the adverse omens at their setting forth): Aesch. Prom. 1073-1074, 5, μηδέποτ' εἴπηθ᾽ | ὡς Ζεὺς ὑμᾶς εἰς ἀπρόοπτον | πῆμ᾽ εἰσέβαλεν.

εἴ σου στερηθῶ For the subjunctive with el, see Essay on L § 27. p. 44. Here the supposition is more definite than with ei and the optative, and more general than with ἐάν and the subjunctive, and the form of expression is therefore more suited to the expression of intense feeling.

ταῦτα .. χἀτέρᾳ But this is in the power of God, and may come to pass either in this way, or in some other. It rests with the Divinity that shapes our ends.Cp. Shak. Hamlet, 5. 2, Not a whit, we defy augury: there's a special providence in the falling of a sparrow:' Hom. Il. 12. 235-243.

For φῦναι, cp. Αj. 646-647, ἅπανθ' ὁ .. χρόνος | φύει τ' ἄδηλα καὶ φανέντα κρύπτεται.

For you I pray to heaven that ye may never encounter woe.' The conjectures κακόν (Triclinius), and σφώ (Scaliger and Elmsley), are both unnecessary. Of the two, that of Triclinius is the more probable, = ' I pray that evil may never cross your path.' For κακόν, cp. Phil. 446.

For all may see that ye deserve no ill.'

Polynices departs, and the end is near. The chorus are reflecting on the new horror created by the curse of Oedipus, when a sound of thunder is heard, which awakens all their superstition, and is recognized by Oedipus as the promised summons. He calls for Theseus, and the chorus repeat his call. This part of the play consists of two strophes, divided by three sets of five iambic trimeters, each consisting of two couplets spoken by Oedipus, with a line between them. The prevailing metre is dochmiac, with iambic and trochaic movements interspersed. The dochmiacs, with frequent long syllables, increase in the second strophe. a'. First strophe and antistrophe. トリートトー CCICICICICICICI 15ートー つ 1 Iambic dimeter. 2 Diiambus and cretic, bis; but see note on 1454- β'. Second strophe and antistrophe. C- トートト ートートトー トトートトー 5a1clc!CIC!CICICI Cp. 1. 3 of strophe a'.

νέα ... ἄνω These are the reflections of the chorus after hearing the woe pronounced on Polynices. The remarks of the Scholiast show a curious perception of ancient Greek feeling: εἰ καὶ ὅτι μάλιστα ξενικά ἐστι τὰ πρόσωπα, καὶ τὰ κατέχοντα τούτους κακά, ὅμως συναλγεῖ ὁ χόρος] καὶ εὐλαβεῖται μὴ ἐκ τῆς ὁμιλίας τῆς σὺν αὐτοῖς ἀπολαύσωσί τινος κακοῦ καὶ αὐτοί· ἐν τοιούτῳ οὖν ἤθει καὶ ὁ λόγος αὐτοῖς διάκειται· τοιαῦτα πάρεστιν ἡμῖν, φησίν, ἄτοπα παρὰ τοῦ ξένου ἀπολαῦσαι, ἐκτὸς εἰ μὴ μοῖρά τις καταλαμβάνει ἡμᾶς, καὶ κατὰ μοίραν ἀπολαύομεν, ὧν ἀπολαύσομεν.

νέα New, i.e. In addition to the trouble he gave us before.

νεόθεν From a new source, Springing from a new occasion, i. e. from his interview with Polynices.

*νέα, added by Hermann, for the sake of the metre, also rather improves the sense. ،

εἴ τι μοῖρα μὴ κιγχάνει Polynices (1426) referred the curse to his father's caprice: Antigone (1424, 1440) to some higher inspiration. The chorus waver between the two suggestions. Coming from the blind stranger: if this be not haply the hand of fate. The Homeric expression κιχάνει or κιγχάνει, is here left without a distinct object. The Scholiast suggests ἡμᾶς: later critics αὐτόν: and some have rendered, Evil comes to me from the stranger, unless his fate overtake him now. Cp. II. 22. 436, νῦν αὖ θάνατος καὶ Μοῖρα κιχάνει. But the emphasis is on μοῖρα, and the verb is used absolutely. Lit. Unless it be Fate who in some respect attains her aim. τι as cognate accusative in part supplies the place of the regular object. This explanation harmonizes with the next line.

For I cannot tell of any decree of Gods that hath been in vain.' For ἔχω φράσαι, cp. Aesch. Ag. 367, Διὸς πλαγὰν ἔχουσιν εἰπεῖν. And for the adverbas predicate, see Essay on Language p. 40. 1454-1455. Either (1) 'Time ever keeps (the execution of the Divine Will) in view, one day making some things rise and grow, and other things again on the day following. For this interpretation, cp. Aj. 646, ἅπανθ᾽ ὁ.. χρόνος φύει τ᾿ ἄδηλα καὶ φανέντα κρύπτεται: Ib. 131-132, ὡς ἡμέρα κλίνει τε κἀνάγει πάλιν | ἅπαντα τἀνθρώπεια: Τr. 132 ff.: Hdt. 1. 5, τὰ γὰρ τὸ πάλαι μεγάλα ἦν, τὰ πολλὰ αὐτῶν σμικρὰ γέγονε· τὰ δὲ ἐπ᾿ ἐμεῦ ἦν μεγάλα, πρότερον ἦν σμικρά. τὴν ἀνθρωπηΐην ὧν ἐπιστάμενος εὐδαιμονίαν οὐδαμὰ ἐν τωὐτῷ μένουσαν, ἐπιμνήσομαι ἀμφοτέρων ὁμοίως. And for αὔξων ἄνω, infr. 1567, πάλιν σε δαίμων δίκαιος αὔξοι. In this interpretation ἐπεὶ μέν is supposed to be used after the analogy of ὅτε μέν. And this is hardly admissible, if the usage, ὅτε μὲν ὅτε δὲ.. is to be explained, as seems most probable, by the original identity of the relative with the demonstrative. Cp. ὃς μὲν .. ὃς δὲ .. (2) To meet the difficulty Canter conjectured ἐκεῖ, i. e. In yonder case. Others have supposed that ἐπεί is the corruption of a verb or participle. The words τρέπων τὰ ἤδη αὐξηθέντα, in the confused note of the Scholiast, have suggested στρέφων (Schndw., who reads δέδοικα δ' in the antistrophe), i.e. turning backward: (τρέπει is nearer to the MSS, but the indicative could not be followed by a participle with dé coming between). But although Eur. fr. 540 says φεῦ τὰ τῶν εὐδαιμονούντων ὡς τάχα στρέφει θεός, the word is less natural here. Another conj., which gives the same general meaning without altering the rhythm, is áveis, 'letting go'-the opposite of ἀνέχων οἱ ἐπέχων :-'dropping some things, and lifting others on high.' Cp. Aj. 1214, νῦν δ᾽ οὗτος ἀνεῖται : Pind. Pyth. 2. 89, (χρὴ δὲ πρὸς θεὸν οὐκ ἐρίζειν) ὃς ἀνέχει ποτὲ μὲν τὰ κείνων, τότ᾽ αὖθ᾽ ἑτέροις ἔδωκεν μέγα κύδος. 1455- έτερα CA.

(τάδ᾽ ἐπ᾽ ἤματ᾿ B Vat.) (3) The above conjectures suppose an alteration of the antistrophe. The conj. ἐριπὼν μὲν ἕτερα, suggested in our former edition, requires no further change, and, in common with that of Schndw., gives the rhythm (ト​(レト υιυΐυιτών. Dind. conj.

ἄγων. Qy. ἀπάγων ? (4) It has been suggested to give ἕτερα the meaning of bad, ' sinister,' as in Pind. Pyth. 3. 34, 5, δαίμων δ᾽ ἕτερος | ἐς κακὸν τρέψας ἐδαμάσσατό νιν. But this does not help us to a clear context. (5) The MS. reading τὰ δὲ πήματ᾿ can be rendered metrical by the simple insertion of γε: τὰ δέ γε πήματ'. But πήματα αὔξειν ἄνω is not a natural expression, whether a succession of miseries is spoken of, as in Aesch. Cho. 1020, μόχθων δ᾽ ὁ μὲν αὐτίχ᾽, ὁ δ᾽ ἥξει, or αὔξειν πήματα is imagined to mean to cure misfortune. Although the text is uncertain, the general meaning probably is, Time casts down some things, and others that yesterday were mean, to-day he glorifies. Cp. Aj. 131-132, ὡς ἡμέρα κλίνει τε κἀνάγει πάλιν | ἅπαντα τἀνθρώπεια.

Some critics, including Elmsley, have imagined that the thunder is heard immediately on the departure of Oedipus. But a more natural connection is preserved if the chorus are supposed first to express the gloomy forebodings with which the curse of Oedipus has filled their minds, and then to be panic-stricken on hearing the thunder. If it had already thundered, this would in some way have been clearly announced. See Schol. on l. 1450, εἰ μὴ κατὰ μοῖραν ταῦτα πάσχω, εἴποιμι ἂν ἐκ τοῦ Πολυνείκους νέα μοι κακὰ ἐληλυθέναι. And on 1456, μεταξὺ οὖν τῶν τοῦ χόρου λόγων γίνεται τοῦτο.

εἴ τις ἔντοπος If there is any one at hand. Said with the uncertainty of a blind man. Cp. Phil. 212.

δεῦρο .. πόροι Bring hither. For this meaning of πορεῖν, in which there is a feeling of its etymological connection with πόρος, πορεύω, infr. 1476, cp. Hom. Il. 9. 513, πόρε .. ἕπεσθαι: 6. 228, κτείνειν ὅν γε θεύς γε πόρῃ ('May bring in my way'). See Essay on Language p. 99.

τἀξίωμα. The intention ; i.e. τί ἀξιοῖς γενέσθαι σοι τῇ κλήσει; Note the recurrence of the word after 1451.

ἴδε μάλα Lo! now again. μάλα emphasizing the repetition, as in μάλ᾽ αὖθις, cp. Aesch. Cho. 870, ἔα, ἔα μάλα: S. c. Τ. 915, δόμων μάλ᾽ ἀχὰν ἐς οὖς προπέμπει δαΐκτωρ γόος: Pers. 1045, οἱ μάλα καὶ τόδ᾽ ἀλγῶ: Hdt. 1. 181, καὶ ἕτερος μάλα ἐπὶ τούτου.

μέγας . . διόβολος There comes mightily crashing down the unutterable roar of the Zeus-hurled bolt. As in πτερωτὸς βροντή supra, the thunder has the attributes of the lightning.

ἄφατος, of an overwhelming sensation, as in O. T. 1314, νέφος.. ἐπιπλόμενον ἄφατον.

ἐς.. φόβαν (1) And fear hath crept even to the very hair of my head. ἄκραν, adverbial. Or (2) to the very tips of my hair; with a suggestion of the hair standing on end.

ἔπτηξα θυμόν 'I am cowed at heart. On the aorist used when the speaker reflects on his own state, see Essay on Language § 32. p. 55, and cp. esp. Αj. 693. ἔφριξ᾽ ἔρωτι. The MS. reading οὐρανία, which is metrically indefensible, can be best accounted for as a mistaken gloss on οὐρανοῦ, which, however, is not really a descriptive genitive (like ἄστρων .. εὐφρόνη in El. 19), but = from heaven, from the region of the sky. Meineke conj. οὐρανόν, i. e. Lights up the heaven.

μάν gives to the question a wondering expression.

τί.. τέλος 'What event will it bring forth?" Cp. φωνήν, ἀράς, χροιὰς ἀφιέναι.

δέδια τόδ' The reading of l. 1454 being uncertain, it is better not to alter this the corresponding line, for the sake of the metre only, seeing that IC is not an impossible rhythm. Hence it is better to retain τόδ', which has a good meaning (τὸ τῆς βροντῆς χρήμα) and also gives a reason for the neuter gender of ἅλιον.

οὐ γὰρ.. ξυμφορᾶς For it never goes forth resultless, never without grave issues. For the repetition of οὐκ, see Essay on Language § 29. p. 48. Heath conj. οὐδ᾽.

ὦ μέγας αἰθήρ Tremendous power of the sky. Cp. Aj. 173, ὦ μεγάλα φάτις, in a similar expression of awe and dread.

θέσφατος Heaven-ordained;' i. e. Both decreed by the Gods and foretold by them. Cp. supr. 87-95, infr. 1511-1512. For ἐπί, see Essay on Language § 19. p. 27, and cp. ἐφήκω in Thuc. 8. 67, ἐπειδὴ ἡ ἡμέρα ἐφῆκε.

κοὐκέτ᾽ ἔστ᾽ ἀποστροφή And there is no avoiding it, now it is come.

ἀποστροφή here and Eur. Fr. 447 is not a place of refuge, but has the primary verbal sense.

There are two strong reasons for giving this and l. 1488 to Antigone: (1) The speeches of Oedipus are addressed to her and Ismene (1457, ὦ τέκνα, 1472, ὦ παῖδες, 1486, τέκνα, 1490, σφιν, 3rd person): (2) The antistrophic nature of the passage leads us to expect an entire correspondence with l. 1459. It may be added that the chorus are at present too much occupied with their own sensations to attend to Oedipus.

ἰδού Cp. Αj. 870, ἰδού, δοῦπον αὖ κλύω τινά.

ἀμφίσταται Envelopes me. Cp. Hom. Od. 17. 261, περὶ δέ σφεας ἤλυθ᾽ ἰωὴ | φόρμιγγος: 19.444, περὶ δὲ κτύπος ἦλθε ποδοῖῖν: 1. 352, ἥτις ἀκουόντεσσι νεωτάτη ἀμφιπέληται: Phil. 1263, τίς αὖ παρ᾿ ἄντροις θόρυβος ἵσταται βοῆς; Eur. Her. 73, τίς ἡ βοὴ βωμοῦ πέλας ἕστηκεν ;

διαπρύσιος ότοβος The deafening, booming sound. Sophocles and Euripides revived this adjective, of which (except in Hymn to Aphrodite, 1. 19) only the neuter in an adverbial sense is found in Homer.

ἵλεως Sc. γενοῦ. Cр. О. Т. 696. In favour of the form ἵλεως it may be observed (1) that the quantity of ἵλᾶος is improbable: (2) that Ionic forms are elsewhere retained in dochmiacs. Cp. supr. 884, λέως.

ἀφεγγές Gloomy, i. e. Of dark significance. The epithet is perhaps suggested by the lowering sky. (Schneidewin.) Cp. Shakespeare, Macbeth, 2. 4, Thou seest the heavens, as troubled with man's act, | Threaten his bloody stage: by the clock 'tis day. | And yet dark night strangles the travelling lamp: Is it night's predominance, or the day's shame, | That darkness doth the face of earth entomb, | When living light should kiss it?' 1482. (1) Reading ἐναισίου (see v. rr.), sc. ἀνδρός, translate: May I meet with a righteous man, and not from having seen an accursed man, partake in some way of his unenvied recompence. The construction of συντύχοιμι with the genitive follows the analogy of ἀντάω, οι ἐπαυρεῖν. (2) Reading ἐναισίῳ: May I share the fortune of the righteous. For ἄλαστος, abominable, cp. II. 22.261. The Scholiast on l. 1447 understands this also (as well as supr. 1447 ff.) of Polynices. But although suggested by recent impressions this reflection of the chorus is probably quite general. Such a reference to Oedipus at this point is certainly out of the question.

And what is it that you would have thus steadfastly rooted in your mind? Lit. What is the steadfast purpose, etc.; but πιστόν is proleptic. Antigone repeats her father's thought in κατορθοῦντος φρένα, in order to elicit from him the cause of his agitation; and asks him for what special reason he wishes to have his mind clear when Theseus comes.

In return for their kindness (I desire) to pay them in full the promise which I made at the time of my obtaining my petition.' Cp. Plato, Legg. 11. 730 Α, οὐκ ἄν ποτε ἀτιμώρητος πάθοι ὁ τυχών: Hdt. 1. 213, δεηθεὶς .. ἔτυχε, ib. 5. 23, from which it appears that τυγχάνειν was used in reference to a suppliant, of obtaining a request. Cp. also Pind. Pyth. 3. 103.4. χρὴ πρὸς μακάρων | τυγχάνοντ᾽ εὖ πασχέμεν. τυγχάνων. here is = ὅτε ἐτύγχανον ὧν ἐβουλόμην, or ὧν ἔπασχον εὖ. The older explanation (as old as Eustathius) that τυγχάνων ὑπεσχόμην = ἔτυχον ὑποσχόμενος, besides making an imperfect tense equivalent to an aorist, makes τυγχάνων an unmeaning addition to the line. The correspondence in tense of ἔπασχον εὖ and τυγχάνων is a reason in favour of the explanation given above.

δοῦναι Sc θέλω. σφιν has been explained asol. But this is wholly without authority, and the common meaning need create no difficulty, when l. 1488 is given to Antigone. The case of supr. 547 is different, because the participle there is emphatic. For the communication of the secret to Theseus was the bestowal of a boon on the whole people. Cp. infr. 1496.

προβᾶθι was approved by Elmsley and Hermann, and secures correspondence with the strophe. θαυμαστῶς ὁ χόρος βοᾷ· ἐπείγει γὰρ τὸ πρᾶγμα. Schol. Observe the recurrence of ἄκραν in 1464, 1491, and of τυγχάνειν in 1491, 1493. Hol my son, come on thy way (from Athens), or if thou now art consecrating to Poseidon, God of Sea, the altar with its hollow surface that crowns the height,' or (2) ('that crowns the hill above the hollow place,') come hither! Chorus sic loquitur, ut qui domi esse Theseum putat: sed deinde ei in mentem venit, a sacris faciendis avocatum fuisse, ut ipse v. 1158 (1159) dixerat, et nunc fortasse in iis peragendis esse occupatum. Herm. Ср. О. Т. 517, 1104. τυγχάνεις is suited to express the uncertainty where Theseus is.

ἄκραν indicates the position of the altar of Poseidon on the top of Colonus.

ἐπιγύαλον is either (1) a descriptive epithet, referring to the concave surface of the altar, or (2) means above the hollow place, referring to some peculiarity of the ground, which is no longer visible. The agency of the Earthshaker may have been recognised in some rift of the rock of Colonus, near which his altar was placed. The read. ing Ποσειδαωνίῳ may have arisen from being written over the a of the Doric form.

ἁγίζων does not necessarily imply that the altar was being used for the first time. It was in a manner consecrated afresh for every sacrifice.

σε.. παρασχεῖν For the accusatives πρὸς τὸ σημαινόμενον after the notion of benefiting, see Essay on Language § 16. p. 23. They are however first governed of ἐπαξιοῖ. The stranger honours thee, and thy city, and thy friends, claiming to render you a just meed for good received. πόλισμα καὶ φίλους, i. e. Athens and the Coloniatae. See Introd. The lacuna (= τοίγαρ or αὐτός) was filled up by Tricilinius with σπεῦσον. Elmsley, reading ᾄσσ', notes the absence of three syllables. Verbum σπεῦσον deest in antiquis libris, additum in Triclinianis. Id cur recentiores critici vel damnaverint, quum non ineptum sit, nec sciamus non esse e codicibus sumptum, vel posthabuerint deterioribus conjecturis, non assequor. Herm.

κοινός ὑμῶν τὲ καὶ Οἰδίποδος, Schol. Cp. the reading of L. supr. 843. The phrase in 1499 might be with more probability assigned to Oedipus, or he may be supposed to join in it. But his voice in 1457 and the other senarii VOL. I. Ee might well be heard as far as the top of Colonus.

αὐτῶν Theseus does not confuse the chorus and Oedipus in one address. He turns first to the chorus, and in proceeding to speak of Oedipus he uses a modification of the common idiom αὐτός τε καί: cp. supra 559.

ἐμφανής is used analytically= ἐν δὲ φαινομένη, Distinguishable amongst the other voices.

μή τις Διὸς κεραυνός Is it that a bolt from Zeus is fallen, or that some hail-shower has come dashing down? For one may imagine anything to have happened in such a storm as this. The construction is πρὸς τὸ σημαινόμενον, τίς ἠχεῖται κτύπος; being equivalent to τίς αἰτία ἐστὶ τοῦ ἠχεῖσθαι τοιοῦτον κτύπον; Cp. El. 122, τίν᾿ ἀεὶ .. οἰμωγάν; Essay on Language § 42. p. 81. For the nominative, cp. Od. 5. 476-477, θάμνους | ἐξ ὁμύθεν πεφυῶτας· ὁ μὲν φυλίης, ὁ δ᾽ ἐλαίης. θεός is here used in the vague sense in which the Athenians referred the changes of the weather to a divine agency. Cp. Xen. Cyn. 8. 1, ὅταν νίφῃ ὁ θεός.

τῆσδε τῆς ὁδοῦ Lit. In re- gard of thy coming hither;' i. e. Has brought thee hither for a happy end. Cp. Τr. 26, τέλος δ᾽ ἔθηκε Ζεὺς ἀγώνιος καλῶς. The unaugmented form in the middle of the verse is doubtful. Some have read τῆσδ᾽ ἔθηκε, others ἧκε τῆσδε, for which cp. II. 1. 479, τοῖσιν δ᾽ ἴκμενον οὗρον ἴει ἑκάεργος Ἀπόλλων. For the habit of the MSS. in frequently omitting the augment, cp. supr. 438.

τί δ᾽ ἐστίν νέορτον αὐ; And what is the new emergency? Theseus anticipates some fresh incident, like the arrival of Creon or of Polynices.

ῥοπὴ βίου μοι i. e. τὸ τὸν βίον μοι ῥέπειν. The dative depends on the verbal notion in ῥοπή. It is my life that is verging to the grave. In O. T. 961, which has been compared with this line, ῥοπή has an active meaning.

μὴ ψεύσας θανεῖν i. e. τελέσαι πρὶν θανεῖν. For this inversion, see Essay on Language § 42. p. 80, and cp. Thuc. 1.20, δράσαντές τι καὶ κινδυνεῖσαι.

ἐν .. κεῖσαι On what sign of thine approaching end dost thou rely?

κείμαι, from meaning to lie, obtains the more general notion of resting, which is here used metaphorically with the preposition ev. Cp. the use of ἔγκειμαι in Dem. 294. 23. πολὺς τοῖς συμβεβηκόσιν ἔγκειται. He lays great stress on what has happened.

αὐτοὶ . . κήρυκες • The Gods announce it to me, and they are their own heralds.' 1512. ψεύδοντες προκειμένων] Failing me in none of the appointed signs. Cp. supra 94, 5, σημεῖα δ᾽ ἤξειν τῶνδέ μοι παρηγγύα, | ἢ σεισμόν, ἢ βροντὴν τιν', ἢ Διὸς σέλας. The omission of the article is poetical. Essay on Language § 21. p. 32. 1. 12.

αἱ πολλὰ βρονταί Sc. δηλοῦσιν τάδε. Here, as in 1502, the nominative is brought in without any exact connection with what precedes, as though the words What signs of this appear? had preceded. There is no reasonable doubt that πολλά is the true reading. The frequent thunderings. For other instances of adverbs attached to substantives, see Essay on Language § 24. p. 41. βρονταὶ διατελεῖς are to be joined in one expression, Prolonged thunderings.

* στράψαντα ἀνικήτου] Flashing from the invincible hand. The form στράπτω occurs in Apollon. Rhod. For a similar corruption, cp. O. T. 375, and v. rr.

Theseus has perceived the impression which the prophecies of Oedipus have made, and that none of his words are allowed to fall to the ground.

κείσεται Shall remain in store.

That this may afford thee a continual defence that is preferable to a host of armed men and the alliance of neighbouring powers.' 1525. Of the two explanations of γειτόνων given by the Scholiast, εἰ μὲν βαρυτόνως, (1) γειτόνων, τῶν Θηβαίων· εἰ δὲ περισπωμένως, (2) ἀντὶ τοῦ γειτνιῶν, ὁ τάφος, the latter is preferable, and agrees with the point of view maintained throughout the play, in which Colonus is regarded, not as a part of Athens, but as a neighbouring dependency. γειτόνων ας obj. gen. is too far from ἀλκήν. But (3) with δορός it gives a proper sense, suggesting the natural feeling of the insecurity of an alliance with neighbours. And although the hero Oedipus might be said γειτνιᾶν τοῖς 'Αθηναίοις, the word is not used with equal propriety of his grave.

ἐξάγιστα Sacred; i.e. set apart from men.

μηδὲ .. λόγῳ And may not be profaned by speech. μή is partly generic or hypothetical, and partly prohibitive. Essay on Language p. 48. Ι. Ε. μ. κ. λ. = And is of a nature not to be spoken of. Cp. infra 1641, μηδ' ἃ μὴ θέμις | λεύσσειν δικαιοῦν. For κινεῖν, cp. supra 624, τἀκίνητ᾽ ἔπη: Ο. Τ. 354.

ἀφικνῇ ARV3.

μόνος is probably to be construed with μαθήσει as well as with μόλῃς.

ὡς.. ἄν Since I would not declare them. See Essay on Language § 27. p. 43.

σώζε Keep safe; i. e. At once remember and avoid divulging. Cp. Aesch. Prom. 522-525, ἄλλου λόγου μέμνησθε· τόνδε δ᾽ οὐδαμῶς | καιρὸς γεγωνεῖν, ἀλλὰ συγκαλυπτέος | ὅσον μάλιστα· τόνδε γὰρ σώζων ἐγὼ | δεσμοὺς ἀεικεῖς καὶ δύας ἐκφυγγάνω. The

ἀφικνῇ Elmsley observes that the imperf. makes better sense than the aor., besides being essential to the metre. When you are on the point of coming. When you are coming to the end of life. The words probably refer to some custom unknown to us. ceremonies at the grave of Oedipus may have been performed by the Archon Basileus, to whom, as Plato says, certain solemn traditional rites were entrusted: Polit. 290 E, τῷ γὰρ λαχόντι βασιλεῖ φασὶ τῖδε τὰ σεμνύτατα καὶ μάλιστα πάτρια τῶν ἀρχαίαν θυσιῶν ἀποδεδόσθαι. Cp Lys. adv. Andoc. p. 103. Plutarch, Mor. p. 578 B, says that the tomb of Dirce was only known to the chief magistrate for the time being at Thebes.

ὁ δ᾽ ἀεί The distributive ἀεί generalizes the subject of the verb so as to make the expression applicable to the whole line of succession. For a similar transition, cp. Thuc. 2. 36, ἄρξομαι· ἀπὸ τῶν προγόνων .. τὴν γὰρ χώραν ἀεὶ οἱ αὐτοὶ οἰκοῦντες ἐλευθέραν δι᾽ ἀρετὴν παρέδοσαν.

ἀπ᾿ ἀνδρῶν instead of ὑπ᾿ ἀνδρῶν, because of the privative notion in ἀδῇον, as if it were τηρήσεις ἀπό. This city of thine shall be free from the ravages of the children of the dragon's teeth.' Cp. Pind. Fr. H. 1, ἡ Κάδμον ἢ Σπαρτῶν ἱερὸν γένος ἀνδρῶν : Isthm. 6 (7). 10.

αἱ δὲ μυρίαι πόλεις i. e. But any one of the numberless states that are.' There is here a trace of that conception of the number and variety of civil communities which played such an important part in Greek political speculation. Cp. Plat. Polit. 302 A: Eur. Hec. 306, ἐν τῷδε γὰρ κάμνουσιν αἱ πολλαὶ πόλεις.

τις is a vague subject, with allusion to Theseus and Athens. Cp. Thuc. 2.2, εἰ μή τις προκαταλήψεται: ἱ. ε. εἰ μὴ οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι καταλήψονται. The allusion to Athens accounts for εὐ οἰκῇ, which is properly applicable to a city. an A καθύβρισαν] καθυβρίζω is generally found in construction with accusative or genitive. Hence it has probably here an implied object which is most easily supplied from τις. city, no matter where, may lightly insult even one who dwells circumspectly.' Oedipus again touches lightly on the apparent improbability of Thebes becoming 1535 1540 1540. hostile (supr. 606, foll.), while Athens was governed prudently. ῥᾳδίως = ἐκ σμικροῦ λόγου: i.e. Be as politic as you will, you cannot avoid wars with your neighbours. Scholiast, κἂν δικαίως τις πολιτεύηται, πολλαὶ πόλεις ἀδίκως ἐπέρχονται. In the more recent explanations (e.g. Hermann's 'pleraeque civitates, etiam si quis eas bene regat, proclives sunt ad temeritatem') καθύβρισαν is made equivalent to ἐξύβρισαν. For ὕβριs of a city, cp. Thuc. 3. 39, εἴωθε δὲ τῶν πόλεων αἷς ἂν μάλιστα καὶ δι᾽ ἐλαχίστου ἀπροσδόκητος εὐπραξία ἔλθῃ, ἐς ὕβριν τρέπειν.

θεοὶ γὰρ .. τραπῇ For the Gods mark well, although they visit late, when men abandon reverence and become infatuated. This also has reference to Thebes. The impious quarrel of the brothers will bring a late retribution when Thebes shall invade Attica to her own defeat. For τὰ θεῖα, cp. Ο. Τ. 910, ἔρρει δὲ τὰ θεῖα.

Oedipus, after thus alluding to the impiety of his sons, delicately hints to Theseus, in a single line, that such a warning is an additional reason for keeping his sacred promise inviolate. He then in the following line apologises for having said even so much as this.

χώρον Essay on Language p. 22.

τοὐκ θεοῦ παρόν ‘What God now sends; i. e. The disturbance of the elements and the inward intimation or δαιμόνιον σημεῖον, as Socrates would have said, under the influence of which Oedipus is speaking. See note on l. 97.

μηδ' *ἐπιστρεφώμεθα And not turn backward. Reisig's conjecture, μηδ' ἔτ᾽ ἐντρεπώμεθα, and let us no longer delay, rests on the explanation of the Scholiast (comparing έντροπαλιζόμενος), which is not satisfactory. The ordinary meaning οἱ ἐντρέπεσθαι, To regard with respect or awe, is also inadmissible. For Oedipus is demanding attention to the sacred goal, which he himself is thinking of with reverence, though not with fear. If ἐντρέπεσθαι can mean to turn aside from a greater object out of regard for lesser ones (the thunder, etc.), the reading may be defended, (1) in this sense, or again, (2) with a reciprocal meaning, Let us not be paying regard to one another, but follow the leading of the god. Cp. Polybius, 31. 12. 6 (quoted by L. and S.), ἐνετράποντο ἐν ἑαυτοῖς. If not, it will be better to read μηδ' ἐπιστρεφώμεθα, and let us not look back, for which, cp. Hdt. 3. 156, ἐπιστρεφόμενος, ὡς δὴ ἀληθέως αὐτόμολος. This is adopted in the text. For another conj. μηδ' ἔτ' ἐκτρεπώμεθα, cp. Ar. Plut. 837, οἱ δ᾽ ἐξετρέποντο κοὐκ ἐδόκουν ὁρᾶν μ᾽ ἔτι.

For a new thing is coming to pass, and I am now your guide, who have been mine.'

καὶ μὴ ψαύετ' Nay, touch me not. καί adversative. The daughters cling to their father. Cp. supr. 1437.

ἥ τε νερτέρα θεός Persephone, whose name is omitted here and infra 1.1556. See Introd. pp. 281-282.

ὦ φῶς ἀφεγγές Ο light unseen, once I saw thee, and now for the last time my body feels thee.' The Greek love of sunlight is touchingly manifested in this valediction of the blind Oedipus to the light of day. In his first passionate despair he had prayed never more to see the light, on which, in his softened mood, he now casts one lingering look behind. O. T. 1183, ὦ φῶς, τελευταῖόν σε προσβλέψαιμι vûv. The edd. before Brunck read ποῦ, which is interpreted as expressing a feeling of exultation, that he who was blind now had the true sight. Formerly where wast thou?' (i.e. I had thee not): but now at the last I feel thee. πρόσθε πού ποτ᾽ ἦσθ᾽ ἐμόν] Erewhile methinks thou wast indeed mine.' In saying this he throws a momentary glance on the splendour of his former fortunes. Cp. О. Т. 1282-1283.

τὸν τελευταῖον βίον To end my life, and hide it in the dwelling of the unseen.' Musgrave's conjecture, ἤδη γὰρ ἕρπω τὴν τελευταίαν, βίον | κρύψων παρ' Ἅιδην, is ingenious, but unnecessary. For, as Elmsley says, Recte se habet haud dubie vulgata, licet loquendi genus novum videatur. Death is frequently spoken of in Sophocles rather as the entrance to a new state of existence than as an abrupt termination of the present one. Cp. Eur. Ion 1067, εἰς ἄλλας βιότου μορφὰς κάτεισι: Bacch. 1337, μακάρων δ᾽ ἐς αἷαν σὸν καθιδρύσει βίον. The words express rather the passing of Oedipus, than his death. Cp. βίου καταστροφή, 103.. ῥοπή, 1508. The last scene of his life (supra 583, τὰ λοίσθι᾽. . τοῦ βίου) may be described as hidden with the God of death. The verbal contradiction is analogous to that in another expression which has given trouble to interpreters, Phil. 1443, 4, ἡ γὰρ εὐσέβεια συνθνήσκει βροτοῖς | κἂν ζῶσι κἂν θάνωσιν οὐκ ἀπόλλυται: i.e. Follows them into the grave.

πρόσπολοί τε σοί And thy followers..:' the same who are called Θησείδαι, supra 1066 (cp. 1103), and some of whom are surrounding Theseus at this moment. The Ἄγγελος in the next scene is one of them.

κἀπ᾿ εὐπραξίᾳ i. e. And take occasion from your good fortune to remember me. Elmsley's conjecture, μεμνῇσθε (optative), though not necessary, has the merit of harmonizing with γένοισθε and εὐτυχεῖς. Cp. Od. 13.44-6, ὑμεῖς δ᾽ αὖθι μένοντες .. μή τι κακὸν μεταδήμιον εἴη. The apparent anti climax, Beloved of heaven, Fortunate, may be defended by comparing Hdt. 1. 32, where Solon prefers εὐτυχία to all else. 1556, foll. In a single strophe and antistrophe, the chorus address a solemn invocation to the powers of the lower world, Hades, Persephone, the Erinyes, the dog Cerberus, and Death, that Oedipus may have quiet consummation,' and pass without molestation to the Stygian home.

ἐπὶ βαρυαχεῖ ἐπιβαμήποτ᾽ ἐπίπονα μήτ᾽ ἐπὶ βαρυάχει Α. Reminiscences of the dochmiac movements of the last commation are mingled with iambic, trochaic, and glyconic measures. On this combination, see Christ, Metrik, § 477- The antistrophe is distinguished by the frequency of spondaic endings. This apparent irregularity may be removed by conjectural emendation, but it may possibly have been due to a purposed, retardation of the rhythm. For ср. supr. 412. For dochmiacs mixed with cretics and iambics in a similar place, cp. El. 1385 ff. and, for a recurrence of the paeonic rhythm, infr. 1682, 1709. ト いいいい |---|トー CICLトートー

λίσσομαι This has been changed το λίσσωμαι for the sake of the metre. Such a use of the subjunctive in the 1st pers. sing. can scarcely be paralleled from Attic Greek. But besides securing the correspondence of metre, it agrees with the context, and is not contrary to analogy.

*ἐπιπόνῳ.. δόμον That by no painful, by no greatly to be lamented doom, the stranger may reach the all-hiding nether region, and the Stygian home. 1561. The omission of the first μήτε, which Seidler proposed, restores the metre without disturbing the sense. Cp. Aesch. Ag. 532, Πάρις γάρ, οὔτε συντελὴς πόλις, ἐξεύχεται τὸ δρᾶμα τοῦ πάθους πλέον.

βαρυαχεῖ is treated by the Scholiast (see also v. rr.) as the Doric form of βαρυηχεῖ, a word which occurs several times, whereas there is only one doubtful instance, Aesch. Eum. 145, πάθος δυσαχές, of a compound derivative of ἄχος. The chorus, who have been frightened by the thunder, may be supposed to pray that the end of Oedipus may be neither painful nor alarming. In the report of the messenger they are reassured on this very point. Infra 1658, οὐ γάρ τις αὐτὸν οὔτε πυρφόρος θεοῦ | κεραυνὸς ἐξέπραξεν, οὔτε ποντία | θύελλα κινηθεῖσα τῷ τότ᾽ ἐν χρόνῳ. For a similar feeling about εὐθανασία, cp. Plat. Phaedo, 117 Ε, καὶ γὰρ ἀκήκοα, ὅτι ἐν εὐφημίᾳ χρὴ τελευτᾶν. (2) But the metre is in favour of βαρυἄχεῖ, which, to avoid tautology, must be explained to mean causing severe sorrow. By no painful, by no lamentable doom.' Cp. infr. 1663, 4, οὐ στενακτὸς οὐδὲ . . ἀλγεινός. For the redundant ἐπί, see Essay on Language § 19. p. 27.

A correction which presupposes corruption both in strophe and antistrophe must necessarily bedoubtful.

ἄρα, in accordance with his presentiment. Cp. 1585. For the metre, cp. El. 1384=1391. Others (with Musgr.) read ξένον ἐξανύσαι, and λόγος αἰὲν ἔχει, 1565 1568 1564-1566. Division of lines, νεκύων

νεκρῶν νεκύων LA. Tricl. corr.

ἀνικάτου ἀνικήτου Α. in the antistrophe.

For even although many sorrows have been coming on thee without bringing any good, it may be that a just Deity will again exalt thee.' For καί with a participle in the genitive absolute, having the force of καίπερ, cp. Εl. 657, τὰ δ᾽ ἄλλα πάντα καὶ σιωπώσης ἐμοῦ | ἐπαξιῶ σε δαίμον᾽ ὄντ᾿ ἐξειδέναι. ἱκνουμένων is in the imperfect tense, and the force of av extends to both parts of the sentence, as if it were πολλὰ μὲν ἂν πήματα μάταν ἱκνοῖτο, ὅμως δὲ κἂν αὔξοι σε δαίμων δίκαιος ὤν. The chorus now express their belief in the possibility of what Ismene had said, supra 394, νῦν γὰρ θεοί σ᾽ ὀρθοῦσι, πρόσθε δ' ἄλλυσαν. It is doubtful whether μάταν means (1) 'causelessly, as some have explained it, or (2) without result, i. e. bringing no good after them. The latter is more probable; i.e. Though no such result has been produced as yet. σε has been unnecessarily changed to σφε. The apostrophe gives liveliness to what would otherwise be a frigid sentiment. The change from the 3rd person to the 2nd is not more violent than the change a few lines below from the 2nd to the 3rd, 1568, ὦ.. σῶμα θηρός,... 1574, ὅν, κ.τ.λ. Cp. also Ο. ΤT. 1202, ff.

ὦ χθόνιαι θεαί These words, elsewhere applied to Demeter and Proserpine, seem here to be addressed to the Erinyes, to whom, as daughters of Earth and Darkness, they are properly applicable. Invocat Furias et Cerberum, hunc, ut ne teneat animam mortui in limine Ditis; illas, ut propitiae sint, nec puniant quae ille sine mala mente commisit. (Herm.) That Prosperine has been already invoked, is not, however, a conclusive reason against her being here again addressed with Demeter. Cp. O. T. 190, foll., 206, foll., where Artemis is twice invoked.

σῶμα.. θηρός And thou huge unconquered beast.

ὃν .. Ἀΐδᾳ Of whom they say that thou hast thy lair in the I olished gateway, and whom rumour ever declares to be snarling from thy den, a guardian invincible of Hades hall.'

πολυξέστοις The conjecture πολυξένοις is more convenient for the metre, and gives an apt enough sense. On the other hand, πολυξέστοις, ' Burnished, is a picturesque epithet for a gateway: and the tendency to spondaic endings in this antistrophe has been already noticed.

λόγος * ἐσαιὲν ἀνέχει Report constantly avers of thee. As the metre is doubtful (the corresponding verse in the strophe being corrupt), it appears unsafe to follow Tricilinius in altering ἀνέχει which looks idiomatic, to ἔχει: for which, however, cp. supra 674, and note, Hdt. 7. 26, τὸν ὑπὸ Φρυγῶν λόγος ἔχει ὑπὸ Ἀπόλλωνος ἀνακρεμασθῆναι. For the similar use of a compound of ἔχω, cp. Pind. Pyth. 1.96, ἐχθρὰ Φάλαριν κατέχει φάτις. And for ἀνέχω, cp. Pind. Nem. 7.89, εἰ δ᾽ αὐτὸ καὶ θεὸς ἀνέχοι. The correspondence of metre is kept by reading εὖ κατανύσαι in the strophe.

ὦ Γᾶς παῖ καὶ Ταρτάρου These words are addressed not to Cerberus, but in all probability to Death, who is invoked as a person more than once in Sophocles (Phil. 797, Aj. 854), cp. infr. 1578 and note. In what sense could Cerberus be called the child of Earth? In Hes. Theog. 211, foll., Death is the Child of Night, without a father, and Cerberus, ib. 310, is the son of Echidna and Typhon. But in these genealogies the poets used considerable freedom. And in the same spirit in which Sophocles calls the Erinyes daughters of Earth and Darkness, Death may be apostrophized as the son of Earth, who receives the bodies of the Dead, and Tartarus, which (cp. supra 1389), like Olympus, has less of a special and local meaning in Sophocles than in Homer. The name of Death is omitted, like that of Persephone, the Erinyes, and Cerberus, while the kingly title 'Αϊδωνεύς is given to Hades. Cp. supra 1548, and note.

ἐν καθαρῷ βῆναι (1) • To move in a clear space,' i. e. to leave the way clear: μὴ ἐμποδὼν βῆναι. A marked instance of oxymoron: cp. ἐκτὸς ὁμιλεῖ, Aj. 640, and see Essay on Language § 37. p. 70. Or (2) taking βῆναι in the sense of departing as in Ant. 120, ἔβα, κ.τ.λ., and ἐν καθαρῷ as proleptic, To go away and leave the coast clear =ἐκποδὼν βῆναι.

τὸν αἰένυπνον The reading of the Scholiast and Suidas, and of the earliest corrector of L, has sufficient authority, especially when recommended by the metre. αἰὲν ἄυπνον would certainly be applicable to Cerberus and might be suggested by the words ἀδάματον φύλακα παρ' Ἀΐδα. But the address to Death, as the God of the Eternal Sleep, is a more fitting termination of this ode.

One of the companions of Theseus (πρόσπολοι, supra 1553) returning before the rest, reports all that will ever be known, except to Theseus and his successors, of the departure of Oedipus.

πολίται Fellow-citizens. By the ξυνοικισμός under Theseus the Coloniatae were already citizens of Athens.

ξυντομωτάτως .. ὀλωλότα I might best succeed in brevity by saying Oedipus is gone.' The adverb contains the predicate. Essay on Language § 24. p. 40. The participial construction with λέξας is noticeable; cp. O. T. 465 and note.

ἃ δ᾽ ἦν τὰ πραχθέντ' supposes a simple clause, such as οὐ βραχέως φράσαι πάρεστιν, which, by the introduction of the antithesis between μύθος and ἔργον, is expanded into what follows.

οὔτε τάργ᾽ ὅσ᾽ ἦν ἐκεῖ Sc.

βραχέα ἦν. ἐκεῖ is added to supplement both clauses.

τὸν ἀεί The most probable interpretation of these words is that which separates them from βίοτον and supplies χρόνον. The expression is equivalent to ἐς τὸν ἀεὶ χρόνον. Cp. supra 1400, οἷον ἆρ᾽ ὁδοῦ τέλος, κ.τ.λ., where τέλος has the force of ἐς τέλος. For the omission of χρόνον, see Essay on Language § 39. p. 74, and cp. infra 1701, El. 1075, Tr. 80, which are best explained by supposing a similar ellipse, which, if in accordance with a vernacular conversational idiom, would not occasion ambiguity, notwithstanding the nearness of βίοτον here and σκότον infr. 1701.

The other interpretations: His life, such as it ever was (Herm.), His long-continued life, His lingering age (Schol. Eustath.), are inadmissible.

ἆρα = ἢ ἄρα, Was it then? i. e. Was it as he led us to expect?

τοῦτ᾽, the reading of Par. A, is preferred to ταῦτ', the reading of L, because the pronoun appears from its position to be the subject of ἐστίν ..

πρέπον, and not merely the object of ἀποθαυμάσαι.

κἀποθαυμάσαι καί, belonging to the whole clause, emphasizes the manner of the death of Oedipus as distinguished from the fact, which has been already told, and the previous circumstances, which are known to all. Ay, this it is which may well move your wonder.

παρών Having witnessed it. Essay on Language § 32. p. 55.

ὑφηγητῆρος Sc. ὄντος, Essay on Language § 9. p. 14.

ἐξηγούμενος Leading the way. Cp. supra 1520, χώρον.. έξηγησομαι.

τὸν καταρράκτην ὀδόν The precipitous threshold, rooted in earth with foundations of brass. The ὀδός (supra 57) is probably the entrance to a cleft in the native rock, and is called καταρράκτης because supposed to lead directly down to Tartarus. The χαλκά βάθρα are probably not a literal staircase, but, like the epithet χαλκόπους, supr. 57, recal the σιδηρεῖαί τε πύλαι καὶ χαλκέος οὐδός of Homer's description. See Introduction. For this meaning of βάθρα in the plural, cp. Eur. Tro. 47, ὦ .. πόλις.. ἦσθ᾽ ἂν ἐν βάθροις ἔτι, and for γῆθεν ἐρριζωμένον, cp. Od. 13. 163. of the ship changed by Poseidon to an islet, λᾶαν ἔθηκε καὶ ἐρρίζωσεν ἔνερθεν.

*πολυσχίστων This conjecture of Heath's has been universally accepted. Cp. Plato. Phaed. 168 A. The word was no doubt descriptive of the paths actually converging towards the χαλκοῦς ὀδός, and the language indicates the precision with which the blind Oedipus followed the guidance of the God.

κρατῆροs Elmsley is probably right in saying, Crater, de quo nunc agitur, lapideus fuisse videtur, ἀνδρὸς εὔχειρος τέχνη, ut illi, quorum mentio fit v. 472. It may have been fabled that this bowl received the blood of the sacrifice which confirmed the league of Theseus and Pirithous, and some record of their agreement may have been engraven on it. Cp. Eur. Suppl. 1202, ἔγγραψον ὅρκους τρίποδος ἐν κοίλῳ κύτει. Where the compact of Theseus and Pirithous is registered, never to be annulled. The bowl was probably at the entrance to one of the cavities in the rock.

6. Midway between this and the fragment of rock from Thoricus, and the hollow pear-tree and the sarcophagus of stone.' The traditional text may mean, Right opposite to this and the Thorician rock, away from the hollow pear-tree and stone tomb. But Brunck's easy correction makes a better context. The object is to define accurately the exact position of Oedipus when last seen, corresponding probably to the place where rites were since performed in his honour. Cp. supr. 1532 and note, and 477.

There does not appear to be sufficient reason for construing these words with Hermann, 'The hill which commands a view of the temple of Demeter Chloe. Although the temple near the Acropolis, mentioned by Pausanias and the Scholiast, cannot be meant, there may well have been other places in the neighbourhood sacred to the same Goddess. Transl. The eminence, full in view, of Demeter, who makes the tender blade to grow. The knoll, a quarter of a mile to the east of Colonus, has some remains of buildings, and is plentifully supplied with water at the present day. See Introd. p. 283.

τάσδ᾽ ἐπιστολάς Abstract for concrete, Brought these commands,' i.e. The things thus commanded.

ταχεῖ .. σὺν χρόνῳ With time that quickly passed, i. e. With despatch. Cp. supr. 7 and note.

ᾗ νομίζεται (1) As is customary, sc. in immediate prospect of death. Cp. Eur. Alc. 158. ἐπεὶ γὰρ ᾔσθεθ᾽ ἡμέραν τὴν κυρίαν | ἥκουσαν, ὕδασι ποταμίοις λευκὸν χρόα | ἐλούσατ᾽, ἐκ δ᾽ ἑλοῦσα κεδρίνων δόμων | ἐσθῆτα κόσμον τ᾽ εὐπρεπῶς ἠσκήσατο. Or (2) Such raiment as is customary, viz. at the shrine of the Eumenides. The ἔποικος would supply what was necessary: supra 506.

'And when all was doing to his heart's content, and no part of his desire was now neglected.' δρῶντος is a singular instance of the abstract use of the active participle, noticed in the Essay on Language $ 30. p. 51. Cp. supra 1220, τοῦ θέλοντος, etc. This is the only satisfactory explanation of the passage. As often happens, the second line, κοὐκ ἦν, κ.τ.λ., states negatively what is affirmed in the first.

For ἀργόν, cp. Ο. Τ. 287 and n.

Ζεὺς χθόνιος The rumbling noise beneath the earth accompanying an earthquake is attributed to Hades, as the thunder to Zeus. For this name of Hades, cp. Hom. Il. 9. 457, Ζεύς τε καταχθόνιος καὶ ἐπαινὴ Περσεφόνεια : Hes. Op. 465: Aesch. Suppl. 157. And for χθόνιος βροντή, Aesch. Prom. 993, 4, Eur. Hipp. 1201, Phoen. 1181-1182, ἐκτύπησε δὲ | χθών, ὥστε δεῖσαι πάντας.

ῥίγησαν Homeric word: Il. 12.208, Τρώες δ᾽ ἐρρίγησαν, ὅπως ἴδον αἰόλον ὄφιν.

οὐδ᾽ ἀνίεσαν And ceased not from. Cp. 1. 1610. Mr. Palmer takes the words differently. In his note on l. 1636, he says, It was unbecoming in a man of any nobleness of spirit to give way to loud lamentation; therefore it is said even of the daughters, οὐδ᾽ ἀνίεσαν, κ.τ.λ. But the moment for silence and reserve is not yet come, and the natural feelings are for the time unchecked (cp. 1620, foll.). Compare Hom. Od. 16. 213, foll. "Ως ἄρα φωνήσας κατ᾿ ἄρ᾽ ἔζετο, Τηλέμαχος δὲ | ἀμφιχυθεὶς πατέρ᾽ ἐσθλὸν ὀδύρετο, δάκρυα λείβων. | ἀμφοτέροισι δὲ τοῖσιν ὑφ᾽ ἵμερος ὥρτο γόοιο. | κλαῖον δὲ λιγέως, ἀδινώτερον ἤ τ' οἰωνοί, | φῆναι ἡ αἰγυπιοὶ γαμψώνυχες, οἷσί τε τέκνα | ἀγροταὶ ἐξείλοντο πάρος πετεηνὰ γενέσθαι. | ὡς ἄρα τοίγ᾽ ἐλεεινὸν ὑπ᾿ ὀφρύσι δάκρυον εἶβον. It is to be remembered, too, that this scene is only reported, not represented on the stage. That οὐδ' ἀνίεσαν has probably a different meaning in O. T. 1277, is no objection to the above rendering.

παμμήκεις Long and loud. μακρός has continually the meaning of loud, in connection with sounds. But here there is probably also the further association, Prolonged.'

ὡς ἀκούει .. ἐξαίφνης When all at once he hears....' φθόγγον . . πικρόν] • The piteous sound.' Ant. 423-424, κἀνακωκύει πικρᾶς | ὄρνιθος ὀξὺν φθόγγον.

πτύξας ἐπ᾿ αὐταῖς χεῖρας Folding his arms about them. For χεῖρες in this sense, cp. El. 1226.

All that was mine is at an end,' and therefore also my dependence on your filial care.

τὴν δυσπόνητον τροφήν] The sad laborious nursing ye have spent on me.' τροφή is here used actively, as in Εl. 1143, οἴμοι τάλαινα τῆς ἐμῆς πάλαι τροφῆς | ἀνωφελήτου, τὴν ἐγὼ θάμ᾿ ἀμφὶ σοὶ | πόνῳ γλυκεῖ παρέσχον.

σκληρὰν μέν σκληράν is added in apposition, and is then opposed with μέν to what follows. It has been troublesome, that I know well, my daughters: but then the one word "love" has power to cancel all this trouble. And love ye have had from none in greater measure than from me, of whom bereft ye will pass what now remains to you of life.

τοιαῦτ᾽ .. ἔκλαιον i. e. τοιαῦτα .. κλαίοντες ἔλεγον.

ὠρώρει βοή Homeric expression. Il. 18. 498, ἔνθα δὲ νεῖκος | ὠρώρει.

θώϋξεν Urged him with shouting. The omission of the augment in this case with a consonant preceding makes it probable that in the other cases in this speech, e. g. 1606, κτύπησε, 1607, ῥίγησαν, 1608, κλαῖον, the augment is dropped Epicè and not elided after the preceding vowel. The MSS. omit the augments very frequently. Cp. supr. 438 and v. rr. For the construction, cp. supra 1598, ἀΰσας παῖδας.

ὥστε .. τρίχας So that the hair of all stood up in the alarm of sudden fear. ἐξαίφνης belongs both to the participle and the verb, and the dative φόβῳ is in construction with both. Cp. Tr. 175-176, ἐκπηδᾷν ἐμὲ φόβῳ ταρβοῦσαν.

στῆσαι.. τρίχας is said, as in φῦσαι ὀδύντας and the like language, at- tributing to the subject, as the ἀρχή of his actions, even mechanical and unconscious processes. Cp. supr. 149, and note. Essay on Language § 30. p. 52.

πολλὰ πολλαχή Shak. Ham. 1.5, Hic et ubique? then we ll shift our ground. 1627, foll. Cp. Eur. Alc. 253, Χάρων μ᾽ ἤδη καλεῖ· τί μέλλεις; ἐπείγου· σὺ κατείργεις τάδε. τοῖα σπερχόμενος ταχύνει : Ar. Lys. 606, ὁ Χάρων σε καλεῖ, σὺ δὲ κωλύεις ἀνάγεσθαι. In the present case not Charon but Hermes, cp. supr. 1548, or the δαίμων of Oedipus, is probably meant. The absence of any name, as in several of the concludiug passages of this play, adds to the solemnity of the effect.

πάλαι.. βραδύνεται • You are already much to blame for our delay.' 1632. δός μοι χερὸς σῆς πίστιν ἀρχαίαν τέκνοις] I pray thee give to my children thy right hand, that time-honoured pledge. Various meanings have been given to ἀρχαίαν. Πίστιν ἀρχαίαν dicit, quae firma maneat, olim antiqua futura. Sic Aeschylus, Agam. 578, θεοῖς λάφυρα ταῦτα τοῖς καθ' Ἑλλάδα δόμοις ἐπασσάλευσαν ἀρχαῖον γάνος. (Herm.) Πίστιν ἀρχαίαν] Antiquam, spectatam. (Dind.) 'ἀρχαίαν, die alte, bisher bewiesene (nach 632 f.). (Schneidewin) It is simpler and better to explain the epithet as a general one; i. e. The right hand, which from time immemorial has been a solemn pledge amongst mankind. Cp. Eur. Med. 21, 2. ἀνακαλεῖ δὲ δεξιᾶς | πίστιν μεγίστην: Plat. Legg. 7,793 B. See also Tr. 1181-1182.

ὑμεῖς τε, παῖδες, τῷδε Haec verba διὰ μέσου esse ostendunt imperativi δóς et καταίνεσον, quae ad eandem personam spectant. (Herm.) Cp. Thuc. 5.17, ὤμοσαν, ἐκεῖνοί τε πρὸς τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους, τάδε.

τελεῖν.. ἀεί ‘But that in all that it lies in you to do, you will act with kindly care for their best good." Cp. infr. 1773.

οὐκ οἴκτου μέτα Without giving way to grief; i. e. With no weak expression of feeling, which would have been of evil omen for Athens. Aesch. S. c. Τ. 51, οἶκτος δ᾽ οὔτις ἦν διὰ στόμα· σιδηρόφρων γὰρ θυμὸς ἀνδρείᾳ φλέγων ἔπνει, λεόντων ὡς Ἄρη δεδορκότων. Οἱ the conjectures (which are quite unnecessary) ὄγκου (Musgr.) is preferable to ὄκνου.

Cp. the action of Socrates in Plat. Phaedo, 116 Β, τὰς μὲν γυναῖκας καὶ τοὺς παῖδας ἀπιέναι ἐκέλευσεν, αὐτὸς δὲ ἦκε παρ᾿ ἡμᾶς.

τλάσας .. τὸ γενναῖον

μηδὲ φωνούντων κλύειν Sc. ἃ μὴ θέμις ἐστὶ κλύειν. For μή, see Essay on Language § 29. p. 48, and cp. Ant. 546, μηδ' ἃ μὴ θιγες, κ.τ.λ.

ὁ κύριος κύριος here. as in l. 288 supra, has the general sense of sovereign, and also a particular reference to the case in point = Whose right herein is perfect.'

μανθάνων Being cognisant of.

ἀστακτί i. e. ἀστακτὶ λείβοντες δάκρυα For this condensation, see Essay on Language § 43. p. 82.

στραφέντες i. e. 'Returning towards the spot.'

ἐξαπείδομεν "We saw, as from afar off.' Schol. ἴδιον αὐτοῦ τὸ πολλαῖς κεχρῆσθαι προθέσεσι· παραφυλακτέον δὲ πῶς καὶ τὰ ἄρρητα ὑπ᾿ ὄψιν ἤγαγεν ὁ ἄγγελος ἐκ τῶν σχημάτων μηνύων.

τὸν ἄνδρα, κ.τ.λ. The anacoluthon helps to mark the suddenness of the disappearance. The messenger begins as if he were speaking of Oedipus, he then corrects himself to say that Oedipus was no more seen, but Theseus only, who was holding his hand before his eyes. For a similar turn of sentence, cp Hom. Od. 5. 265, fol., ἐν δὲ οἱ ἀσκὸν ἔθηκε θεὰ μέλανος οἴνοιο | τὸν ἕτερον, ἕτερον δ᾽ ὕδατος μέγαν.

ἔπειτα.. βαιόν A little afterwards, like βαιὸν. ἔνερθεν, Phil. 20. 1654-1655. Shak. Ham. 1. 5, O all ye host of heaven! O earth! what else? And shall I couple hell?'

τὸν θεῶν Ὄλυμπον Cp. О. Т. 867, and note.

So the prayer of the chorus is fulfilled: supra 1561.

ἐξέπραξεν Eur. Hec. 515, πῶς καί νιν ἐξεπράξατ'; 1661-1662. But either a guardian from the gods, or the lower part of earth that holds the dead, opening kindly for him, where there is no more pain.

ἀλύπητον has been generally taken causatively to mean Without giving him pain; but even if this meaning were admissible, which is doubtful, there would be an awkwardness in having two secondary predicates, εὔνουν and ἀλύπητον. The position of the word indicates that it is to be taken as attributive. ἀλάμπετον, unillumined, the marginal reading of L, may possibly be right. Elmsley, who was doubtful on this point, gives the above meaning, Free from pain,' to ἀλύπητον, ὅπου μὴ λυπεῖταί Cp. supra 955, θανόντων δ᾽ οὐδὲν ἄλγος ἅπτεται.

στενακτός and ἀλγεινός have been explained to mean Groaning and Suffering pain. But the more usual meaning gives a better and more consistent sense. An object of mourning. Giving pain to others. Cp. O.Τ. 1237, 8, τῶν δὲ πραχθέντων τὰ μὲν | ἄλγιστ᾽ ἄπεστιν. His departure was not accompanied with mourning, nor with sickness, so as to be a spectacle of pain, but it was a spectacle of admiration, unsurpassed. Cp. Plato, Phaedo, 59 Α, οὐδὲν πάνυ μοι ἐλεεινὸν εἰσῄει, ὡς εἰκὸς ἂν δόξειεν εἶναι παρόντι πένθει ..

ἀλλ᾽ ἀτέχνως ἄτοπόν τί μοι πάθος παμῆν.

οὐκ ἂν παρείμην I do not care to gain the assent of those who think me unwise in this; i. e. I am contented to hold my own opinion. Cp. Aj. 1038-1039, ὅτῳ δὲ μὴ τάδ᾽ ἐστὶν ἐν γνώμῃ φίλα, | κεῖνος τ᾽ ἐκεῖνα στεργέτω, κἀγὼ τάδε. And for παρίεμαι, with accusative, meaning To obtain the consent of,' cp. Plat. Legg. 742 Β, παρέμενος τοὺς ἄρχοντας : 951 Α, τοὺς νομοφυλάκας παρέμενος.

χοί προπέμψαντες φίλων; Sc. αὐτόν. The plural might refer to Theseus alone (supra 1087, and note), but probably includes his attendants, with the exception of the Ἄγγελος.

1670, foll. The metres of the following lament are rendered difficult by the corruptions, which in this, as in other Greek plays. are more frequent toward the end, whether from the weariness of the scribe, the rubbing of the outside leaf, or, in a case like the present, from one or both of these causes combined with the obscurity of style and metre. 1670 This commos, like that in supr. 117-253, consists of two principal parts, of which the latter is wilder and more broken. In the former of these dactylic measures resembling supr. 229 ff. are combined with trochaic. iambic, and cretic rhythms; the latter is trochaic and iambic. α'. (1) 1670 6=1696-1703. 10 5 5 D T しかし ✓ トー IC ں α'. (2) 1677-1678 = 1704,5. α'. (3) 1679-1691 = 1706-1719. C トー α΄. (4) ἐπῷδος. (x). (y). cctca CCCIし​トー D10100110101010 5ーー JCCICCICトー トーート​Cla トリートー おい​しーしー D 1CCICI 2. 3, Ionic 1, [5], 6, 7, trochaic.

ἀνακλώμενα. 4, 5, 8, logaoedic. 1, 2, 3, 5, trochaic. 4, 6, logaoedic. : β΄. 1724-1736-1737-1750. 5 10 103 CCCICICI しかし​ICICI しかし 1010 기 1670, foll. Ah me! it is ours, unhappy! on all accounts to mourn our father's fatal blood running in our veins. For him we had erewhile that long incessant toil, and at the last we have to tell of things beyond the reach of thought, which we have seen and suffered.' For οὐ τὸ μέν, ἄλλο δὲ μή, cp. Eur. Phoen. 1641, ΑΝ. οὐ γὰρ τὸ μέν σοι βαρὺ κακῶν, τὸ δ᾽ οὐ βαρύ, | ἀλλ᾽ εἰς ἅπαντα δυστυχὴς ἔφυς, πάτερ.

αἷμα is here primarily Bloodrelationship, with perhaps a secondary association (pointed by the word ἄλαστον) from the other meaning of Blood-guiltiness.' Cp. O. Τ. 1400, αἱ τοὐμὸν αἷμα τῶν ἐμῶν χειρῶν ἄπο | ἐπίετε πατρός.

The form ᾧτινι (= ὅτῳ) is rare, and Badham has conjectured ὥτινε. But the dative properly expresses the connection between the two parts of the sentence. Essay on Language § 12. p. 18. And Elmsley has quoted Eur. Hipp. 903, τὸ μέντοι πρᾶγμ᾽, ἐφ᾽ ᾧτινι στένεις | οὐκ οἶδα: Arist. Pax 1278, σὺ γὰρ εἰπέ μοι VOL. I. οἷστισι χαίρεις.

For παροίσομεν, cp. Hdt. 9. 26, καινὰ καὶ παλαιὰ παραφέροντες ἔργα,

παθούσα Το avoid the discrepancy of terminations several critics read παθόντε. But there does not seem to be sufficient ground for deserting the MSS. Hermann rightly says, 'Nesciebat Brunckius harum formarum usum ad sonorum suavitatem attemperari, quum putavit Sophoclem scripsisse ἰδόντε καὶ πάθοντε.

Although οὐκ ἔστιν (see v. rr.) may be explained with reference to the manner of the end, which was inconceivable, it is more natural that Antigone should say here, You may guess what has happened, i. e. the main fact that he is gone. By merely omitting οὐκ with Hermann, we obtain a line like Aj. 951 (which conveys a similar feeling), ἄγαν ὑπερβριθὲς ἄχθος ἤνυσαν, CICL|卜​(ICICI. L. 1704 in the antistrophe, as it appears in the Ff MSS. may be so scanned (see v. rr. on p. 436): but not without too great a stress upon the augment before πρ in ἔπραξεν. It is on the whole more likely that οὐκ in 1677 is a corruption of if, and that if has dropped out in 1704. Another conjecture, which secures a pure iambic line, is Χ. τί δ' ἔστιν; Α.

ἔστιν *εὖ μὲν εἰκάσαι, φίλοι. Cp. also O. T. 1308, foll. 1678 ff. 'Cho. He is gone? Ant. Even as heart could wish. What more could be desired for him, whom neither war nor the sea hath smitten, but viewless regions carried off and rapt in some mysterious doom? While on our helpless eyes a horror of night is fallen. For how shall we maintain our life in misery unendurable? Wandering in some far (or southern) land or (roaming) over ocean's billow?' ὡς .. λάβοις] i. e. ὡς μάλιστ᾽ ἂν λάβοις τὸ βῆναι, εἰ πόθῳ λάβοις. As you would above all choose the mode of your departure if you could choose by desire. For the use of λάβοις, cp. Αj. 265, πότερα δ' ἄν, εἰ νέμοι τις αἵρεσιν, λάβοις ; For πόθῳ, cp. supra 1106, σὺν πόθῳ γὰρ ἡ χάρις. Canter's conjecture ἐν πόθῳ is very plausible, but not necessary.

πόντος Cp. 1659, οὔτε ποντία θύελλα κινηθεῖσα τῷ τότ᾽ ἐν χρόνῳ. Allusions to the elements are characteristic of the language of this period. Essay on Language § 52. p. 98.

*φερόμεναι Carrying him away, is adopted as the simplest alteration of the text which satisfies the metre, while giving a recognized form. The middle voice, for which see Essay on Language § 31, b. p. 53, is better than the passive φερόμενον.

ἀπίαν Either (1) Distant, the word being here used in a different sense from that in l. 1303, γῆς ὅσοιπερ Απίας | πρῶτοι καλοῦνται, although the quantity is the same, whereas it is short in Hom. Od. 7. 25, τηλόθεν ἐξ ἀπίης γαίης. Οι (2) τιν᾿ Ἀπίαν γᾶν may mean somewhere in the Peloponnese, Antigone thinking of Argos as a possible refuge.

κλυδώνα Accusative of the space travelled over. Essay on Language § 16, P. 23. 1687,8. βίου.. τροφάνisa periphrasis for βίον. Cp. 1736, αἰῶνα τλάμον᾿ ἕξω: Εl. 1183, φεῦ τῆς ἀνύμφου δυσμόρου τε σῆς τροφῆς. 1689 ff. Modern editors rightly give these, and also the corresponding verses, 1715 ff. to Ismene, with whose character they agree. Cp. Ant. 544-545, 548. A new movement commences, which serves as ἐπῳδός to the preceding. The same doubt occurs here as in supr. 182 ff., 197 ff., whether the two sets of lines, 1689-1695, 1715-1722, like those which precede and follow them, are to be regarded as strictly antistrophic. That the doubt occurs in two places so nearly similar, is of itself a ground for caution. And both rὸ φέρον ἐκ θεοῦ in 1693 and ἄγαν οὕτω in 1694 are idiomatic Greek.

πατρὶ ξυνθανεῖν γεραίῳ Το lie in death with my aged father.' Cp. Phil. 1443, ἡ γὰρ εὐσέβεια συνθνήσκει βροτοῖς. By changing ἕλοι τo ἕλοιτο (cp. О. Т. 887, Aj. 397), we obtain an Ionic rhythm, not unsuited to the person of Ismene.

Tricl. and several editors read διδύμα . . ἀρίστα. This is the slightest of at least six changes which have been made in 11. 1689-1695, 1715-1722, to secure a metrical correspondence which remains defective.

τὸ φέρον ἐκ θεοῦ καλῶς φέρειν χρή] You must bear with fortitude the lot whose direction is from heaven. φέρειν, as in the frequent φέρειν εἰς, expresses tendency or intention. φέρειν ἐκ occurs only here; but cp. Eur. Ι. Α. 69, ὅτου πνοαὶ φέροιεν Ἀφροδίτης φίλα: Hdt. 1. 159, φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ ἀδύτου γενέσθαι φέρουσαν πρὸς τὸν Ἀριστόδικον. For the rare form of verse, troch. trim. brachycat., cp. Aesch. 977, 790, supr. 1240, and Eur. Hel. 243, H. F. 120, where the 1st arsis is resolved, as here.

οὗ τοι κατάμεμπτ᾽ ἔβητον You have no cause to complain of your lot. More literally, The point at which you have arrived is not to be found fault with. The chorus mean to say, You, and your father's memory, are safe in the hands of Theseus. Cp. infr. 1737-1740. For the transference of the verb of motion, more frequent, however, with the adjective than the adverb, see Essay on Language p. 97, and cp. El. 979, εὖ βεβηκόσιν.

Ant. Then' (if to be thus is well) there is such a thing as longing for that which is not well;' i.e. Then it is possible to wish evil back again, for even what in itself was nowise loveable, was yet beloved, whilst I held him too in my arms.' For this use of ἦν in inference, see Essay on Language §. 32. p. 55, and cp. supra 117, τίς ἄρ᾽ ἦν; ποῦ ναίει;

τὸ φίλον That which is dear' (in the abstract). See Essay on Language § 21. p. 34, and Simon. fr. εἰ δὲ τοὶ δεινὸν τὸ γε δεινὸν ἦν.

Cp. infr. 1714, Il. 22.426, ὡς ὄφελεν θανέειν ἐν χερσὶν ἐμῇσιν. Ff2

τὸν ἀεί (sc. χρόνον). For evermore. This explanation, which is justified by the note on 1584, gives a better rhythm to this line.

οὐδὲ γέρων, κ.τ.λ. Even old as thou wert (or art) thou shalt never be forgotten by our love. Cp. supra 1600, πατρὶ συνθανεῖν γεραίῳ. It has been observed (on l. 1371 of the O. T.) that the soul in Hades was imagined as having all the characteristics of the person at the time of death and nothing can be more natural than that Antigone in the first moment of her sorrow should speak of her father as if he still needed tendance and care. This touch of nature extends to modern life and poetry. Shak. King John, 3.4, Const. But now shall canker sorrow eat my bud | And chase the native beauty from his cheek, | And he will look as hollow as a ghost, As dim and meagre as an ague's fit, | And so he'll die; and, rising so again | When I shall meet him in the court of heaven | I shall not know him: therefore never, never | Shall I behold my pretty Arthur more. His age did not lessen their affection in life, nor should it diminish their mourning for him in death. For the omission of the participle, see Essay on Language § 39. p. 72.

Elmsley's ἔπραξεν ; ΑΝ. *ἐξέπραξεν is preferable to ΧΟ. ἔπραξεν οὖν ; ΑΝ. ἔπραξεν (the emendation of Triclinius), (1) because preserving an exact correspondence to l. 1677 in the division of the line between the persons: (2) because introducing no unnecessary word: (3) the additional emphasis in the reply is in keeping with the mood of Antigone. Cp. Aj. 968, ὧν γὰρ ἠράσθη τυχεῖν | ἐκτήσαθ᾽ αὑτῷ, θάνατον ὅνπερ ἤθελεν.

εὐσκίαστον With kindly shadow. Cp. supra 406, and note.

Schneidewin compares the wish of Solon, Fr. 21, μηδέ μοι ἄκλαυστος θάνατος μόλοι, κ.τ.λ.

*ἀνὰ γάρ Hermann's conj. is adopted as the best hitherto.

ἀφανίσαι Το quench.

†ιώ· μὴ.. μοι The most probable explanation of these words is Hermann's, who, for the sake of metre, reads τῷ for ἰώ. (Quare) utinam ne in peregrina terra cupivisses mori, sed mortuus esses ita mihi desertus. Quoniam enim sentit tanto minus leniri dolorem suum posse, quod ne tumulus quidem patris sibi relictus sit, optat ut ille ne quaesivisset hanc apud exteros mortem, sed obiisset potius ita desertus ignotusque, ut ante cum ipsa per terras vagus errabat, quo saltem sepelire eum et justa facere in tumulo posset.' This interpretation supposes the use of μή with an historical tense of the indicative to express a strong negative wish, as has been already suggested in the note on supra 540-541. Ср. Aesch. Cho. 363 ff. This uncommon use would be here softened by exppses, suggesting ἐχρῆν σε, ας ἐπωφέλησα in 541 was suggestive of ὤφελες. On the other hand, the words in 1714, especially when compared with 1717, Plat. Phaedo, 58 C, ἀλλ' ἐρῆμος ἐτελεύτα φίλων, may very naturally mean, As it is, thou diedst unattended by me, while the positive expression of a wish by the past tense is more doubtful than the negative. And Mr. Palmer, reading lú μοι, γῆς ἐπὶ ξένας, κ.τ.λ., gives this turn to the sentence: Ah me! thou didst desire to die in a foreign land; yet thou hast thus died deserted by me. So also Schneidewin, omitting μή. But such a resumption of the beginning of the speech is too inartistic and abrupt for Sophocles. It is therefore better to follow Hermann and render, Would that thou hadst not cared to die in a strange land, but hadst died as thou wert, all alone upon my hands.'

See v. rr. These three lines, which are defaced by the evident interpolation from 1735 infra (first struck out by Lachmann, cp. supr. 769 v. rr.), have been given by the editors to Ismene. The MSS. often mix the persons in this play.

For the metre of this and of 1736 in the epode of a commos, cp. Ant. 880, θέμις ὁρᾶν ταλαίνᾳ.

ἔλυσεν τὸ τέλος βίου is a condensed expression for κατέλυσε καὶ ἐτελεύτησε τὸν βίον. Cp. τὸν τελευταῖον βίον | κρύψων, supra 1551.

τὰν χθόνιον ἑστίαν The dark home.'

μῶν οὐχ ὁρᾷς Sc. ἀθέμιτον εἶναι. There are two reasons. It is forbidden to know the place: and no man saw him die, or buried him (1732).

τί τόδ' ἐπέπληξας means this rebuke?' What

ἄγε με Siquidem ἄγε με an ἀγέτω μέ τις legitur, nihil refert. (Elmsley.) ἐπενάριξον] “Take me thither (who will), and then I care not if you kill me at his tomb.' Cp. Eur. Hec. 504.

ποῖ Sc. ἐλθοῦσα. For the condensation, see Essay on Language § 43. p. 81.

The interchange in strophe B' was between Antigone and Ismene: in the antistrophe it is between single members of the chorus and Antigone. The number of interlocutions assigned to the chorus, 15 counting from 1667, shows that here as in other κομμοί the choreutae took part successively in the dialogue, but in what order they did so can hardly be determined.

The change from the imperfect to the aorist is necessary to the sense, which can only be that the solemn promise of Theseus guarantees them from all ill. And Hermann's conjecture, ΧΟ. καὶ πάρος ἀπέφυγε. ΑΝ. τί; ΧΟ. τὰ σφῶν τὸ μὴ πίτνειν κακῶς, gives a subject to πίτνειν, preserves the same distribution of the persons as in the strophe, and avoids the inverted order οἱ σφῶν τὸ μή, κ.τ.λ.

I know that. What then have you further in your thoughts? Why then do you trouble your thoughts farther?' On the prep. in comp., see Essay on Language § 18. pp. 26, 7. There is no need of any change; and the conjecture ὅπερ νοεῖς is based on a misconception of the meaning required. Hermann objects that there cannot be degrees of thinking; but this is hypercritical : cp. Plat. Theaet. 165 C, D. Qy. ὑπερπονεῖς ?

See v. rr. The words καὶ πάρος ἐπεί might perhaps be explained to mean καὶ πάρος (ὴν χρόνος) ἐπεὶ (μόγος ἔσχε). But as a syllable is required, it is reasonable to suppose some corruption, and Wunder's conjecture adopted in the text is not improbable. Cp. El. 517. Erewhile, too, ye were oppressed by weariness. See L. and S. 5. ν. ἐπέχω, VI. 2.

It was then beyond my strength, but now it overwhelms me.' The language anticipates the metaphor of a sea of troubles, which appears in the next line. For ὕπερθεν, cp. κατάκρας, supr. 1242.

The words ναὶ . . φεῦ in the MSS. here, see v. rr., have nothing to correspond to them in the strophe. Dind. justly supposes them to have arisen from the corruption of AN. al ai into ΑΝ. ναὶ νvaí, and subsequent interpolations.

ποῖ μόλωμεν Schndw. ingeniously conj. ποι μένωμεν (μενοῦμεν?), comparing El. 958, ποὶ γὰρ μενεῖς ῥάθυμος, εἰς τίν᾿ ἐλπίδων | βλέψασ᾽ ἔτ᾿ ὀρθὴν; But ποῖ μόλωμεν agrees better with the tone of 1749-1750, which is rather one of distraction than of impatience.

ἐλπίδων.. *τίν' Cp. El. 958-959, quoted in the preceding note. 1751 ff. These three anapaestic lines make the transition from the commos to the exodos, which begins with the return of Theseus, and consists of four anapaestic systems, 1754-1758, 1759-1767, 1768-1775, and 1776-1778. The anapaests are of the freer kind; see esp. 1577-1578, 1760, 1771, 1776. Theseus and his Athenian attendants are now seen approaching, and their coming suggests to the chorus a new reason why the lament of the maidens should cease.

The genitive θρήνων is the harder reading, and the absolute use of the imperative is more forcible. Cp. Phil. 1275, παθε, μὴ λέξῃς πέρα.

ἐν οἷς γὰρ .. χρή] (1) • For it is wrong to make lamentation amongst those for whom the favour of the dead is laid up in store as a public benefit. That may well provoke their anger.' ἐν οἷς = ἐν τούτοις, οἷς; i. e. the blessing which Oedipus has left for the Athenians is not to be disturbed by violent mourning in their presence. For ξυνά, cp. Pind. Isthm. 8.46, φαντὶ γὰρ ξυν᾿ ἀλέγειν | καὶ γάμον Θέτιος ἄνακτε. Or (2), the meaning may be more general. It is wrong and provocative of Wrath to continue mourning in a case where the favour of the powers beneath rests with the dead. For ξυνά, sc. τῷ θανόντι, cp. Αj. 577, τὰ δ᾽ ἄλλα τεύχη κοίν᾿ ἐμοὶ τεθάψεται. And, for ἐν οἷς, Εl. 141-142, ἀεὶ στενάχουσα διόλλυσαι, | ἐν οἷς ἀνάλυσίς ἐστιν οὐδεμία κακῶν. For the sentiment, cp. supr. 1556 ff., 1663 ff. But the former explanation (1) is more pointed in connection with the approach of Theseus and his train. Cp. supr. 633.

τίνος.. χρείας ἀνύσαι The gen, depends on the notion of supplication in προσπίτνομεν, and ἀνύσαι (sc. ὑμᾶς) is epexegetic inf. See Essay on Language § 36. p. 64; ib. p. 66.

κεῖσε μολεῖν Dindorf, following Bothe, rejects these words. But the break made by the paroemiac has a good effect, giving room for the pause of astonishment caused by the decisive words of Theseus.

ἀπεῖπεν ἐμοί i. e. not merely He forbade me to approach, but In what he said to me he forbade all approach.

μήτ᾽ ἐπιφωνεῖν.. ἔχει And that no mortal voice should violate the place of holy rest where he is laid. Cp. ἐπιφημίζω.-But qy. μηδενί?

καλῶς is to be joined with πράσσοντα, = performing this. Cp. Τr. 579, δόμοις γὰρ ἦν | κείνου θανόντος ἐγκεκλημένον καλῶς: Εl. 793, κἀπεκύρωσεν καλῶς : ib. 1305, οὐ γὰρ ἂν καλῶς | ὑπηρετοίην τῷ παρόντι δαίμονι: Fr. 736, ἐπεὶ πέπρακται πᾶν τὸ τοῦ θεοῦ καλῶς, | χωρῶμεν ἤδη, κ.τ.λ.

For Ὅρκος here, cp. Hes. Op. D. 219.

ταῦτ᾽ ἂν ἀπαρκοῖ Cp. О. Т. 1182 and note.

τοῖσιν ὁμαίμοις Partly dative of direct reference after ἰόντα (Essay on Language § 12. p. 18), partly of remote reference after διακωλύσωμεν. ' In the hope of averting the bloody death which menaces our brothers: and, In the hope of averting from our brothers the death which threatens them.

ὅσα *γ΄ This is nearer to the MSS, and otherwise better than either ὁπόσ᾽ ἄν οἱ ὅσσ᾽ ἄν. 1773, foll. δράσω.. ἀποκάμνειν] Not only will I do this; but in all that I can do that may give help to you or pleasure to him below who is just gone, I ought not to weary. The emendation of Hermann, who omits γάρ before ἀποκάμνειν, rests on the observation that an anapaestic speech immediately before the final words of the chorus naturally ends with a paroemiac. Phil. 1468, Aj. 1416, alib. It may be further remarked that the resumption (Essay on Language p. 64, 6) is more harmonious than the new sentence beginning in the last line, and the full pause after πρὸς χάριν is unrhythmical.